Wiring Diagram

Wiring Manual
Automation and
Wiring Manual
Power Distribution
Moeller addresses worldwide:
www.moeller.net/address
E-mail: info@moeller.net
Internet: www.moeller.net
L1 L2 L3
21
1 3 5 13
-Q1 L
14 22 N
Issued by Moeller GmbH B -F1
I> I> I>
Hein-Moeller-Str. 7-11 2 4 6
D-53115 Bonn ~
+12 V
0V
© 2006 by Moeller GmbH, Germany 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
L01h
-Q11 -Q15 -Q13 F1
Subject to alteration 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
N01 h
FB0200-004GB-INT MDS/Doku/ 02/05 97 95

A -F2
Printed in the Federal Republic of 2 4 6 98 96
Germany (04/06) PE
Article No.: 106254 U1 V2

V1 M W2
W1 3 U2 L N N I1 I7 I8
-M1
For Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

All brand and product names are trade marks or registered
trademarks of the owner concerned
1st edition 2000, 12/99

2nd updated edition 2006, publication date 02/05
© Moeller GmbH, Bonn

Editor: Heidrun Riege
Translators: Uli Wright, Nigel Green, Dominik Kreuzer, David
Long, Terence Osborn
All the circuits are designed according to our best expertise

and have been carefully tested. They serve as practical
examples. Moeller GmbH refuses to accept liability for any
errors.
All rights reserved, including those of the translation.

No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form
(printed, photocopy, microfilm or any other process) or
processed, duplicated or distributed by means of electronic
systems without the written permission of Moeller GmbH,
Bonn, Germany.
Subject to alterations without notice.
Printed on bleached cellulose, 100 % free from chlorine and

acid.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/05
The Moeller Wiring Manual
chapter
Automation Systems 1
Electronic motor starters and drives 2
Command and signalling devices 3
Rotary Switches 4
Contactors and Relays 5
Motor-protective circuit-breaker 6
Circuit-breakers 7
All about Motors 8
Specifications, Formulae, Tables 9
Alphabetical index 10

0-1
The Moeller Wiring Manual
For0-2Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

Automation Systems
Page
Programmable logic controllers
PLCs 1-2
1
xSystem 1-4
Modular I/O system XI/ON 1-6
Networkable motor starters xStart-XS1 1-8
Networking PS40 series 1-10
Networking xSystem 1-11
Networking display and operating devices 1-12
Networking embedded HMI-PLCs 1-13
Engineering XC100/XC200 1-14
Engineering PS4 1-16
Engineering EM4 and LE4 1-19

1-1
Automation Systems
Programmable Logic Controllers, PLCs
Programmable logic controllers
The programmable (logic) controller (PLC) is an The most important specifications of a PLC are its
electronic device for machine or process control. maximum number of inputs/outputs, its memory
1 The PLC receives signals via inputs, processes size and its processing speed.
them according to the instructions of a program, The PS40 Series and the new xSystem are the two
and transfers signals to the outputs. automation systems offered by Moeller. These are
The program is created using programming described below.
software which is able to link inputs and outputs
in any required sequence, to measure time, or
even carry out arithmetic operations.
PS40 Series
Compact PLCs Modular PLCs
The PS4 compact PLCs have the following system The PS416 modular PLC has the following key
characteristics: features:
• Standard programming • High processing speed
• Remote and local expansion options • Compact size
• Integrated fieldbus interface (Suconet) • Wide range of networking options
• Plug-in screw terminals • Extensive memory
• Small, compact in size Sucosoft programming software
The controllers in this range are very versatile with Sucosoft is the name of the software for
a wide range of features, such as integrated programming the PS40 PLCs.
setpoint potentiometers, analog inputs/outputs or
Program examples are provided in the PLC
memory expansion modules (from PS4-150).
Beginners' Guide “Automation with
Programmable Logic Controllers” (FB2700-017).
Moellers' entire PLC range is described in the Main

Catalogue for Automation Systems and Drives, as
well as in the Product overview for automation.

Automation Systems
Programmable Logic Controllers, PLCs
PS4/EM4: LE4:
Compact PLC or expansion module Local expansion
PS416:
Modular PLC

1-3
Automation Systems
xSystem
xSystem
xSystem is Moeller's latest modular automation The XSoft software combines programming,
system. It can be configured for the individual configuring, testing, commissioning and
1 requirements of small or large applications. visualization functions in a single tool designed for
xSystem reduces the hardware and software the entire xSystem product range.
interfaces required. The system features IT
functions that are already integrated.
1
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
F10 F11 F9
+/- 7 8 9
F12 F13 ,
4 5
SHIFT
6
F14 F15 0 1 2 3 ESC CLEAR
ENTER
180˚ 1
2
F1 F5 1
2
3
ABC
DEF
F2 F6 4
5
GHI 6
JKL
MNO
F3 F7 7
SHIFT
8
PQRS 9
TUV
WXYZ
F4 F8 0
.
+/- ESC CLEAR ENTER
0 1 2
3
4 5 6
0 1 2 7
3
4 5 14
15 0 1 2
3
XC-CPU101 3
4 5 6
8 9 10 7 0 1 2
11 3
12 13 14 4 5 6
15
DC INPUT 8 9 10 7 0 1 2
EH-XD16 11 3
12 13 14 4 5 6
15
DC INPUT 8 9 10 7
EH-XD16 11
12 13 14
15
DC INPUT
EH-XD16
8
0 1 2
3
4 5 6
0 1 2 7
3
4 5 14
15
XC-CPU101
7
0 1 2
3
4 5 6
8 9 10 7 0 1 2
11 3
12 13 14 4 5 6
15
3
DC INPUT 8 9 10 7 0 1 2
EH-XD16 11 3
12 13 14 4 5 6
15
DC INPUT 8 9 10 7 0 1 2
EH-XD16 11 3
12 13 14 4 5 6
15
DC INPUT 8 9 10 7
EH-XD16 11
12 13 14
15
DC INPUT
EH-XD16
0 1 2
3
4 5 6
0 1 2 7
3
4 5 14
15
XC-CPU201

Automation Systems
xSystem
System components Refer to the following product overview and
• Modular PLCs manuals for further information:
– XC100 h – Automation product overview
8 DI, 6 DO, CANopen, RS 232, 4 interrupt
inputs
(AWB2700-7546) 1
– XC100 hardware and engineering
Slot for multimedia memory card, (AWB2724-1453)
64 – 256 KByte program/data memory, – XC200 hardware and engineering
4/8 KByte for retentive data, (AWB2724-1491)
0.5 ms/1000 instructions – XI/OC hardware and engineering
– XC200 g (AWB2725-1452)
8 DI, 6 DO, CANopen, RS 232, Ethernet, – XV100 hardware and engineering
2 counters, 2 interrupt inputs, WEB/OPC (AWB2726-1461)
server, USB, locally expandable with XI/OC – xStart-XS1 hardware and engineering
I/O modules, 256 – 512 KByte program/data (AWB2700-1426)
memory, 0.05 ms/1000 instructions – XSoft PLC programming (AWB2700-1437)
• Text display PLCs – Function blocks for XSoft (AWB2786-1456);
– Modular text display PLCs a including data handling function blocks for
Consisting of XC100, up to 3 XI/OC modules text display PLCs
and LCD text display with 4 x 20 or
8 x 40 lines/characters The latest edition is available from
– Compact text display PLC b http://www.moeller.net/support: Enter the
Minimum mounting dimensions and high numbers shown in brackets, e.g.
interface integration density (10 DI, 8 DO, “AWB2725-1452G”, as a search term.
8 DIO, 2 AI, 2 AO, 2 counter inputs,
2 interrupt inputs, 1 encoder input)
• XI/OC input/output modules c
– Can be fitted to the XC100/200
(max. 15 modules)
– Plug-in terminals with screw or springloaded
terminal
• XSoft
– Programming, configuring,
testing/commissioning in a single tool

1-5
Automation Systems
Modular I/O System XI/ON
XI/ON – the concept
XI/ON is a modular I/O system for use in industrial A complete XI/ON structure counts as a single bus
automation applications. It links sensors and station in any fieldbus structure and therefore only
1 actuators on the field level with the higher-level requires one bus address. The individual XI/ON
controller. Fieldbus protocols PROFIBUS-DP, peripheral modules are therefore independent of
CANopen and DeviceNet are supported. the higher-level fieldbus.
XI/ON offers modules for virtually every The I/O modules consist of a combination of a
application: base module designed as a terminal block, and a
• Digital input and output modules plug-in electronics module.
• Analog input and output modules The XI/ON peripheral modules are linked to the
• Technology modules fieldbus via the XI/ON gateway. This is used for
A XI/ON station consists of a gateway, power the communication between the XI/ON station
supply modules and I/O modules. and the other fieldbus stations.
b
c d
a
g
e
f
a Gateway e End plate

b Power supply module f Base module in slice design
c Electronics module in block design g Base module in block design
d Electronics module in slice design

Automation Systems
Modular I/O System XI/ON
Flexibility modules can then be plugged simply onto the
Each XI/ON station can be adapted exactly for the assigned base module.
required number of channels since the modules The base modules are available as terminal blocks.
are available in different levels of granularity. They are wired either with spring-loaded or screw 1
For example, digital input modules with 2, 4, 16 or terminals. The electronic modules can be fitted or
32 channels are available in slice or block design. removed during commissioning or for
A XI/ON station can contain modules in any maintenance without disturbing the wiring.
combination. This enables the system to be A design coding feature ensures that the
adapted to virtually any application in industrial electronic modules can only be fitted at the correct
automation. locations provided.
Compact design I/Oassistant diagnostics and engineering
The narrow mounting width of the XI/ON modules software
(gateway 50.4 mm; slice 12.6 mm, block The I/Oassistant provides support during the
100.8 mm) and the low mounting height make entire planning and implementation phase of an
the system ideal for use in applications where I/O system. It provides help for engineering the
space is at a premium. stations, the configuration and for setting the
Simple handling parameters. The software is used for
Apart from the gateway, all XI/ON modules commissioning systems and carrying out tests and
consist of a base module and an electronics diagnostics on the stations.
module. The entire documentation for the station,
The gateway and the base modules can be including a parts list for ordering, can be
snap-fitted on mounting rails. The electronics generated after the engineering phase.

1-7
Automation Systems
Networkable Motor Starters xStart-XS1
xStart-XS1
xStart-XS1 is the modular, networkable version of The xStart-XS1 modules consist of a base module
the tried and tested motor starter from Moeller. It and a power module that contains the tried and
1 connects the motors with the XI/ON system and tested PKZM0 motor-protective circuit-breaker
thus ensures flexible availability between systems, and one or two DILEM contactors. They enable the
irrespective of the fieldbus in use. connection of assigned motor ratings up to 4.0 kW
xStart-XS1 offers DOL and reversing starters in at a rated operational voltage Ue of 400 V AC.
different ratings and available with or without a
trip-indicating auxiliary contact (AGM).
d e d
b c b c
a
a XI/ON gateway
b Supply module
c XI/ON I/O modules
d xStart-XS1 DOL
starter module
e xStart-XS1 reversing
starter module
Flexibility Mounting
You can adapt xStart-XS1 exactly to the The complete module is mounted by simply
requirements of the system used. snap-fitting it onto two top-hat rails. You can also
xStart-XS1 can be used at any position on a XI/ON simply mount the base module and add the power
station so that you can organise your station section at a later time. Mounting and removal are
conveniently into system areas. carried out without any tools.
The motor can be disconnected at the machine by
using the rotary handle.

Automation Systems
Networkable Motor Starters xStart-XS1
3
1
4 125
2
Power supply accessories are available for power can be fed via a distribution system. This
reducing wiring costs. If several xStart-XS1 power distribution is available for an operating
modules are mounted next to each other, the current of up to 63 A.
L1
L2
L3
a
b
a Incoming terminal for

three-phase commoning link
b Three-phase commoning link for
up to 4 DOL starters without
trip-indicating auxiliary contact
AGM
c DOL starter without AGM
trip-indicating auxiliary contact
PE M PE M M PE M PE
3h 3h 3h 3h

1-9
Automation Systems
Networking PS40 Series
PROFIBUS-FMS
PROFIBUS-DP
Modbus
Suconet
1
Part No. Interface Memory
PS4-141-MM1 Suconet K + RS 232 64 kByte


PS416-BGT...
PS416-CPU...
PS416-POW...
PS416-INP...
PS416-OUT...
PS416-AIN...
PS40 Range
PS416-AIO...
PS416-CNT-200
PS416-TCS-200
PS416-NET... Suconet K (M/S)
PS416-COM-200 serial interface
PS416-MOD-200 Modbus(SI)
EM4-101-... Suconet K/K1

EM4-111-... Suconet K/K1
EM4-201-DX2 Suconet K
EM4-204-DX1 PROFIBUS-DP
max. 6 LE4
LE4-104-XP1
LE4-108-...
LE4-116-...
LE4-206-...
LE4-308-...
LE4-622-CX1 2 x 3 counter
LE4-633-CX1 3 x 3 path measurement
LE4-501-BS1 Suconet K
LE4-503-BS1 PROFIBUS-FMS (Slave)
CM4-504-GS1 Suconet K, PROFIBUS-DP

CM4-505-GS1 Gateway
ZB4-501-UM4 interface converter
S40 Programming software
For
1-10Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616
Automation Systems
Networking xSystem
PROFIBUS-DP
Suconet K
CANopen
Ethernet
Modbus
XC600
XC100
+ XIOC
xSystem
XC100-XV
+ XV100
XC200
+ XIOC

1-11
Automation Systems
Networking Display and Operator Devices
PROFIBUS-DP
DeviceNet
CANopen
Ethernet
Suconet
1 Display
Part no Resolution Code
Text operator panel M14
MI4-110-KC1 120 X 32 11 LCD monochrome

MI4-110-KD1 120 X 32 19 LCD monochrome
MI4-110-KG1/2 120 X 32 35 LCD monochrome
MI4-140-KF1 120 X 64 27 LCD monochrome
MI4-140-KI1 240 X 64 46 LCD monochrome
MI4-140-KJ1 240 X 64 46 LCD monochrome
HMI (Display and operating device)
Graphic operator panel M14
MI4-150-KI1 320 X 240 56 Monochrome

MI4-450-KI1 320 X 240 56 STN colour
MI4-570-KH1 640 X 480 50 TFT
Touch operator panel M14 (Resistive)
MI4-130-TA1 320 X 240 – Monochrome

MI4-450-TA1 320 X 240 – STN colour
MI4-550-TA1 320 X 240 – TFT colour
MI4-570-TA2 640 X 480 – TFT
MI4-580-TA1 800 X 600 – TFT
MI4-590-TA1 1024 X 768 – TFT
Touch operator panel MV4 (Infra-red)
For
Automation Systems
Networking Embedded HMI-PLC
PROFIBUS-DP
DeviceNet
CANopen
Ethernet
Suconet
1
Part no Resolution Touch Display
MC-HPG-230 320 X 240 Infra-red STN colour

MC-HPG-230-DP
MC-HPG-300 640 X 480 Infra-red TFT
MC-HPG-300-DP
Embedded HMI-PLC
XVH-340-57CAN 320 X 240 Infra-red STN colour

XVH-330-57CAN 320 X 240 Resistive STN colour
XV-442-57CQB-x-13-1 320 X 240 Infra-red STN colour

XV-432-57CQB-x-13-1 320 X 240 Resistive STN colour
XV-440-10TVB-x-13-1 640 X 480 Infra-red TFT

XV-430-10TVB-x-13-1 640 X 480 Resistive TFT
XV-440-12TSB-x-13-1 800 X 600 Infra-red TFT

XV-430-12TSB-x-13-1 800 X 600 Resistive TFT
XV-440-15TXB-x-13-1 1024 X 768 Infra-red TFT

XV-430-15TXB-x-13-1 1024 X 768 Resistive TFT
Note: The XVH- ... devices are also available

with RS 232 or MPI interface.

1-13
Automation Systems
Engineering XC100/XC200
Device arrangement
Install the rack and the PLC horizontally in the
control cabinet – as shown in the following figure.
1 c a Clearance > 50 mm
b Clearance > 75 mm from
active elements
a b c Cable duct
a a
b b
a b
Terminal assignment Wiring example of power supply unit

The terminals for the power supply and the local The voltage terminal 0VQ/24VQ is only used for
I/O have the following assignment: the power supply of the local 8 inputs and 6
outputs, and is potentially isolated from the bus.
The outputs 0 to 3 can be loaded with 500 mA
and the outputs 4 and 5 with 1 A, each with a
100 % duty factor (DF) and a simultaneity factor
%IX 0.0 of 1.
%IX 0.1 The wiring example shows the wiring with a
%IX 0.2
%IX 0.3 separate power supply for the PLC and the IO
%IX 0.4 terminals. If only one power supply is used, the
%IX 0.5
%IX 0.6 following terminals must be connected:
%IX 0.7
%QX 0.0 24 V to 24VQ and 0 V to 0VQ.
%QX 0.1
%QX 0.2
%QX 0.3
%QX 0.4
%QX 0.5
24 VQ
0 VQ
24 V
0V
For
Automation Systems
Engineering XC100/XC200
You use the XT-SUB-D/RJ45 programming cable
for the physical connection.
0
2
4
1
3 CANopen interface 1
6 5
7 Assignment of the 6-pole Combicon connector:
0
2 1
3
Terminal Signal
4
5
6 GND
6 5 CAN_L
+ 24 V H 5
0VH 4 4 CAN_H
+ 24 VQ H
3 3 GND
0 VQ H
2
2 CAN_L
1
1 CAN_H
RS 232 serial interface
Only use a cable that is permissible for CANopen
This interface is used by the XC100 to
with the following properties:
communicate with the PC. The physical
connection is implemented via an RJ 45 interface. • Surge impedance 108 to 132 O
The interface is not isolated. The connector has • Capacitance per unit length < 50 pF/m
the following assignment: CAN_H CAN_H
120 O
120 O
Pin Designation Description

CAN_L CAN_L
CAN_GND CAN_GND
1
2
Cable cross section
3
Baud rate [Kbit/s]
Loop resistance
4
Length [m]
5
6
[O/km]
[mm2]
7
8
20 1000 0.75 – 0.80 16
4 GND Ground
125 500 0.50 – 0.60 40
5 TxD Transmit Data
250 250 0.50 – 0.60 40
7 GND Ground
500 100 0.34 – 0.60 60
8 RxD Receive Data
1000 40 0.25 – 0.34 70
You can use the COM1 or COM2 interface on the
PC.

1-15
Automation Systems
Engineering PS4
PS4-151-MM1 compact PLC
• Wiring for a 230 V AC supply circuit • 24 V DC inputs from an external power supply
• Relay contacts with different potentials: 230 V unit, earthed operation
1 AC and 24 V DC
Q1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE 1 3 5
Q2 1
F2
I> I> I> 2
2 4 6 L1 N PE
T1
** MM * T2 *
1 +24 V 0V
F1
2
+24 V 0V +24 V 0V
B1 B2
2.5 mm 2
A A
X1
L1
.1
.1
.0
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
N
24 V
24 V
0V
0V
I I
PRG Suconet K IA/QA
R R
U10
0V
U0
U1
.0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7
1 2
A1
A1
F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 M1
A2
X1 A1
P1 P2
A1 X2 A1 A2 A1 A1
Q11 Q12 Q13 Q14
A2 A2 A2 A2
* Insulation monitoring must be provided ** IEC/EN 60204-1 specifies that a control

where the control circuits are not earthed. transformer is required.
(EN 60204-1 and VDE 0100-725)
For
Automation Systems
Engineering PS4
• Shared power supply for PLC and • Non-earthed operation with insulation
inputs/outputs monitoring
L1
1
L2
L3
N
PE 1
1 3 5
Q1 F2
1 1
2
I> I> I>
C1 F1 C1 F3
21
2 4 6 2 2
S1
13 23 33 43
22 A1
Q11 Q11 13 12 14
14 24 34 44 P1
S2
3
L1 L2 L3 PE L1 N PE
14 11
P1 *
T1 T2 A1
Q11 A2
+24 V 0V +24 V 0V
A2
+24 V 0V
1 1
F4 F5
2 2
+24 V 0 V
13 13
S3 B4
14 14
A
.1
.0
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
0V
24 V
24 V
0V
A1 I
PRG Suconet K
Q
U10
0V
U1
U0
.1
.0
.2
.3
.4
.5
1 2
A1 A1 A1
Q12 Q13 M1
A2 A2
A2
* For operation without insulation monitoring,

0 V must be linked with the PE potential in
the control circuits.

1-17
Automation Systems
Engineering PS4
• Shared power supply for PLC and • Non-earthed operation with insulation
inputs/outputs monitoring
1 L1
L2
L3
N
PE 1
1 3 5
Q1 F2
1 1
2
I> I> I>
C1 F1 C1 F3
21
2 4 6 2 2
S1
13 23 33 43
22 A1
Q11 Q11 13 12 14
14 24 34 44 P1
L1 L2 L3 PE a L1 N PE S2
14 11
P1 *
3
T1 T2 A1
Q11 A2
+24 V 0V +24 V 0V
A2
+24 V 0V
F4 F5 F6
.1
.1
.2
.3
.2
.3
.5
.5
.7
.7
.0
.6
.4
.6
.0
0 VI
0 VI
.4
24 V
0V
Digital Input Digital Input

PRG Suconet K
Digital Output Digital Input Digital Output
24 V
0 VQ
0 VA
U10
U0
U1
.2
.5
.2
.5
.3
.4
.3
.4
.6
.7
.1
.1
.0
.0
1 2
* For operation without insulation

monitoring, 0 V must be linked with the PE
potential in the control circuits.
For
Automation Systems
Engineering EM4 and LE4
EM4-201-DX2 expansion module and LE4-116-XD1 local expansion
• Inputs and outputs have a separate power • Earthed operation
supply
1
Q1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE 1 3 5 1 3 5
Q2 Q3
I> I> I> I> I> I>

2 4 6 2 4 6
L1 N PE L1 N PE
T1 * T2 *
+24 V 0V +24 V 0V
1
F2
2
1
F1
2
15 13 11 11 A1 A1
K1 Q15 Q16 Q17 K1 Q12

18 14 12 12 A2 A2
.1
.1
.0
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
24 V
0V
0V
24 V
0V
A1 I Q
Suconet K1/K
I Q
24 V
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
0V
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.9
.8
.9
.8
1 2
13 13 A1 X1
Q18 Q19 Q14 P1

14 14 A2 X2
* Insulation monitoring must be provided

where the control circuits are not earthed.

1-19
Notes
For
Electronic motor starters and drives
Page
General 2-2
Basics of drives engineering 2-7
Soft starters DS4 2-19
Soft starters DM4 2-22
2
Frequency inverters DF5, DV5, DF6 and DV6 2-26
Connection examples DS4 2-38
Connection examples DM4 2-54
Connection examples DF5, DV5 2-69
Connection examples DF6 2-77
Connection examples DV6 2-80
Rapid Link system 2-86

2-1
General
The complete power supply and control programme for motors
As the applications differ, so do the requirements • During DOL starting (star-delta, reversing
made of the electric drives: starter or pole-switching), unwanted current
• In the simplest case, the motor is switched with and torque peaks occur. Soft starters eliminate
an electromechanical contactor. Combinations these to ensure gentle starting and prevent an
consisting of motor protection and line excessive burden on the power source.
2 protection are termed motor starter. • Where an infinitely adjustable speed or a torque
• If frequent and/or silent switching is required, adjustment is necessary, frequency inverters
contactless semiconductor contactors are used. (U/f inverters, vector frequency inverters, servo)
In addition to conventional line, short-circuit are used today.
and overload protection, superfast As a general rule, the application determines the
semiconductor fuses are required for type “2” drive.
coordination and may be needed for type “1”
coordination.
Frequent
Soft
Switching and Speed control
starting
silent switching
Power distribution
Short-circuit, Short-circiuit, Short-circiuit,

overload, overload, Short-circuit,
Protection overload
semi-conductor semi-conductor semi-conductor
Electro Electro Electro

Switching Electronic
mechanical mechanical mechanical
Frequenz-
Electronic
Control umrichter
starter
Motorschutz
M M M M M
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~ 3~
Three-phase asynchronous motors

A drive task first requires a drive motor whose
characteristics with regard to speed, torque and
control options are in accord with the set task.

General
The three-phase asynchronous motor is the The effect of induction produces the rotating field
world’s most common electric motor. Its and a torque in the rotor winding. The motor
popularity is the result of a rugged, simple speed is determined by the number of pole pairs
construction, high degrees of protection, and the frequency of the supply voltage. The
standardized sizes and low cost. direction of rotation can be reversed by swapping
over two of the supply phases:
2
f x 60
ns =
p
ns = Revolutions per minute

Three-phase motors have typical starting
f = Frequency of voltage in Hz
characteristics, with tightening torque MA,
p = Number of pole pairs
pull-out torque MK and rated-load torque MN.
M, I I Example: 4-pole motor (number of pole pairs = 2),
A Mk mains frequency = 50 Hz, n = 1500 r.p.m.
MA (synchronous speed, speed of rotating field)
Ms
Because of the induction effect, the asynchronous
MN motor’s rotor can not reach the rotating field’s
MB synchronous speed even at idle. The difference
MM between synchronous speed and rotor speed is
ML termed slip.
IN
Slip speed:
0 nN nS n ns – n
S =
ns
The three-phase motor contains three phase
windings that are offset from one another by Speed of an asynchronous machine:
120 °/p (p = number of pole pairs). To generate a f x 60
rotating field in the motor, a voltage is applied to n = (1 – s)
p
each phase in turn at a time delay of 120 °.
L1 L2 L3 The output power is as
follows:
Mxn P2
P2 = h=
90˚ 180˚ 270˚ 360˚ 9550 P2
0
P1 = U x I x W3 – p.f.
P2 = Shaft rating in kW
M = Torque in Nm
n = Speed in r.p.m.
120˚ 120˚ 120˚

2-3
General
The motor’s electrical and mechanical rating are As a rule, three-phase asynchronous motors are
recorded on its nameplate. connected to their power supply with six terminal
bolts. There are basically two connection
Motor & Co GmbH configurations: star and delta.
Typ 160 l W2 U2 V2
2 3 ~ Mot. Nr. 12345-88

Dy 400/690 V 29/17 A
S1 15 kW y 0,85
1430 U/min 50 Hz
Iso.-Kl. F IP 54 t U1 V1 W1
IEC34-1/VDE 0530
Star connection Delta connection
L3 W1 L3
V2
V1 W2 V1 W1
L2 V2 L2
ULN U2
ULN U2 W2
L1 U1 L1
ILN ILN U1
ULN = W3 x UW ILN = IW ULN = UW ILN = W3 x IW
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
Note:
In continuous operation, the mains voltage must
be the same as the motor’s rated voltage.

General
Starting and operating methods

The most important starting and operating
methods for three-phase asynchronous motors
include:
DOL starting Star-delta circuit

(electromechanical) (electromechanical)
2
D y
M M
3h 3h
M ~ I, n = constant My ~ l Md, n = constant
IN IN
MN MN
y
nN nN
U U D
100 % 100 %
58 %
y
t t

2-5
General
Soft starter and semiconductor contactor Frequency inverter

(electronic) (electronic)
2
POWER
Hz ALARM
RUN
I O
PRG
PRG
ENTER
M
3h M
3h
M ~ U2, n = constant M ~ U/f, n = variable
IN
IN
MN MN
nN n0 n1 n2 ... nN ... nmax
U U
100 % 100 %
U2
U Boost
U Boost
30 %
t Ramp t Ramp
t t
UBoost = Start pedestal (adjustable) U2 = Output voltage (adjustable)

tRamp = Ramp time (adjustable) UBoost = Start pedestal (adjustable)
tRamp = Ramp time (adjustable)

Basics of drives engineering
Power electronics devices
The power electronics devices provide infinitely Frequency inverters
variable adjustment of physical variables – such as Frequency inverters convert the AC or three-phase
speed or torque – to the application process. The system with its constant voltage and frequency
power is drawn from the electrical mains, into a new, three-phase system with variable
converted in the power electronics apparatus and voltage and frequency. This voltage/frequency
fed to the consumer (i.e. the motor). control enables stepless speed control of 2
Semiconductor contactors three-phase motors. The controlled drive can be
Semiconductor contactor allow fast, silent operated at rated-load torque even at low speeds.
switching of three-phase motors and resistive Vector frequency inverters
loads. Switching takes place automatically at the While conventional frequency inverters control
ideal point in time and suppresses unwanted three-phase motors using a
current and voltage peaks. charactieristic-controlled U/f (voltage/frequency)
Soft starters relationship, vector frequency inverters work
Soft starters ramp the voltage fed to the motor up using a sensorless, flow-oriented control of the
to mains voltage, so that the motor starts almost motor’s magnetic field. The controlled variable is
jolt-free. The voltage reduction leads to a the motor current. This allows an opimized control
square-law torque reduction in relation to the of the torque for demanding applications (mixers
motor’s normal starting torque. Soft starter are and agitators, extruders, transport and conveying
therefore especially well suited to starting loads installations).
with a square-law speed or torque characteristic
(such as pumps or fans).

2-7
Moeller drives
Designation Model Rated current Mains supply Assigned motor

[A] voltage rating
[V] [kW]
2 Semiconductor DS4-140-H 10–50 1 AC 110–500 –

contactor for resistive
and inductive load
Soft starter DS4-340-M 6–23 3 AC 110–500 2.2–11 (400 V)
Soft starter with DS4-340-MR 6–23 3 AC 110–500 2.2–11 (400 V)
bidirectional operation
Soft starter with bypass DS4-340-MX, 16–46 3 AC 110–500 7.5–22 (400 V)
relay DS4-340-M + DIL
Soft starter with bypass DS4-340-MXR 16–31 3 AC 110–500 7.5–15 (400 V)
relay and bidirectional
operation
Soft starters (in-line DM4-340... 16–900 3 AC 230 – 460 7.5–500 (400 V)
connection type)
Soft starters (delta DM4-340... 16–900 3 AC 230 – 460 11–900 (400 V)
connection type)
Frequency inverters DF5-322... 1.4–10 1 AC 230 0.18–2.2 (230 V)
3 AC 230
Frequency inverters DF5-340... 1.5–16 3 AC 400 0.37–7.5 (400 V)
Frequency inverters DF6-340... 22–230 3 AC 400 11–132 (400 V)
Vector frequency DV5-322... 1.4–11 1 AC 230 0.18–2.2 (230 V)
inverters 3 AC 230
Vector frequency DV5-340... 1.5–16 3 AC 400 0.37–7.5 (400 V)
inverters
Vector frequency DV6-340... 2.5–260 3 AC 400 0.75–132 (400 V)
inverters

POWER
Hz ALARM
RUN
I O
PRG
PRG
ENTER
Semiconductor contactors DS4-… Frequency inverters DF5-…

Vector frequency inverters DV5-…
Frequency inverters DF6-320-…

Vector frequency inverters DV6-320-…
Soft starters DM4-…

2-9
DOL starting
In the simplest case, and especially at low rated synchronous speed [ns ~ f].
output (up to about 2.2 kW), the three-phase Due to rotor slippage, The operating speed [n]
motor is connected directly to mains voltage. In deviates from this value in relation to the rotating
most applications, the connection is made with an field [n = ns x (1 – s)], slippage being
electromechanical contactor. [s = (ns – n)/ns].
2 In this control mode, – on the mains at fixed On starting (s = 1), a high starting current occurs,
voltage and frequency – the asynchronous reaching up to ten times the rated current Ie.
motor’s speed is only slightly below the
I 7 M2
Ie MN
6
4
1 ML
3
0.25 0.5 0.75 1 0.25 0.5 0.75 1

n/nN n/nN
I/Ie: 6...10 M/MN: 0.25...2.5
Features of DOL starting If an application demands frequent and/or silent

• For low- and medium-power three-phase switching, or if adverse environmental conditions
motors prevent the effective use of electromechanical
• Three connection lines (circuit layout: star or switching elements, electronic semiconductor
delta) contactors are required. In addition to short-circuit
• High starting torque and overload protection, the semiconductor
• Very high mechanical load contactor must be protected with a superfast fuse.
• High current peaks According to IEC/EN 60947, type “2”
• Voltage dips coordination requires the use of a superfast
• Simple switching devices semiconductor fuse. For type “1” coordination, –
the majority of cases – a superfast semiconductor
fuse is not necessary. Here are a few examples:
For
• Building services management: • Other applications: Non-motor-driven loads,
– Reversing drive for lift doors such as
– Starting heat-exchanger units – Heater elements in extruders
– Starting conveyor belts – Heater elements in kilns
• In critical atmospheres: – Controlling lighting systems.
– Controlling filling station petrol pump motors
– Controlling pumps in paint processing plants. 2
Motor start in star-delta configuration
The star-delta circuit layout is the most commonly motor control. The customer saves on expensive
used configuration for starting three-phase wiring and installation time and reduces the
motors. likelihood of faults.
The completely factory prewired SDAINL star-delta
combination from Moeller provides convenient
.
I 7 M2
Ie MN
6
4
1 ML
3
0.25 0.5 0.75 1 0.25 0.5 0.75 1

n/nN n/nN
I/Ie: 1.5...2.5 M/MN: 0.5
Features of star-delta starting

• For low- to high-power three-phase motors
• Reduced starting current
• Six connection cables
• Reduced starting torque
• Current peak on changeover from star to delta
• Mechanical load on changeover from star to
delta

2-11
Soft starters (electronic motor start)
The characteristic curves for DOL and star-delta The ideal scenario of a smooth torque build-up
starting show current and torque step changes, and a controlled current reduction in the starting
which have a number of negative effects, phase is made possible by the electronic soft
especially at medium and high motor ratings: starter. Providing infinitely variable control of the
• High mechanical machine loads three-phase motor’s supply voltage in the starting
2 • Rapid wear phase, it matches the motor to the load behaviour
• Increased servicing costs of the driven machine and accelerates it smoothly.
• High supply costs from the power supply This avoids mechanical jolting and suppresses
companies (peak current calculation) current peaks. Soft starters present an electronic
• High mains and generator load alternative to the conventional star-delta switch.
• Voltage dips with a negative effect in other
consumers
I 7 M2
Ie MN
6
4
1 ML
3
0.25 0.5 0.75 1 0.25 0.5 0.75 1

n/nN n/nN
I/Ie: 1...5 M/MN: 0.15...1
Features of the soft starters

• For low- to high-power three-phase motors
• No current peaks
• Zero maintenance
• Reduced adjustable starting torque
For
Parallel connection of several motors to a
single soft starter L1
L2
You can also use soft starters to start several
L3
motors connected in parallel. This does not,
however, allow the behaviour of the individual
motors to be controlled. Each motor must be
separately fitted with suitable overload
F1 2
protection. Q1
Note:
The total current consumption of the connected
motors must not exceed the soft starter’s rated Q11
operational current Ie.
Note: L1 L2 L3
Each motor must be individually protected with a
thermistor and/or overload relay. Q21
T1 T2 T3
Caution!
Switching must not take place in the soft starter’s
output as the resulting voltage peaks can damage
the thyristors in the power section.
Problems may arise during starting if there are
significant differences in the connected motors’ F11 F12
ratings (for example 1.5 kW and 11 kW): The
lower-rated motors may not be able to reach the
required torque due to the relatively large ohmic M M
M1 M2
resistance of these motors’ stators, requiring a 3 3
higher voltage during starting.
It is advisable to use this circuit type only with

motors of a similar rating.

2-13
Using soft starters with pole-changing Using soft starters for motors with
motors power-factor correction
Soft starters can be connected in the supply line Caution!
before pole-changing, a section
No capacitive loads must be connected at the soft
“Pole-changing motors”, page 8-51).
starter’s output.
2 Note:
Power-factor corrected motors or motor groups
All changeovers (high/low speed) must take place must not be started with soft starters. Mains-side
at standstill. compensation is permissible when the ramp time
The start signal must be issued only when a (starting phase) has completed (i.e. the TOR (Top
contact sequence has been selected and a start of Ramp) signal has been issued) and the
signal for pole-changing was set. capacitors exhibit a series inductance.
Control is comparable to cascade control with the
difference that the changeover is made not to the Note:
next motor but to the other winding (TOR =
If electronic devices (such as, soft starters,
top-of-ramp signal).
frequency inverters or UPS), use capacitors and
correction circuits only with a choke fitted
Using soft starters with three-phase upstream.
slipring motors
When upgrading or modernizing older a page 2-16.
installations, contactors and rotor resistors of
multistage three-phase stator automatic starters
can be replaced with soft starters. This is done by
removing the rotor resistors and assigned
contactors and short-circuiting the sliprings of the
motor’s rotor. The soft starter is then connected
into the incomer and provides stepless starting of
the motor. (a page 2-15).
For
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13
F1 F1
14 14
Q1 I> I> I> Q1 I> I> I>

2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 1 3 5
1 3 5 1 3 5 5
Q11 Q43 Q42 Q41 Q11 2 4 6

2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
L1 L2 L3
Q21
T1 T2 T3
U V W
U V W PE
R3 R2 R1 K
K
M U3 U2 U1
M L
L
V3 V2 3 M
3 M V1
W3 W2 W2
M1 M1
2-15
2
Q12
TOR
T1 T2 T3
L1 L2 L3
M
3
Q11
M1
L1
L2
L3
Q21
Q1
Not permissible
Caution!
T1 T2 T3
L1 L2 L3
M
3
Q11
M1
Q21
L1
L2
L3
Q1
M
3
Q11
M1
L1
L2
L3
Q1
For
Connecting star points when using soft starters or semiconductor contactors
Caution!
The connection of the star point to the PE or N
conductor is not permissible when using
controlled semiconductor contactors or soft
starters. This applies especially to
two-phase-controlled starters.
2
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Q21
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
M1 M
3
Caution!
R1 Not permissible

2-17
Soft starters and classification type to Type “2” coordination
IEC/EN 60947-4-3 In type “2” coordination, the contactor or soft
The following classification types are defined in starter must not endanger persons or the
IEC/EN 60947-4-3, 8.2.5.1: installation in the event of a short-circuit and
must be capable of continued use without repairs
Type “1” coordination or parts replacements. For hybrid control devices
2 In type “1” coordination, the contactor or soft and contactors, there is a risk of contact welding.
starter must not endanger persons or the In this case the manufacturer must provide
installation in the event of a short-circuit and appropriate maintenance instructions.
does not have to be capable of continued use
The coordinated short-circuit protection device
without repairs or parts replacements.
(SCPD) must trip in the event of a short-circuit.
Blown fuses must be replaced. This is part of
normal operation (for the fuse), also for type “2”
coordination.
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
PE PE
Q1 Q1
I> I> I> I> I> I>
F1 F1
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Q21 Q21
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
M M
M1 3 M1 3
For
Soft starters DS4
Product attributes
• Construction, mounting and connection as for
contactor
• Automatic control voltage detection
– 24 V DC g 15 % 110 to 240 V AC g 15 %
– Safe starting at 85 % Umin
• Operation indication by LED 2
• Individually adjustable start and stop ramps
(0.5 to 10 s)
• Adjustable start pedestal (30 to 100 %)
• Relay contact (N/O contact): operating signal,
TOR (top of ramp)
2
1
5
0,5
t-Start (s)
0 10
60
50
80
40
U-Start (%) 30 100
2
1
5
0,5
t-Stop (s) 0 10

2-19
Soft starters DS4
LED displays
The LEDs indicate the operational states as
follows:
Red LED Green LED Function
Lit Lit Init, LEDs lit only briefly, Init itself takes about 2 seconds
2 Depending on device:
– All devices: LED briefly lit once
– DC devices: after a brief pause, the LEDs briefly light up again
Off Off Device is off
Off Flashing at 2 s Ready for operation, power supply OK, but no start signal
intervals
Off Flashing at 0.5 s Device in operation, ramp is active (soft start or soft stop); on M(X)R
interval the current rotating field direction is also indicated.
Off Lit Device in operation, top-of-ramp reached; on M(X)R the current
rotating field direction is also indicated.
Flashing at Off Fault
0.5 s interval
U
Ue
A1, A2
FWD, REV, 0
Uout = 100 %
Run-
(FWD/REV-) LED
Error-LED
Initialization Fault Ready for operation In ramp Top of ramp
For
Soft starters DS4
Power section versions
DOL starters DOL starters Reversing starters Reversing starters
with bypass with bypass
L1 L2 L3
DS4-340-...-M DS4-340-...-MX DS4-340-...-MR DS4-340-...-MXR
L1 L2 L3
2
DS4
T1 T2 T3
M
3

2-21
Soft starters DM4
Product attributes
• Configurable, communications-capable soft Instead of the keypad, intelligent interfaces can
starter with plug-in control signal terminals and also be used:
interface for optional units: • Serial RS 232/RS 485 interface (configuration
– Operator control and programming unit through PC software)
– Serial interface • Suconet K fieldbus module (interface on every
2 – Fieldbus module Moeller PLC)
• Application selector switch with • PROFIBUS DP fieldbus module
user-programmable parameter sets for 10 The DM4 soft starters provide the most convenient
standard applications method of implementing soft starting. Because –
• I2t controller in addition to phase failure and motor current
– Current limitation monitoring – the motor winding temperature is
– Overload protection signalled through the built-in thermistor input, the
– Idle/undercurrent detection (e.g. belt break- soft starters eliminate the need for additional,
age) external components, such as motor protective
• Kickstarting and heavy starting relays. DM4 conforms to the IEC/EN 60947-4-2
• Automatic control voltage detection standard.
• 3 relays, e.g. fault signal, TOR (top of ramp) With the soft starter, reducing the voltage results
Ten default parameter sets for typical applications in a reduction of the high starting currents of the
can be simply called up with a selector switch. three-phase motor, although the torque is also
Additional plant-specific settings can be defined reduced [Istartup ~ U] and [M ~ U2]. After starting,
with an optional keypad. the motor reaches its rated speed with all of the
In three-phase regulator control mode, for solutions described above. For starting motors at
example, three-phase resistive and inductive loads rated-load torque and/or for motor operation at a
– heaters, lighting systems, transformers – can be motor speed that is independent of the supply
controlled with the DM4. Both open-loop and – frequency, a frequency inverter is required.
with measured value feedback – closed-loop
control are possible.
For
Soft starters DM4
2
0 - standart
1 - high torque
2 - pump
3 - pump kickstart
4 - light conveyor
5 - heavy conveyor
6 - low inertia
fan
7 - high inertia
fan
8 - recip compressor
9 - screw compressor
ly
ult
pp
flash
su
fa
0 - standard
1 - high torque on a
2 - pump
n
c/l
ru
3 - pump kickstart
4 - light conveyor
5 - heavy conveyor
6 - low inertia fan
7 - high inertia fan b
8 - recip compressor
9 - screw compressor

2-23
Soft starters DM4
Standard applications (selector switch)
Labelling on Indication on Meaning Notes

device keypad
Standard Standard Standard Default settings, suitable without adaptation
2 for most applications
High torque1) High Torque High breakaway Drives with higher friction torque at standstill
torque
Pump Pump Small pump Pump drives up to 15 kW
Pump Pump.w.Kick Large pump Pump drives over 15 kW Longer deceleration
Kickstart times.
Light LightConvey Light conveyor
conveyor
Heavy HeavyConvey Heavy-duty
conveyor conveyor
Low inertia LowInert.fan Low-inertia fan Fan drive with relatively small mass inertia
fan moment of up to 15 times the motor’s inertia
moment
High inertia HighInertfan High-inertia fan Fan drive with relatively large mass inertia
fan moment of over 15 times the motor’s inertia
moment Longer ramp-up times.
Recip RecipCompres Reciprocal Higher start pedestal, p.f. optimization
compressor compressor matched
Screw ScrewCompres Screw Increased current consumption, no current
compressor compressor limitation
1) For the “High Torque” setting, the soft starter must be able to supply 1.5 times the motor’s rated current.
Delta circuit Note:

Normally, soft starters are connected directly in The delta connection is more cost-effective at
series (in-line) with the motor. The DM4 soft motor ratings over 30 kW and when replacing
starters also allow a delta connection. star-delta switches.
Advantage:
• This is a less expensive alternative since the soft
starter has to deliver only 58 % of the motor’s
rated current.
Disadvantages over in-line connection:
• As in a star-delta circuit, the motor must be
connected with six conductors.
• The DM4’s overload protection is active only in
one phase, so that additional motor protection
must be fitted in the parallel phase or in the
supply cable.
For
Soft starters DM4
In-Line ULN 400 V In-Delta
NZM7-125N-OBI NZM7-125N
I I I I I I
DILM115 DILM115
100 A 100 A
3
DM4-340-55K DM4-340-30K
(105 A) (59 A)

400 / 690 V 100 / 59 A
S1 55 kW cos ϕ 0.86
U1 V1 W1 M 1410 rpm 50 Hz M U1 V1 W1
3~ 3~
W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
55 kW 55 kW
400 V 400 V
2-25
2
Frequency inverters DF5, DV5, DF6, DV6
Design and mode of operation
Frequency inverters provide variable, stepless
speed control of three-phase motors.
Energy flow
2
F
U, f, I M, n
U, f, (I) M m v
Variable 3~
Constant
J
Mains Electronic actuator Motor Load
I ~ M Mxn
Pel = U x I x √3 x y PL =
f ~ n 9550
Frequency inverters convert constant mains almost only active power (p.f. ~ 1) from the
voltage and frequency into a DC voltage, from supplying mains. The reactive power needed for
which they generate a new three-phase supply motor operation is supplied by the DC link. This
with variable voltage and frequency for the eliminates the need for p.f. correction on the
three-phase motor. The frequency inverter draws mains side.
a b c IGBT
L1, L1
L2, N M
3~
L3
a Rectifier c Inverter with IGBT

b DC link d Open-/closed-loop control
For
The frequency-controlled three-phase motor is The possibilities for individual or plant-specific
today a standard component for infinitely variable coordination are determined by the specific
speed and torque regulation, providing efficient, features of the inverters and by the modulation
energy-saving power either as an individual drive procedure used.
or as part of an automated installation.
7 2
2
I M
Ie 6 MN
5
M
4 MN
1 ML
3
I
2 IN
1
0.25 0.5 0.75 1 0.25 0.5 0.75 1

n/nN n/nN
I/Ie: 0...1.8 M/MN: 0.1...1.5
Modulation procedure of inverters
An inverter basically consists of six electronic circuit switches the IGBTs on and off according to
switches and is today usually made with IGBTs various principles (modulation procedures) to
(insulated gate bipolar transistors). The control change the frequency inverter’s output frequency.
Sensorless vector control

The switching patterns for the inverter are In flow-regulated vector control, the active and
calculated with the PWM (pulse-width reactive current components are calculated from
modulation) switching patterns. In voltage vector the measured motor currents, compared with the
control mode, the amplitude and frequency of the values from the motor model and, if necessary,
voltage vector are controlled in dependence of corrected. The amplitude, frequency and
slippage and load current. This allows large speed inclination of the voltage vector are controlled
ranges and highly accurate speeds to be achieved directly. This allows operation at the current limit
without speed feedback. This control method (U/f and the achievement of large speed ranges and
control) is the preferred method for parallel highly accurate speeds. Especially noteworthy is
operation of several motors with one frequency the drive’s dynamic output at low speeds, for
inverter. example in lifting and winding applications.

2-27
The key advantage of sensorless vector The following illustration shows a simplified
technology is that the motor current can be equivalent circuit diagram for the asynchronous
regulated to match the motor’s rated current. This motor and associated current vectors:
allows dynamic torque regulation to be
implemented for three-phase asynchronous
motors.
2 X1 R1 X'2 R'2 / s
b o
i1 iw
i1 iw
u1 im Xh im~ V ib
d
im
e
a b c ia
a Stator i1 = Stator current (phase current)

b Air gap iµ = Flux-generating current component
c Rotor iw = Torque-generating current component
d Rotor flow-oriented R’2 /s = Slip-dependent rotor resistance
e Stator-oriented
In sensorless vector control, the flux-generating The physical motor data required for the model is
current iµ and the torque-generating current iw are formed from the entered and measured
calculated from the measured stator voltage u1 (self-tuning) parameters.
and stator current i1. The calculation is performed
with a dynamic motor model (electrical equivalent
circuit of the three-phase motor) with adaptive
current regulators, taking into account the
saturation of the main field and the iron loss. The
two current components are set according to their
value and phase in a rotating coordinate system
(o) to the stator reference system (a, b).
For
Characteristics of frequency inverters DF5, DF6
• Infinitely variable speed control through Individual settings can be made with an optional
voltage/frequency control (U/f) keypad. Various control modes can be selected
• High starting and acceleration torque and configured in a number of layers,
• Constant torque in motor’s rated range For applications with pressure and flow control, all
• EMC measures (optional: radio interference devices contain a built-in PID controller that can
filter, screened motor cable) be matched to any system.
2
Additional features of sensorless vector A further advantage of the frequency inverters is
control for frequency inverters DV5 and DV6 that they eliminate the need for external
• Infinitely variable torque control, also at zero components for monitoring and motor protection.
speed On the mains side, only a fuse or circuit-breaker
• Low torque control time (PHKZ) is needed for line and short-circuit
• Increased concentricity and constancy of speed protection. The frequency inverter’s inputs and
• Speed control (options for DV6: control module, outputs are monitored internally by measurement
pulse generator) and control circuits, such as overtemperature,
The DF5, DF6, DV5 and DV6 frequency inverters earth fault, short-circuit, motor overload, motor
are factory-preset for their assigned motor rating, blockage and drive belt monitoring. Temperature
allowing drives to be started immediately after measurement in the motor winding can also be
installation. incorporated in the frequency inverter’s control
circuit through a thermistor input.

2-29
Frequency inverter, installing
Electronic devices such as soft starters and
frequency inverters must normally be fitted F 30˚
F 30˚
vertically.
F 30˚ F 30˚
To ensure adequate air circulation for cooling, a
clear space of at least 100 mm should be
2 maintained both above and below the device. At
the sides of the device, the clear space should be
at least 10 mm for DF5 and DV5 and 50 mm for
DF6 and DV6.
Note that the front enclosure elements of the DF5
and DV5 devices open to the side for electrical
connection. Make sure that the free space in the
area of the front hinged covers is at least 80 mm
to the left side and at least 120 mm to the right
side.
f 100
f 80 f 120
f 100
For
EMC-compliant connection of frequency inverters
.
Mains
Contactor F
2
Switching Q
Mains choke R
Suppressor filter K
Frequency inverter T
3~
Motor cable
M
Motor M 3~
The EMC-compliant mounting and connection is described in detail in the respective devices’ manuals
(AWB).

2-31
Notes about correct installation of frequency inverters
For an EMC-compliant installation, observe the Measures for EMC-compliant installation are:
following information. Electrical and magnetic • Earthing measures
disturbance fields can be limited to the required • Screening measures
levels. The necessary measures work only in • Filtering measures
combination and should be taken into • Chokes
2 consideration at the engineering stage. To They are described in more detail below.
subsequently modify an installation to meet EMC
Earthing measures
requirements is possible only at considerable
These must be implemented to comply with the
additional cost.
legal standards and are a prerequisite for the
effective use of further measures such as filters
EMC measures and screening. All conducting metallic enclosure
The EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) of a sections must be electrically connected to the
device is its ability to withstand electrical earth potential. For EMC, the important factor is
interference (i.e. its immunity) while itself not not the cable’s cross-section, but its surface, since
emitting excessive electromagnetic interference this is where high frequency current flows to
into the environment. earth. All earthing points must be low-impedance,
The IEC/EN 61800-3 standard describes the limit highly conductive and routed directly to the
values and test methods for emitted interference central earthing point (potential equalization bar
and noise immunity for variable-speed electrical or star earth). The contact points must be free
drives (PDS = Power Drives System). from paint and rust. Use galvanized mounting
The tests and values are based not on individual plates and materials.
components but on a typical complete drive
system.
T1 K1 Tn Kn
M1 Mn
M M
3h 3h
K1 = Radio interference filter PE
T1 = Frequency inverter PE PE PE PE
For
Screening measures
L1 M
L2
L3 3
PE
2
F 300 mm
a b
Four-core screened motor supply cable:
a Copper screen braid, earth at both ends with

large-area connections
b PVC outer sheath
c Drain wire (copper, U, V, W, PE)
d PVC cable insulation 3 x black,
1 x green/yellow
e Textile and PVC fillers
e d c

2-33
Screening reduces emitted interference (noise Note:
immunity of neighbouring systems and devices Maintenance switches at of frequency inverter
against external influences). Cables laid between outputs must be operated only at zero current.
the frequency inverter and the motor must be
screened, but the screen must not be considered a Control and signal lines must be twisted and may
replacement for the PE cable. Four-wire motor be double-screened, the inner screen being
2 cables are recommended (three phases plus PE). connected to the voltage source at one end and
The screen must be connected to earth (PES) at the outer screen at both ends. The motor cable
both ends with a large-area connection. Do not must be laid separately from the control and
connect the screen with pigtails. Interruptions in signal lines (>10 cm) and must not run parallel to
the screen, such as terminals, contactors, chokes, any power cables.
etc., must have a low impedance and be bridged
with a large contact area.
To do this, sever the screen near the module and
establish a large-area contact with earth potential b a
(PES, screen terminal). Free, unscreened cables
should not be longer than about 100 mm.
Example: Screen attachment for maintenance
switch
MBS-I2
f 100
a Power cables: mains, motor, internal DC link,

braking resistance
b Signal cables: analog and digital control
signals
4.2 x 8.2
Inside control panels, too, cables should be
e
screened if they are more than 30 cm long.
o 4.1 o 3.5
For
Example for screening control and signal cables:
1 2
H O L 2 1 P24
2
15
3
PES 2
Cu 2.5 mm
F 20 m
M4
PE
ZB4-102-KS1
PES
4K7
M M
R1 REV FWD
Example for a standard connection of frequency inverter DF5, with reference value potentiometer R1
(M22-4K7) and mounting accessories ZB4-102-KS1
Filtering measures Note:
Radio interference filters and line filters The mounting surfaces of frequency inverters and
(combinations of radio interference filter and radio interference filters must be free from paint
mains choke) protect against conducted and must have good HF conductivity.
high-frequency interference (noise immunity) and
reduce the frequency inverter’s high-frequency
interference, which is transmitted through or
emitted from the mains cable, and which must be
limited to a prescribed level (emitted interference).
Filters should be installed as closely as possible to
the frequency inverter to keep the length of the
connecting cable between frequency inverter and
filter short. I O

2-35
Filters produce leakage currents which, in the Chokes
event of a fault (such as phase failure or load Fitted on the frequency inverter’s input side,
unbalance), can be much larger than the rated chokes reduce the current-dependent phase effect
values. To prevent dangerous voltages, the filters and improve the power factor. This reduces the
must be earthed. As the leakage currents are current harmonics and improves the mains
high-frequency interference sources, the earthing quality. The use of mains chokes is especially
2 connections and cables must have a low recommended where several frequency inverters
resistance and large contact surfaces. are connected to a single mains supply point when
other electronic devices are also connected to the
Z1 G1 same supply network.
L1 L1 R2 L/L1 U
L2 L2 S2 L2 V M A reduction of the mains current interference is
3h
L3 L3 T2 N/L3 W also achieved by installing DC chokes in the
e e E frequency inverter’s DC link.
PE
At the frequency inverter’s output, chokes are
E E E used if the motor cables are long and if multiple
motors are connected in parallel to the output.
For leakage currents above 3.5 mA, one of the They also enhance the protection of the power
following must be fulfilled according to EN 60335: semiconductors in the event of an earth fault or
• the protective conductor must have a short-circuit, and protect the motors from
cross-section greater than 10 mm2, excessive rates of voltage rise (> 500 V/µs)
• the protective conductor must be open-circuit resulting from high pulse frequencies.
monitored, or
• an additional conductor must be fitted.
For
Example: EMC-compliant mounting and connection
15
PES
PE PES
a
PES
b
PES
PES W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
c PE
a Metal plate, e.g. MSB-I2

b Earthing terminal
c Maintenance switches

2-37
Connection examples, DS4
Linking the overload relay into the control system
We recommend using an external overload relay In the event of a fault, the soft starter decelerates
instead of a motor-protective circuit-breaker with for the set ramp time and stops.
built-in overload relay. This allows controlled
ramping down of the soft starter through the Standard connection, unidirectional
control section in the event of an overload.
2 Note:
rotation
In standard operation the soft starter is connected
Connecting the motor directly to mains power can
into the motor supply line. A central switching
cause overvoltage and destruction of the soft
element (contactor or main switch) with isolating
starter’s semiconductors.
properties to isolate the mains according to
Note: EN 60947-1 section 7.1.6 and for working on the
The overload relay’s signalling contacts are linked motor is required according to EN 60204-1
into the On/Off circuit. section 5.3. No contactors are required to operate
individual motor feeders.
Minimum connection of DS4-340-M(X)
L1
L2
L3
PE
Q1 F1
I I I
0 1
F1 S3
F2
3L2
5L3
1L1
TOR
Q21
2T1
4T2
6T3
13 14
A1
Q21 A2
M1 M
3~
0: Off/soft stop, 1: Start/soft start
For
Connection of DS4-340-M as semiconductor contactor

L1 L01/L+
L2
L3
PE
K1 K2t K1
t > tStop + 150 ms
Q1
I I I
F1
Q11
F1 S1 HLS
Start/Stop
F2
3L2
5L3
1L1

Ready S2 Q11
Q21
2T1
4T2
6T3
13 14
A1
K1 K2t Q11 Q21
M1 M A2
3~ L00/L–
b
Q1 = Line protection F2 = Semiconductor fuse for type “2” S1: Q11 Off
Q11 =Mains contactor (optional) coordination, in addition to Q1 S2: Q11 On
F1 = Motor-protective relay Q21 = Semiconductor contactor b: Control with Q11/K2t optional
2-39
M1 = Motor HLS = Semiconductor contactor On/Off
2
Connection as soft starter without separate mains contactor
L1 L01/L+
L2
L3
2 PE
K1
Q1
I I I
F1
F1 S1
F2
3L2
5L3
1L1
TOR S2 K1
T1
2T1
4T2
6T3
13 14
A1
K1 T1
M1 M A2
3~ L00/L–
Q1: Line protection n Emergency-Stop
F1: Overload relay S1: Soft stop
F2: Semiconductor fuse for type “2” S2: Soft start
coordination, in addition to Q1
T1: Semiconductor contactor
M1: Motor
For
Connection of soft starter with mains contactor

L1
L2 L01/L+
L3
PE
K1
Q1
I I I Soft Stop
F1
Q11
S1 K1 K2t K3 K3
F1 t = 10 s Soft Start
F2
3L2
5L3
1L1
S2 K1

TOR
T1
2T1
4T2
6T3
13 14
K1 K2t Q11 K3 T1
M1 M L00/L–
3~
Q1 = Line protection F2 = Semiconductor fuse for type “2” coordination, n Emergency-Stop
Q11 = Mains contactor (optional) in addition to Q1 S1: Q11 Off
F1 = Motor-protective relay T1 = Soft starter S2: Q11 On
M1 = Motor
2-41
2
Reversing circuit standard connection, rating the DS4 is not available with built-in
bidirectional rotation reversing contactor function. In this case make
Note: sure that direction reversal takes place only with
The device of the DS4-...-M(X)R series have a the DS4 in stop state. Use an external controller to
built-in electronic reversing contactor function. implement this functionality. In soft starter
You need to only specify the required direction of operation, you can use a TOR relay to control an
2 rotation. The DS4 then internally ensures the off-delayed relay for this purpose, whereby the
correct control sequence. deceleration time must be t-Stop + 150 ms or
At ratings over 22 kW, a conventional reversing higher.
circuit layout must be used, because above this
Minimum connection of DS4-340-M(X)R
L1
L2
L3
PE
Q1 F1
I I I
F1 1 0 2
S3
F2
3L2
5L3
1L1
TOR
T1
2T1
4T2
6T3
13 14
FWD REV
T1
M1 M 0V
3~
Q1: Line protection T1: Soft starter
Q11: Mains contactor (optional) M1: Motor
F1: Overload relay n: Emergency-Stop
F2: Semiconductor fuse for type “2” 0: Off/Soft stop
coordination, in addition to Q1 1: FWD
2: REV
For
Connection of reversing soft starter without mains contactor

L1 L01/L+
L2
L3
PE
Q1 F1
I I I
S1
K1 K2
F1
F2 S2 K1 S3 K2
3L2
5L3
1L1

TOR
T1
K2 K1
2T1
4T2
6T3
13 14
FWD REV
K1 K2 T1
M1 M 0V
3~ L00/L–
Q1: Line protection T1: Semiconductor n: Emergency-Stop
F1: Overload relay contactor S1: Soft stop
F2: Semiconductor fuse for type “2” coordination, in M1: Motor S2: Soft start FWD
addition to Q1 S2: Soft start REV
2-43
2
Connection of reversing soft starter with
mains contactor
L1
L2
2 L3
PE
Q1
I I I
Q11
F1
F2
3L2
5L3
1L1
TOR
T1
2T1
4T2
6T3
13 14
M1 M
3~
Q1: Line protection

Q11: Mains contactor (optional)
F1: Overload relay
F2: Semiconductor fuse for type “2”
coordination, in addition to Q1
M1: Motor
For
L01/L+
K1
F1
Soft Stop
S1 K1 K2t K3 K4
t = 10 s
Soft Start K3 Soft Start K4

FWD REV
S2 K1

K4 K3
FWD REV
K1 K2t Q11 K3 K4 T1
0V
L00/L–
n: Emergency-Stop
S1: Q11 Off
S2: Q11 On
2-45
2
Bypass connection, single direction of rota- function is mapped to relay 13/14. The soft starter
tion controls the bypass contactor so that no further
Caution! user action is required. Because the bypass
The DS4-...-MX(R) devices have built-in bypass contactor is switched only at zero current and
contacts. The examples below therefore apply does not, therefore, have to switch the motor
only for DS4-...-M. If an external bypass for load, an AC1 layout can be used. Suitable bypass
2 devices with reversing function (DS4-...-MR) is to contactors are listed in appendix “Technical
be fitted, you must include an additional bypass data”.
contactor is required the second direction of If an Emergency-Stop requires an immediate
rotation as well as additional interlocks to prevent disconnection of the voltage, the bypass may have
a short-circuit through the bypass contactors. to switch under AC3 conditions (for example if the
The bypass connection allows a direct connection Enable signal is removed with a command or the
of the motor to the mains to suppress heat soft stop ramp time is 0). In this case, the circuit
dissipation through the soft starter. The bypass must be laid out so that either a higher-priority
contactor is actuated once the soft starter has isolating element trips first or the bypass must be
completed the acceleration phase (i.e. once mains laid out to AC3.
voltage is reached). By default, the Top-of-Ramp
For
L1
L2
L3
PE
Q1
I I I F1
2
F1
F2 0 1
S3
3L2
5L3
1L1
TOR
Q21 T1 13
T1
2T1
4T2
6T3
13 14 14
A1 A1
T1 Q21
M1 M A2 A2
3~
S3 = Soft start/stop F2 = Semiconductor fuse for type “2” coordination, in addition to Q1
Q1 = Line protection T1 = Semiconductor contactor
Q21 = Bypass contactor M1 = Motor
F1 = Overload relay

2-47
Pump connection, single direction of rota- interlocks ensure that changeovers take place only
tion after a stop.
In pump applications the bypass contactor is often
required to provide emergency operation Note:
capability. This is achieved with a service switch In contrast to simple bypass operation, the bypass
that allows a changeover from soft starter contactor must be laid out to AC3 here. For a
2 operation to DOL starting through the bypass suitable contactor, see our recommended mains
contactor. In the latter setting the soft starter is contactor in appendix “Technical data”.
fully bypassed. But because the output circuit
must not be opened during operation, the
Pump
L1 Q1: Line protection
L2 Q11: Mains contactor (optional)
L3
PE Q21: Bypass contactor
Q31: Contactor
F1: Overload relay
Q1 F2: Semiconductor fuse for type “2”
I I I coordination, in addition to Q1
F1 M1: Motor
F2
Q11
3L2
5L3
1L1
TOR
Q21 T1
2T1
4T2
6T3
13 14
Q31
M1 M
3~
For
Pump control

K1 K1
S1
S4
S2 Q21
13
K1 K3 K2 K3 K4 S5 K5 K5 K6t T1 TOR K2
K2
a 14

S3 K1 K4
E2 A1
K1 T1 K2 K3 Q11 Q31 K5 T1 K6t K4 Q21
39 A2
b c d e f g
n Emergency-Stop c Hand f RUN
a t > t-Stop + 150 ms d Auto g Bypass
b Enable e Soft start/soft stop
2-49
2
Starting several motors sequentially with a d Off-time monitoring
soft starter (cascaded control) Set the timing relay K1T so that the soft starter
When starting several motors one after the other is not thermally overloaded: calculate the time
using a soft starter, keep to the following from the soft starter’s permissible operating
changeover sequence: frequency or select a soft starter that allows
• Start using soft starter the required time to be reached.
2 • Switch on bypass contactor
• Disable soft starter e Changeover monitoring
• Switch soft starter output to the next motor Set the timing relay to a return time of about
• Restart 2 s. This ensures that the next motor branch
can not be connected as long as the soft
starter is running.
a page 2-52
n Emergency-Stop
S1: Q11 Off a page 2-53
S2: Q11 On i Switching off individual motors
a Soft start/soft stop The Off switch results in all motors being switched
off at the same time. To switch off individual
b Simulation of RUN relay motors, you need to make use of N/C contact i.
Timing relay K2T simulates the RUN signal of
the DS4. The set off-delay time must be Observe the thermal load on the soft starter
greater than the ramp time. To be on the safe (starting frequency, current load). If motors are to
side, use 15 s. be started at short intervals, you may have to
select a soft starter with a higher load cycle.
c RUN
For
Soft starters with motor cascade

L1 Q11 = Mains contactor (optional)
L2
L3 F2 = Semiconductor fuse for type “2” coordination
N T1 = Soft starter
PE M1, 2,... = Motor
Q11
F2
1L1
2L2
3L3
T1 TOR
2T1
4T2
6T3
13 14

Q21 Q22 Q31 Q32 Qn Qm
Q23 Q33 Qn3
I> I> I> I> I> I>
M M M
M1 M2 Mn
3~ 3~ 3~
2-51
2
2
2-52
Soft starter with motor cascade, control section part 1

K1T K4
S1
Q21
Q31
Qn1

13
K2T
S2 K1 K1 K4 K12 K22 Kn2 K2 T1 TOR K4 K4
14
A1
K1 Q11 K2 T1 K2T K3 K4 K1T K4T
A2
a b c d e

Soft starter with motor cascade, control section part 2

i i i
Q11 Q21 Q22 Q22 K12 Q31 Q32 Q32 K(n-1)2 Qn Qm Qm
K12 K3 K22 K3 Kn2 K3
Q21 Q(n-1)1

K4T K4T
Qn
Q31
Q21 Q22 K12 Q31 Q32 K22 Qn Qm Kn2
a b c
a Motor 1 c Motor n
b Motor 2 i a section “i Switching off individual motors”, page 2-50
2-53
2
Connection examples, DM4
Enable/immediate stop without ramp function (e.g. for Emergency-Stop)
The digital input E2 is programmed in the factory an immediate de-energization, this is effected via
so that it has the "Enable" function. The soft the enabling signal.
starter is enabled only when a High signal is Caution!
applied to the terminal. The soft starter cannot be You must in all operating conditions always first
operated without enabling signal.
2 In the event of wire breakage or interruption of
stop the soft starter ("Run“ relay scanning),
before you mechanically interrupt the power
the signal by an Emergency-Stop circuit, the conductors. Otherwise a flowing current is
regulator in the soft starter is immediately blocked interrupted – thus resulting in voltage peaks,
and the power circuit disconnected, and after that which in rare cases may destroy the thyristors of
the "Run“ relay drops out. the soft starter.
Normally the drive is always stopped via a ramp
function. When the operating conditions require
n: Emergency-Stop
S1: Off
S2: On
T1: (E2 = 1 a enabled)
S1 K1
S2 K1
E2
K1 T1
39
For
Linking the overload relay into the control system
We recommend using an external overload relay Caution!
instead of a motor-protective circuit-breaker with Connecting the motor directly to mains power can
built-in overload relay. This allows controlled cause overvoltage and destruction of the soft
ramping down of the soft starter through the starter’s semiconductors.
control section in the event of an overload. There are two options, which are shown in the
following diagram:
2
n: Emergency-Stop
S1: Off
S2: On
K1 T1: Enable (E2 = 1 h enabled)
F1 a The signalling contacts of the overload relay
are linked into the On/Off circuit. In the event
a b of a fault, the soft starter decelerates for the
set ramp time and stops.
b The signalling contacts of the overload relay
S1 are linked into the enabling circuit. In the
event of a fault, the soft starter’s output is
immediately de-energized. Although the soft
starter shuts off its output, the mains
contactor remains energized. To de-energize
the mains contactor as well, include a second
S2 K1 contact of the overload relay in the On/Off
circuit.
E2
K1 T1 39

2-55
DM4 with overload relay Standard connection

For isolation from the mains, either a mains
L1 contactor upstream of the soft starter or a central
L2 switching device (contactor or main switch) is
L3 necessary.
N
PE Control section
2
Q1
K1
I> I> I>
S2
Q11
S1 K1
F1
E2 E1
F2 K1 T1 T1
39 39
a b
L N
1L1
2L2
3L3
S1: Soft start

S2: Soft stop
~ a Enable
= b Soft start/Soft stop
T1
+ Thermistor
– Thermistor
T1 T2
2T1
4T2
6T3
M
3~
For
DM4 without separate mains contactor
L1
L2
L3
N
PE 2
Q1 Q2
I> I> I> I> I> I>
F1
b
F2
⎩
⎪
⎨
⎪
⎧
1L1
3L2
5L3
L N E1 E2 39 7 +12 8 1
0 V Analog
+12 V DC
REF 2: 4–20 mA
REF 1: 0–10 V
0 V (E1;E2)
Start/Stop
Enable
~
=
T1 =
K1;RUN K2;TOR K3 K4 ~
Analog Out 1
Analog Out 2
+ Thermistor
- Thermistor
0 V Analog
PE
2T1
4T2
6T3
T1 T2 13 14 23 24 33 34 43 7 62 63
I mot c
M
M1
3~
a Control voltage through Q1 or F1 or through

Q2
b See control section
c Motor current indication

2-57
DM 4-340 with separate mains contactor
Control section
2
K1
S3
Q11
S1
13
K1 S4 K2 K2 K2 T1 RUN 14
S2 K1
33
T1 OK
34
(no error)
E2 E1
K1 T1 K2 T1 Q11
39 39
a b
n Emergency-Stop
S1: Off
S2: On
a Enable
b Soft start/Soft stop
For
DM4-340 with separate mains contactor
L1
L2
L3
N
PE 2
Q1 Q2
I> I> I> I> I> I>
Q11 F1
b
F2
⎩
⎪
⎨
⎪
⎧
1L1
3L2
5L3
L N E1 E2 39 7 +12 8 1
0 V Analog
+12 V DC
REF 2: 4–20 mA
REF 1: 0–10 V
0 V (E1;E2)
Start/Stop
Enable
~
=
T1 =
Analog Out 1
Analog Out 2
+ Thermistor
- Thermistor
0 V Analog
PE
2T1
4T2
6T3
T1 T2 13 14 23 24 33 34 43 7 62 63
I mot c
M
M1
3~

Q2
b See Control section

2-59
Bypass connection
After the run-up (full mains voltage reached) the The bypass contactor is now switched to a no-load
DM4 soft starter actuates the bypass contactor. state and can therefore be AC-1 rated.
Thus, the motor is directly connected with the If an immediate de-energization is required in the
mains. event of an Emergency-Stop, then the bypass
Advantage: contactor must also switch the motor load. In this
2 case it must be AC-3 rated.
• The soft starter’s heat dissipation is reduced to
the no-load dissipation.
• The limit values of radio interference class "B“
are adhered to.
Control section
K1
S3
13 23
S1 K1 Q21 S4 K2 K2 K1 T1 RUN 14
T1 TOR 24
S2 K1
T1 OK 33
(no error) 34
E2 E1
K1 T1 K2 T1 Q11 Q21
39 39
a b
n Emergency-Stop
S1: Off
S2: On
a Enable
For
DM4-340 with bypass
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
2
Q1 Q1
I> I> I> I> I> I>
Q11
a
F1
b
F2
⎩
⎪
⎨
⎪
⎧
1L1
3L2
5L3
L N E1 E2 39 7 +12 8 1
0 V Analog
+12 V DC
REF 2: 4–20 mA
REF 1: 0–10 V
0 V (E1;E2)
Start/Stop
Enable
~ PE
=
Q21
G1 =
Analog Out 1
Analog Out 2
+ Thermistor
- Thermistor
0 V Analog
2T1
4T2
6T3
T1 T2 13 14 23 24 33 34 43 7 62 63
I mot c
M
M1
3~

Q2

2-61
Delta connection
A delta connection allows the use of a soft starter For this you have to connect the motor in delta
with a lower rating than the motor it is used to and the voltage in this connection method must
control. Connected in series with each motor agree with the mains voltage. For 400 V mains
winding, the current the soft starter needs to voltage the motor must therefore be marked with
supply is reduced by a factor of W3. This layout has 400 V/690 V.
2 the drawback that six motor supply cables are
needed. Apart from that there are no restrictions.
All soft starter functions remain available.
Control section
K1
S3
Q11
S1
13
K1 S4 K2 K2 T1 RUN 14
S2 K1
33
T1 OK
34
(no error)
E2 E1
K1 T1 K2 T1 Q11
39 39
a b
n Emergency-Stop
S1: Off
S2: On
a Enable
E2: Enable
T1: +thermistor
T2: –thermistor
For
DM4-340 Delta
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
2
Q1 Q2
I> I> I> I> I> I>
Q11
a
F1
b
F2
⎩
⎪
⎨
⎪
⎧
1L1
3L2
5L3
L N E1 E2 39 7 +12 8 1
0 V Analog
+12 V DC
REF 2: 4–20 mA
REF 1: 0–10 V
0 V (E1;E2)
Start/Stop
~
Enable
PE
=
T1 =
Analog Out 1
Analog Out 2
0 V Analog
Thermistor
Thermistor
2T1
4T2
6T3
T1 T2 13 14 23 24 33 34 43 7 62 63
c
W1
U1
V1
I mot
M
M1
3~
W2
U2
V2

Q2

2-63
Starting several motors sequentially with a soft starter
When starting several motors one after the other
using a soft starter, keep to the following
sequence when changing over:
• Start using soft starter
• Switch on bypass contactor
2 • Block soft starter
• Switch soft starter output to the next motor
• Restart
For
Qm
I> I> I>
3~
M
Qn
Mn
Qn3
Q32
F1
I> I> I>
I> I> I>
3~
M
Q32
M2
Q2
Q33
Q22
PE
T2
N
– Thermistor
=
T1
L
+ Thermistor
~
DM4-340 cascade
3L3 6T3
I> I> I>
2L2 4T2
3~
M
1L1 2T1
Q21
Q1
F2
M1
T1
Q23
PE
L1
L2
L3
N

2-65
2
2-66
Control section part 1

K1T K4
33
T1 OK
34
S1 (no error)
Q21 Q31 Qn
S2 K1 K1 K4 T1 23 T1 13
K1 K12 K22 Kn2 K2 K4 K4
TOR 24 RUN 14

E2 E1
K1 T1 Q11 K2 T1 K3 K4 K1T K4T
39 39
a b c d

DM4-340 cascade, control section part 2

S3 S3 S3
Q11 Q21 Q22 Q22 K12 Q31 Q32 Q32 K(n-1)2 Qn Qm Qm
K12 K3 K22 K3 Kn2 K3
Q21 Q(n-1)1
K4T K4T
Q31 Qn
Q21 Q22 K12 Q31 Q32 K22 Qn Qm Kn2

a b c
n Emergency-Stop c Set the timing relay so that the soft starter is not thermally overloaded. The appropriate time relates to the
S1: Off admissible operating frequency of the selected soft starter. Alternatively, select the soft starter so that the required
S2: On times can be attained.
a Enable d Set the timing relay to a return time of about 2 s. This ensures that the next motor branch can not be connected
b Soft start/Soft stop as long as the soft starter is running. N/C contact S1 switches all motors off at the same time. To switch off motors
individually, you need to make use of N/C contact S3.
2-67
2
Notes
For
Block diagram, DF5 and DV5
Connection examples, DF5 and DV5

1 +24 V
L N PE
FWD
REV
RST
FF2
FF1
3
L1 L2 L3 PE 6* 4 3 2 1 P24
RJ 45
+ RS 422
L+ –
DC+
RBr DC–
BR* –
+

U V W PE K12 K14 K11 5* L FM H O OI L CM2 12 11
0...10 V
10 V (PWM)
4...20 mA
+10 V
0V
0V
RUN
FA1
PTC
M e
i
3~
RST
BR* DV5 only

6* DV5 only
5* Input RST for DF5
2-69
2
Basic control
Example 1
Reference input through potentiometer R1
Enable (START/STOP) and direction control
through terminals 1 and 2 with internal control
2 voltage
n: Emergency-Stop circuit
S1: Off
S2: On
Q11: Mains contactor
F1: Line protection
PES: Cable screen PE connection
M1:Motor, 3-phase 230 V
S1 Note:
For EMC-conformant mains connection,
suitable radio interference suppression
measures must be implemented according to
S2 Q11 product standard IEC/EN 61800-3.
Q11
DILM12-XP1
(4th pole can be broken off)

DILM
A1 1 3 5 13
A2 2 4 6 14
For
Wiring
f
1 h 230 V, 50/60 Hz
L
N M
PE
t
2
F1 M
PE
FWD
Q11
REV
L N PE
L+ DC+ DC– U V W PE H O L 2 1 P24

T1
PES PES
PES
X1
PES
PES PE
M1 M 4K7
3~ M M
e R11 REV FWD
– Single-phase frequency inverter DF5-322-... FWD: Clockwise rotating field enable

– Directional control through terminals 1 and 2 REV: Anticlockwise rotating field enable
– External reference input from potentiometer R1

2-71
DF5-340-... frequency inverters with EMC-conformant connection
Control section
Example 2
Reference input through potentiometer R11 (fs)
and fixed frequency (f1, f2, f3) through terminal 3
2 and 4 with internal control voltage
Enable (START/STOP) and rotating field selection
through terminal 1
S1: Off
S2: On
Q1 R1: Line reactor
K1: RFI filter
Q1: Line protection
S1 M1:Motor, 3-phase 400 V
FWD: Clockwise rotating field enable, reference

frequency fS
S2 Q11 FF1: Fixed frequency f1
FF2: Fixed frequency f2
FF1+FF2: Fixed frequency f3
Q11
For
Wiring
3 h 400 V, 50/60 Hz f
L1 fs = fmax
L2 f3
L3 f2
PE f1
Q1 2
PE
I I I FF1
Q11 FF2
U1 V1 W1 FWD
PE
R1
U2 V2 W2
L1 L2 L3
PE
K1
L1 L2 L3 PE
FWD
FF1
FF2
L+ DC+ DC– U V W PE H O L 4 3 1 P24

T1
PES
PES
X1 R1
PES
PES PE
M1 M
3~
e

2-73
Version A: Motor in delta circuit
Motor: P = 0.75 kW
1 h 230 V, 50/60 Hz
Mains: 3/N/PE 400 V 50/60 Hz L
N
The 0.75 kW motor described PE
below can be delta-connected to a
2 single-phase 230 V mains (version FAZ-1N-B16 F1
A) or star-connected to a 3-phase
400 V mains.
Select the appropriate frequency Q11
DILM7
inverter for your mains voltage: +DILM12-XP1
• DF5-322 for 1 AC 230 V 1
• DF5-340 for 3 AC 400 V PE
• Model-specific accessories for R1
EMC-complaint connection. DEX-LN1-009
2
L N
PE
K1
DE5-LZ1-012-V2
L N PE
DF5-322-075
DV5-322-075
L+ DC+ DC– U V W PE
T1
PES
230 / 400 V 4.0 / 2.3 A PES
S1 0,75 kW cos ϕ 0.67
1410 rpm 50 Hz
X1
PES
PES
U1 V1 W1
230 V M
4A M1 3~
0.75 kW W2 U2 V2
e
For
Version B: Motor in star circuit
3 h 400 V, 50/60 Hz
L1
L2
L3
PE
PKM0-10
Q1 2
I I I
DILM7 Q11
U1 V1 W1
PE
R1
DEX-LN3-004
U2 V2 W2
L1 L2 L3
PE
K1
DE5-LZ3-007-V4
L1 L2 L3 PE
DF5-340-075
DV5-340-075
L+ DC+ DC– U V W PE
T1
PES
PES
X1
PES
PES
U1 V1 W1
400 V M
2.3 A M1 3~
0.75 kW W2 U2 V2
e

2-75
Notes
For
Block diagram, DF6
Connection examples, DF6

+24 V
FWD
REV
RST
FF2
FF1
3
AT
L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5 FW P24
RJ 45
+ RS 422
L+ – RS 485 SN
DC+ RP
RBr DC–
SN
BR* K1 –
K2 K3 SP
+

U V W PE K12 K14 K11 K23 K24 K33 K34 PLC CM1 TH FM AMI AM H O OI L O2
–10 V...+10 V
PTC
10 V (PWM)
0...+10 V
0...10 V
4...20 mA
4...20 mA
+10 V
0V
M e i
3~
BR* DF6-320-11K, DF6-340-11K and DF6-340-15K only

2-77
2
Frequency inverter DF6-340-...
Control section
Example: Temperature regulation for ventillation
system. When the room temperature rises, the fan
speed must increase. The target temperature can
be set with potentiometer R11 (e.g. 20 °C)
2
S1
S2 Q11
Q11
S1: Off
S2: On
Q1: Line protection
K1: RFI filter
For
Wiring
3 h 400 V, 50/60 Hz 50 ˚C 100 %
L1
L2
L3 20 ˚C 40 %
PE
Q1
4 mA 10.4 mA 20 mA 2
PE
I I I
Q11
L1 L2 L3
PE
K1
L1 L2 L3 PE
PID
L+ DC+ DC– U V W PE OI H O L FW P24

T1 PES PES
PES
X1
PES
PE
PES
4...20 mA
4K7
M M
M1 3~ R11 FWD
e i B1

2-79
2
For
Block diagram, DV6
+24 V
AT
REV
RST
FRS
FF2
FF1
2CH
JOG
FWD
L1 L2 L3 PE RO TO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FW P24
RJ 45
J51 RS 422
+
– RS 485 SN
L+
DC+ RP
Connection examples, DV6
RBr DC– SN
K1 – SP
BR* +
U V W PE K12 K14 K11 11 12 13 14 15 CM2 PLC CM1 TH FM AMI AM H O OI L O2
IP
OL
0V
PTC
FA1
QTQ
RUN
+10 V
0...10 V
0...+10 V
4...20 mA
4...20 mA
10 V (PWM)
–10 V...+10 V
M e i
3~
P24
+24 V
BR* DV6-340-075, DV6-340-11K and DV6-320-11K only


Block diagram: speed control circuit, vector frequency inverter DV6 with encoder interface module DE6-IOM-ENC

VF FFWG
+ +
v' + + o' + e i' u'
KREF VG Vn Vi PWM
– G – –
v o
i
KFB
APR ASR ACR

M
3h
FB
2-81
2
DV6-340-... vector frequency inverters with built-in encoder module (DE6-IOM-ENC) and
external DE4-BR1-... braking resistor
Control section
Q1
TI
S1 RB
T2
K11
S2 Q11 Q11 G1
K12
SPS K2
Enable
K3
Q11 K2 M11
Example:
Hoisting gear with speed regulation, control and
monitoring through PLC
Motor with thermistor (PTC resistor)
S1: Off
S2: On
Q1: Line protection
Q11:Mains contactor
K2: Control contactor enable
RB: Braking resistor
B1: Encoder, 3 channels
PES:Cable screen PE connection
M11:Holding brake
For
Wiring
3 h 400 V, 50/60 Hz
L1
L2
L3
PE
Q1
I I I
Q11
L1 L2 L3
PE
K1
T1 T2 PE
L1 L2 L3 PE
i
DE6-IOM-ENC
DE4-BR1...
EP5 EG5 EAPEAN EBP EBN EZP EZN
1 2 L+ DC+ DC– BR U V W PE Th CM1 CM2 11 12 13 1 2 3 8 FW P24

RB T1
PES
CM2 I.. I.. I.. Q.. Q.. Q.. Q.. Q.. P24
PES PES PES
Encoder n1 n2 n3 REV FWD
b
M a
3~ M11
i
M1
e
B1 m
2-83
2
Installing encoder interface module DE6-IOM-ENC
2 1
2 4
M3 x 8 mm
0.4 – 0.6 Nm
For
EG5
2
F 20 m
EG5 1 2
3
15
Order ZB4-102-KS1
separately!
M4
ZB4-102-KS1
TTL (RS 422)

A A B B C C
EP5 EG5 EAP EAN EBP EBN EZP EZN
+ M
5VH
3h

2-85
Rapid Link system
Power and data bus: The power bus supplies the Rapid Link function
g AS-Interface® flat cable modules with main and auxiliary power. Plug-in
h Link for M12 connector cables tap-off points can be quickly and safely connected
i Flexible busbar for 400 V h and 24 V at any point along the bus. The power bus can
j Power feed for flexible busbar consist either of a flexible busbar (flat cable) or
k Plug-in power link for flexible busbar standard round cables:
l Round cable for 400 V h and 24 V • The flexible busbar RA-C1 is a 7-core flat cable 2
m Plug-in power link for round cable (cross-section 2.5 mm2 or 4 mm2) and has the
Engineering following structure:
The Rapid Link function modules are installed
immediately adjacent to the drives. They can be
connected to the power and data bus at any point
without having to interrupt the bus.
The AS-Interface® data bus is a system solution
for networking different modules. AS-Interface® M White
networks are quick and easy to implement. L+ Red
AS-Interface® uses a geometrically coded, PE Green/yel-
unscreened flat cable with a cross-section of 2 x N low
L3 Blue
1.5 mm2. It is used to transmit both power as well L2 Black
as all data traffic between PLC and I/O and – to L1 Brown
some extent – supplies the connected devices Black
with energy.
The installation meets the usual requirements.
Engineering is simplified by full flexibility in system • For the power bus you can also use
layout and mounting. conventional round cables (cross-section
When a link is connected to the flat cable, two 7 x 2.5 mm2 or 7 x 4 mm2, outer core
metal pins pierce through the cable’s jacket and diameter < 5 mm, flexible copper conductor to
into the two cores to establish a contact with the IEC/EN 60228) with round cable feeders RA-C2.
AS-Interface® cable. There is no need to cut and The cable can have an external diameter of
strip cables, apply ferrules or connect individual 10 to 16 mm.
cores.
6.5
a a
+ –
4
2
10
a Piercing pins
b Flat cable, protected against polarity reversal

2-87
Rapid Link system
Warning! AS-Interface®-/RA-IN-power supply must meet
• Rapid Link must be operated only on the safe isolation requirements according to
three-phase systems with earthed star point SELV.
and separate N and PE conductors (TN-S The power sections are supplied through
network). It must not be operated unearthed. disconnect control unit RA-DI (see illustration
• All devices am connected to the power and data below) with:
2 bus must also meet the requirements for safe • Ie = 20 A/400 V at 2.5 mm2
isolation according to IEC/EN 60947-1 Annex N • Ie = 20 to 25 A/400 V at 4 mm2.
or IEC/EN 60950. The 24 V DC power supply Round cables up to 6 mm2 can be used to feed
unit must be earthed on the secondary side. The power to disconnect control unit RA-DI.
30 V DC PSU for the
3 AC 400 Vh,
24 V H
50/60 Hz
RA-DI F 6 mm2
Disconnect
Control Unit RA-DI
Q1
⎧
⎨
⎩
2.5 mm2 / 4 mm2

1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
RA-MO RA-SP RA-MO RA-SP
Motor/Speed
Control Units
1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2

PES PES
PES PES
M M M M
3h 3h 3h 3h
e e e e
Disconnect control unit RA-DI protects the cable The combination of RA-DI and RA-MO fulfills the
from overload and provides short-circuit requirements of IEC/EN 60947-4-1 as starter with
protection for the cable as well as all connected type “1” coordination. That means that the
RA-MO motor control units. contactor’s contacts in the RA-MO are allowed to
weld in the event of a short-circuit in the motor
terminal strip or the motor supply cable. This
arrangement also conforms to IEE wiring
regulations.
For
Rapid Link system
The affected RA-MO motor control unit must be • Observe the voltage drop in your specific
replaced after a short-circuit! application.
When you configure a power bus with a Instead of the disconnect control unit, you can use
disconnect control unit, observe the following: a 3-pole miniature circuit-breaker In F 20 A and B
• Even in the event of a 1-pole short-circuit at the or C characteristic. Here, you must observe the
line end, the short-circuit current must exceed following:
150 A. • The let-through energy J in the event of a 2
• The total current of all running and short-circuit must not exceed 29800 A2s.
simultaneously starting motors must not exceed • Therefore the short-circuit current Icc at the
110 A. mounting location must not exceed 10 kA a
• The total load current (about 6 x mains characteristic curve.
current) of all connected speed control units
must not exceed 110 A.
2 5
i dt 10
2
[A s] 8 FAZ-B
63 A
50 A
6 FAZ-C
40 A
32 A
25 A
20 A
4 16 A
13 A
10 A
2
6A
1.5 4A
104 3A
8
6
2A
FAZ-...-B4HI
2
1.5
1A
103
0.5 A
8
0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15
Icc eff [kA]

2-89
Rapid Link system
Motor control unit
Motor control unit RA-MO allows the direct The unit is connected to AS-Interface® through
bidirectional operation of three-phase motors. The an M12 plug with the following PIN assignment:
rated current is adjustable from 0.3 to 6.6 A
M12 plug PIN Function
(0.09 to 3 kW).
2 Connections 1 ASi+
Motor control unit RA-MO is supplied ready for
installation. The connection to the AS-Interface® 2 –
data bus and the motor is described below. The 3 ASi–
connection to the power bus is described in the
earlier general section “Rapid Link system”. 4 –
External sensors are connected through an M12

socket.
PIN Function
1 L+
2 I
3 L–
400 V
F 2.2 kW 4 I
M On the RA-MO the motor feeder features a
3h plastic-encapsulated socket. The length of the
motor cable is limited to 10 m.
The motor is connected through a halogen-free,
3 h 400 V PE 8 x 1.5 mm2, unscreened, DESINA-conformant
50/60 Hz motor supply cable with a length of 2 m
24 V H (SET-M3/2-HF) or 5 m (SET-M3/5-HF).
Alternatively you can assemble your own motor
supply cable with plug SET-M3-A with
8 x 1.5 mm2 contacts
1 4 6
PE 7
3 5 8
For
Rapid Link system
M i
3h
SET-M3/... 2
1 1 U – –
• – – – –
3 3 W – –
4 5 – – B1 (h/–)
5 6 – T1 –
6 4 – – B2 (h/+)
7 2 V – –
8 7 – T2 –
PE PE PE – –
Motor connection without thermistor Motor connection with thermistor

: :
5 8 1 7 3 PE 5 8 1 7 3 PE
6 7 1 2 3 6 7 1 2 3 *
*
T1 T2 U V W PE T1 T2 U V W PE
e e
M3h
M i
3h
If motors are connected without PTC thermistor

(thermoclick), cables 6 and 7 must be linked at the
motor; otherwise the RA-MO issues a fault
message.

2-91
Rapid Link system
Note: Connecting a 400 V AC brake with rapid braking:
The two connections illustrated below apply only
for motor control unit RA-MO. 4 6 1 7 3 PE
Connecting a 400 V AC brake:

:
1 7 3 PE
2 5 4 1 2 3 *
B1 B2 U V W PE
1 2 3 *
e
PE M
3h
e
M
3h For controlling braking motors, their
manufacturers provide braking rectifiers, which
are fitted in the motor terminal strip. If the DC
circuit is opened at the same time, the voltage at
the braking coil drops off much quicker, causing
the motor to also brake more quickly.
For
Rapid Link system
Speed Control Unit RA-SP
Speed control unit RA-SP is used for electronic The unit is connected to AS-Interface® through
variable speed control of three-phase motors. an M12 plug with the following PIN assignment:
Note: M12 plug PIN Function
Unlike the other Rapid Link system devices, the
RA-SP speed control unit’s enclosure is fitted with 1 ASi+ 2
a heat sink and requires an EMC-conformant
mounting and connection. 2 –
Connections 3 ASi–
Speed control unit RA-SP is supplied ready for
connection. The connection to the AS-Interface® 4 –
data bus and the motor is described below. The
connection to the power bus is described in the On the RA-SP the motor feeder features a
earlier general section “Rapid Link system”. metal-encapsulated socket. To meet EMC
. requirements, this is connected with PE and heat
sink over a large area. The matching plug is also
metal-encapsulated and the motor cable is
screened. The length of the motor cable is limited
to 10 m. The motor cable’s screen must have a
large-area connection with PE at both ends, and
the motor connection terminals must also,
therefore, meet EMC requirements.
The motor is connected through a halogen-free
4 x 1.5 mm2 + 2 x (2 x 0.75 mm2), screened,
DESINA-conformant motor supply cable with a
400 V length of 2 m, (SET-M4/2-HF) or 5 m,
(SET-M4/5-HF).
M Alternatively you can assemble your own motor
3h
supply cable with plug SET-M4-A, with
4 x 1.5 mm2 + 4 x 0.75 mm2 contact.
3 h 400 V PE
50/60 Hz 1 4 6
PE 7
3 5 8

2-93
Rapid Link system
RA-SP2-...
341-... 341(230)-...
M i
2 3h
Servo cable 400 V AC 230 V AC
SET-M4/...
1 1 U – – –
• – – – – –
3 3 W – – –
4 5 – – B1 (h) B1 (h)
5 7 – T1 – –
6 6 – – B2 (h) B2 (h)
7 2 V – – –
8 8 – T2 – –
PE PE PE – – –
For
Rapid Link system
5 8 1 7 3 PE 5 8 1 7 3 PE
PES PES
F 10 m
PES PES
2
T1 T2 U V W PE T1 T2 U V W PE
e e
M3h M3h
i i
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
230 / 400 V 3.2 / 1.9 A 400 / 690 V 1.9 / 1.1 A
S1 0.75 kW cos ϕ 0.79 S1 0.75 kW cos ϕ 0.79 U2
W2 U2 V2 W2 V2
1430 rpm 50 Hz 1430 rpm 50 Hz
5 8 1 7 3 PE 4 6 5 8 1 7 3 PE
PES PES
PES PES
T1 T2 U V W PE B1 B2 T1 T2 U V W PE
e e
M3h
M i
3h
RA-SP2-341-...
RA-SP2-341(230)-...
For controlling braking motors, their Note:

manufacturers provide braking rectifiers, which When using speed control unit RA-SP, do not
are fitted in the motor terminal strip. connect the braking rectifier directly to the motor
terminals (U/V/W)!

2-95
Notes
For
Command and signalling devices
Page
RMQ 3-2
Signal towers SL 3-8
Position switches LS-Titan®, AT 3-10
Inductive proximity switches LSI 3-17
Optical proximity switches LSO 3-19 3
Capacitive proximity switches LSC 3-20
Electronic position switches
LSE-Titan® 3-22
Analog electronic position switches 3-23
New combinations for your solutions 3-25

3-1
RMQ
Commands and signals are the fundamental • Emergency-Stop buttons with lighting option
functions for controlling machines and processes. for active safety,
The required control signals are produced either • Contacts switch differing potentials,
manually by control circuit devices or mechanically • For use also in safety-related circuits using
by position switches. The respective application positive operation and positively opening
governs the degree of protection, the shape and contacts,
colour. • Complying with industry Standard
Advanced technology has been used consistently IEC/EN60947.
in the development of the new control circuit
3 devices RMQ-Titan®. The use of LED elements and 1) Cage Clamp is a registered trade mark of Messrs.
laser inscription throughout offer maximum WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH, Minden.
reliability, efficiency and flexibility. In detail, this
means: RMQ16
• High-quality optics for a uniform appearance,
• Highest degree of protection up to IP67 and
IP69K (suitable for steam-jet cleaning),
• Clear contrast using LED element lighting, even
in daylight,
• 100.000 h, i.e.machine lifespan,
• Impact and vibration resistant,
• LED operating voltage from 12 to 500 V,
• Low power consumption – only 1/6 of filament
lamps,
• Expanded operating temperature range
-25 to +70 °C,
• Light testing circuit,
• Built-in safety circuits for highest operational
reliability and accessibility,
• Abrasion-proof and clearly contrasting laser
inscription,
• Customer-specific symbols and inscriptions
from 1 off,
• Text and symbols can be freely combined,
• Terminations using screws and Cage
Clamp1)throughout,
• Spring-loaded Cage Clamp terminals for reliable
and maintenance free contact,
• Switching contacts suitable for use with
electronic devices to EN 61131-2: 5 V/1 mA,
• Freely programmable switching behaviour on
all selector switch actuators:
spring-return/stay-put,
• All actuators in illuminated and non-illuminated
version,
• Emergency-Stop buttons with pull- and
turn-to-release function,

RMQ
RMQ-Titan® System Overview

3-3
RMQ
RMQ-Titan®
Four-way pushbutton Selector switch actuators
Moeller has added more operator elements to its The selector switch actuators have four positions.
highly successful range of control circuit devices The actuator is available as rotary head or
RMQ-Titan. They are modular in construction. thumb-grip as required. One contact element is
Contact elements from the RMQ-Titan range are assigned to each On and each Off position.
used. The front rings and front frames are of the
familiar RMQ-Titan format and colour.
3 Four-way pushbutton
The four-way pushbuttons enable users to control
machines and systems in four directions of
movement, with each direction of movement
being assigned one contact element. The actuator Labels
has four individual button plates. They can be Moeller offers labels in various versions for all the
specifically selected for various applications and operator elements. Versions available are:
can be laser-inscribed to suit the customer's • Blank,
requirements. • With direction arrows,
• With inscription 0–1–0–2–0–3–0–4.
In addition, customized inscriptions are possible.

The software Labeleditor enables customized
inscriptions to be designed and these can be
subsequently applied to the labels by laser,
permanently and proof against wiping off.
Joystick
The joystick has four precisely assigned positions.
Each direction of movement is assigned one
contact element. The joystick enables users to
control machines and systems in four directions of
movement.

RMQ
Terminal markings and function numbers (conventional number/circuit symbol), EN 50013
10 13 01 21
14 22
20 13 23 11 13 21
02 11 21
14 24 14 22 12 22
13 21 33 12 13 21 31 03 11 21 31
30 13 23 33 21
14 24 34 14 22 34 14 22 32 12 22 32
Voltage versions with series elements

M22-XLED601) Ue FAC/DC
Ue h/H
1x 60 V
12 – 30 V h/H 2x 90 V
3x 120 V
1 2 1 2 1 2 X1 X2
... ...
7x 240 V
M22-XLED60/ M22-(C)LED(C)-...
M22-XLED220 Ue F
M22-XLED220
1x 220 VDC
1) For increasing the voltage
AC/DC.
Ue h
M22-XLED230-T1) Ue F
85 – 264 V h,
1x 400 V~
50 – 60 Hz
2x 500 V~
1 2 1 2 X1 X2 1) AC– for increasing the voltage

50/60 Hz.
M22-XLED230-T M22-(C)LED(C)230-...

3-5
RMQ
Circuit for light test
The test button is used to check operation of the M22-XLED-T for Ue = 12 to 240 V AC/DC (also
indicator lights independently of the respective for light test with signal towers SL)
control state. Decoupling elements prevent
voltage feedback.
M22-(C)K(C)10
13 13 13 3
3 a
14 14 14 4
2 1
2 1
12 – 240 V h/H
2 1
1 1 1
M22-XLED-T
2 M22-XLED60/ 2 M22-XLED60/ 2 M22-XLED60/

1 1 1
M22-XLED220 M22-XLED220 M22-XLED220
2 2 2
X1 X1 X1
X2 X2 X2 M22-(C)LED(C)-... 1)
a Test button
1) Only for elements 12 to 30 V.

RMQ
M22-XLED230-T for Ue = 85 to 264 V AC/50 –
60 Hz
M22-(C)K(C)10
L1
13 13 13 3 1 M22-(C)K(C)01
14 14 14
a 4 2
85 – 264 V h/50 – 60 Hz
3
2 1
2 1
2 1
X1 X1 X1
M22-XLED230-T
X2 X2 X2 M22-(C)LED(C)230-... 2)
N
a Test button
1) For elements 85 to 264 V.

3-7
Signal Towers SL
Signal Towers SL – everything under visual control at all times
Signal towers SL indicate machine states using Product features
visible and acoustic signals. Mounted on control • Continuous light, flashing light, strobe light and
panels or on machines, they can be reliably acoustic indicator can be combined as required.
recognized as continuous light, flashing light, • Free programmability permits the actuation of
strobe light or acoustic indicator even from a five addresses.
distance, and dealt with as necessary. • Simple assembly without tools by bayonet
fitting.
3 • Automatic contacting by built-in contact pins.
• Excellent illumination by specially shaped
lenses with Fresnel effect.
• Use of filament bulbs or LEDs as required.
• A large number of complete units simplifies
selection, ordering and stock holding for
standard applications.
The various colours of the light elements indicate

the operating status in each case to
IEC/EN 60204-1 an:
RED:
Dangerous state – Immediate action necessary
YELLOW:
Abnormal status – monitor or action
GREEN:
Normal status – no action necessary
BLUE:
Discontinuity – action mandatory
WHITE:
Other status – can be used as required.

Signal Towers SL
Programmability
3 1
3
5 0
5Ⳏ
5
BA15d F 7 W
4Ⳏ 4
3Ⳏ 3
2
2Ⳏ
1Ⳏ 1
054321
N 1...5 Ue = 24 – 230 Vh/Hⵑ
Five signal lines from a terminal strip in the basic Thus, for example, a red strobe light and in
module run through each module. The module is parallel with it an acoustic indicator can indicate
addressed via a wire link (jumper) on each printed and announce the dangerous status of a machine.
circuit board. Five different addresses can also be Insert both jumpers into the same position on the
allocated several times. pcb – and it's done!
(a section “Circuit for light test”, page 3-6.)

3-9
Position switches LS-Titan®, AT
LS, LSM, AT0, ATR AT4 AT4/.../ZB

Standards • IEC 60947, • IEC 60947, • IEC 60947,
EN 60947, EN 60947, EN 60947,
VDE 0660 VDE 0660 VDE 0660
a EN 50047 a EN 50041 a EN 50041
• Dimensions • Dimensions • Dimensions
• Fixing dimensions • Fixing dimensions • Fixing dimensions
3 • Switching points • Switching points • Switching points
• Minimum IP65 • IP65 • IP65
Suitable • Also for use in safety • Also for use in safety • Safety position
applications circuits, by positive circuits, by positive switches for
operation and operation and protection of
positively opening positively opening personnel
contacts contacts • With separate
actuating element
for protective
guards
• Positive operation
and positively
opening contacts
• Approval by German
Trade Association
and SUVA (Swiss
accident prevention
authority)
Actuator • Plunger • Plunger • Coded actuating

• Roller plunger • Roller head element
• Roller lever (adjustable in 90° • Operating head:
• Angled roller lever steps, can be – Adjustable in 90°
• Adjustable roller operated vertically steps
lever or horizontally) – Can be actuated
• Actuating rod • Roller plunger from both sides
• Spring rod actuator • Roller lever • Actuating element
• Operating heads • Adjustable roller – Convertible for
adjustable in 90° lever vertical and
steps • Actuating rod horizontal fixing
• Spring rod actuator • With triple coding
• Operating heads
adjustable in 90°
steps
For
AT0-...-ZB ATO-...ZBZ
Standards • IEC 60947, • IEC 60947,
EN 60947, EN 60947,
VDE 0660 VDE 0660
• IP65 • IP65
3
Suitable • Safety position • Safety position
applications switches for switches for
protection of protection of
personnel personnel
• With separate • With separate
actuating element actuating element
for protective for protective
guards guards
• Positive operation • Positive operation
and positively and positively
opening contacts opening contacts
• Approved by • Electromagnetic
German Trade interlocking
Association and • Approved by
SUVA (Swiss German Trade
Accident Insurance Association and
Institue) SUVA (Swiss
Accident Insurance
Institue)
Actuator • Coded actuating • Coded actuating
element element
• Operating head: • Operating head:
– Adjustable in 90° – Adjustable in 90°
steps steps
– Can be actuated – Can be actuated
from four sides from four sides
and from above

3-11
AT4/ZB, AT0-ZB safety position switches
Moeller safety position switches have been Positive opening is an opening movement by
specially designed for monitoring the position of which it is ensured that the main contacts of a
protective guards such as doors, flaps, hoods and switch have attained the open position at the
grilles. They meet the requirements of the German same time as the actuating element assumes the
Trade Association for the testing of positively Off position. Moeller position switches all meet
opening position switches for safety functions these requirements.
(GS-ET-15). These reqquirements include:
3 “Position switches for safety functions must be Certification
designed such that the function used for
All Moeller safety position switches are certified
protection cannot be changed or defeated by hand
by the German employers liability insurance
or by using simple tools.” Simple tools include:
association or by the Technical Monitoring Service
pliers, screwdrivers, pins, nails, wire, scissors,
(TÜV), Rheinland, and the Swiss accident
pocket knives, etc.
prevention authority (SUVA).
In addition to these requirements, AT0-ZB position
switches offer additional manipulation safety by
means of an operating head which can rotate but
cannot be removed.
Positive opening
Mechanically operated position switches in safety
circuits must have positively opening contacts (see
EN 60947-5-1/10.91). Here, the term positive
opening is defined as follows: “The execution of a
contact separation as the direct result of a
predetermined motion of the actuating element of
the switch via non-spring operated parts (e.g. not
dependent on a spring )“.
For
“Personnel protection” by monitoring the protective device
AT0-ZB AT4/ZB
• Door open
• AT...-ZB
STOP switches off the
power
• No danger
AT...ZB
Closed Open a Personnel protection
Door opening a Enabling contact
(21–22) opening positively
Door open a Enabling contact safely
open, even where attempts
are made to tamper using
basic tools
Closing door a Triple-coded actuator
21 22 21 22 closes the enable contact
13 14 13 14

3-13
“Enhanced personnel protection“ by monitoring and interlocking the protective device
AT0-ZBZ
• Stop command
• Waiting time
• Machine stops
STOP • Protective device on
• No danger
3
AT0-...FT-ZBZ, spring-powered interlock (closed-circuit principle)
a Interlocked
a b c
b Released
c Open
A1 A1 A1
US US
A2 A2 A2
21 22 21 22 21 22
11 12 11 12 11 12
A Enhanced personnel protection with separate indication of the door position

1. Door closed a De-energized: even with 4. Door open a Both contacts blocked in the
+ interlocked mains failure or wire breakage: open position, even where
door interlocked = safe condition attempts are made to tamper
enable contact(21-22) closed using basic tools
2. Releasing of a Applies voltage to coil (A1, 5. Closing of door a Triple-coded actuator cancels
door A2) e.g. via zero-speed monitor, blocking of the enabling contact.
enabling contact (21-22) opens Door position contact (11-12) closes
3. Opening of door a Only possible once it is 6. Interlocking of a Disconnects coil voltage:
released. Door position contact door 1. Actuator, interlocked
(11-12) opens 2. Enabling contact closed
a Enable only, when door
interlocked
For
“Process protection“
• Stop command
STOP • Waiting time
• Process sequence ended
• Protective device on
• Product satisfactory
3
AT0-...MT-ZBZ, magnet-powered interlock (open-circuit principle)
a Interlocked
a b c b Released
c Open
A1 A1 A1
US
A2 A2 A2
21 22 21 22 21 22
11 12 11 12 11 12
a Process protection + personnel protection with separate indication of the door position
1. Door closed + a Energized: enables 4. Door open a Both contacts blocked
interlocked immediate access in the in the open position, even
event of mains failure and where attempts are made to
wire breakage. Both tamper using basic tools
contacts closed
2. Releasing of door a Disconnects power 5. Closing of door a Triple-coded actuator
from coil (A1, A2) e.g. via cancels blocking of the
zero-speed monitor, enabling contact. Door
enabling contact (21-22) position contact (11-12) closes
opens
3. Opening of door a Only possible once it is 6. Interlocking of door a Applies coil voltage:
released. Door position 1. Actuator, interlocked
contact (11-12) opens 2. Enabling contact closed
a Enabling possible only
with the door interlocked

3-15
“Personnel protection“ by monitoring of the protective device
ATR-... /TKG ATR-.../TS
STOP
3
• Hinged protective
cover open
• ATR/T... switches off
the power
• No danger
ATR-.../TKG, ATR-.../TS
Closed Open aPersonnel protection

Opening of hinged a Enabling contact (21–22)
protective cover opening positively
Hinged protective cover a Enabling contact safely

open open, even where
attempts are made to
tamper using basic tools
Closing of hinged a Closes enabling contact

protective cover (21–22)
21 22 21 22
13 14 13 14
For
Inductive proximity switches LSI
The inductive proximity switch operates on the • Resistant to vibration,
principle of the attenuated LC oscillator: when • Any required mounting position
metal enters the response range of the proximity • LED display indicates the switching or output
switch, power is withdrawn from the system. The status and simplifies adjustment during
metal part causes an energy loss, which is caused installation,
by the formation of eddy currents. The eddy • Operational temperature range –25 to +70 °C
current losses are related to the size and nature of • Oscillating load: cycle time 5 minutes,
the metal part. amplitude 1 mm in the frequency range 10 to
The change in the oscillation amplitude of the 55 Hz,
oscillator results in a current change, which is • Comply with IEC 60947-5-2, 3
evaluated in the downstream electronics and is • Have a steady-state output which remains
converted into a defined switching signal. A activated as long as the unit is being attenuated
steady-state signal is available at the output of the • Bounce-free switching behaviour in the
unit, for the duration of the attenuation. microsecondsrange (10–6 s).
햵
햲 햳 햴 Switching distance S
The switching distance is the distance at which a
metal part approaching the active surface effects
햶 a signal change at the output. The switching
distance depends on:
a Oscillator • Direction of approach
b Rectifier • Parameter
c Amplifier • Material of the metal part
d Output The following correction factors must be used for
e Power supply different materials:
Steel (St 37) 1.00 x Sn
Properties of inductive proximity switches
The following details apply to all inductive Brass 0.35 – 0.50 x Sn
proximity switches: Copper 0.25 – 0.45 x Sn
• Protective insulation to IEC 346/VDE 0100 or
IEC 536, Aluminium 0.35 – 0.50 x Sn
• Degree of protection IP67,
High-grade steel 0.60 – 1.00 x Sn
• High operating frequency or switching
frequency, Sn = Rated switching distance
• Maintenance and wear-free (long service life),

3-17
Inductive proximity switches LSI
AC operating mode
AC inductive proximity switches have two
terminals. The load is connected in series with the L1
sensor.
U Sensor Sensor U Supply
R Load
3
U, I Load N
DC operating mode
DC inductive proximity switches have three
terminals and are operated with a protective low +
voltage.
The switching behaviour can be determined more U Sensor Sensor U Supply
precisely, because the load is actuated via a
separate output, and is independent of the load.
R Load
U, ILoad –
For
Optical proximity switches LSO
Principle of operation
The optoelectronic sensors in the switch operate The following correction factors apply to different
using modulated infrared light. Visible light reflecting material characteristics.
therefore cannot affect their operation. Infrared
Material Factor app.
light can penetrate even severe dirt on the optics,
and thus ensures reliable operation. Proximity Paper, white, matt, 1 x Sd
switch transmitters and receivers are matched to 200 g/m2
one another. The sensor receiver has an integral Metal, gloss 1.2 – 1.6 x Sd
bandpass filter to amplify primarily the Aluminium, black, anodized 1.1 – 1.8 x Sd 3
transmitted frequency. All other frequencies are Polystyrene, white 1 x Sd
attenuated. This gives the units good resistance to
Cotton, white 0.6 x Sd
extraneous light. Precision plastic optics ensure
long range and long sensing distances. There are PVC, grey 0.5 x Sd
two types of optical proximity switch, Wood, untreated 0.4 x Sd
distinguished by their function. Card, black, gloss 0.3 x Sd
Card, black, matt 0.1 x Sd
Reflected-light beam Sd = Switching range
b
Reflected-light barrier
a Object
b Reflector a a Object a
The unit transmits a pulsed infrared light beam,
The reflected-light beam transmits infrared light to
which is reflected by a triple reflector or mirror. The
the object being scanned, which reflects this light
interruption in the light beam causes the unit to
in all directions. The portion of this light which
switch. Light barriers identify objects irrespective of
strikes the receiver ensures a switching signal is
their surface, as long as they do not have a gloss
produced, assuming adequate intensity.
finish. The reflector size must be chosen such that
Evaluation takes place of “Reflection“ and “No
the object to be detected virtually completely
reflection“. These states mean the same as
interrupts the light beam. Reliable detection is
presence or absence of an object in the sensing
always achieved if the object is the same size as the
range. The degree of reflection of the object
reflector. The unit can also be set to detect
surface to be monitored affects the operating
transparent objects.
range Sd.

3-19
Capacitive proximity switches LSC
Principle of operation
The active area of a capacitive proximity switch Effects
LSC is formed by two concentrically arranged
metal electrodes. You can imagine these as the Capacitive proximity switches are activated both
electrodes of a capacitor that are opened up. The by conductive as well as non-conductive objects.
electrode surfaces of this capacitor are arranged in Metals achieve the greatest switching distances
the feed-back branch of a high-frequency due to their high conductivity. Reduction factors
oscillator circuit. This is adjusted such that it will for various metals, such as are necessary with
inductive proximity switches, need not be taken
3 not oscillate when the surface is clear. When an
into account.
object approaches the active surface of the
proximity switch, it enters the electric field in front Actuation by objects made of non-conductive
of the electrode surfaces. This effects a rise in the materials (insulators):
coupling capacitance between the plates and the When an insulator is brought between the
oscillator begins to respond. The oscillation electrodes of a capacitor, the capacitance rises
amplitude is monitored via an evaluation circuit relative to the dielectric constant e of the
and converted into a switching command. insulator. The dielectric constant for all solid and
liquid materials is greater than that for air.
A+ Objects made of non-conductive materials affect
the active surface of a capacitive proximity switch
in the same way. The coupling capacitance is
increased. Materials with a high dielectric
constant achieve great switching distances.
Note
When scanninng organic materials (wood, grain,
B– etc.) it must be noted that the attainable switching
distance is greatly dependent on their water
C
content. (eWater = 80!)
B
d
A a b c
Influence of environmental conditions
B
As can be seen from the following diagram, the
C
switching distance Sr is dependent on the
e
dielectric constant er of the object to be
a Oscillator monitored.
b Evaluation circuit Metal objects produce the maximum switching
c Amplifier distance (100 %).
d Output With other materials, it is reduced relative to the
e Power supply dielectric constant of the object to be monitored.
A, B Main electrodes
C Auxiliary electrode
For
Capacitive proximity switches LSC
Material er
er
80
Air, vacuum 1
Teflon 2
60 Wood 2 to 7
Paraffin 2.2
Kerosene 2.2
30 Oil of terpentine 2.2
3
Transformer oil 2.2
10 Paper 2.3
Polyethylene 2.3
1
10 20 40 60 80 100 Polypropylene 2.3
sr Cable insulation 2.5
[%] Soft rubber 2.5
Silicone rubber 2.8
The following table lists the dielectric constants er
of some important materials. Due to the high Polyvinyl chloride 2.9
dielectric value of water, the fluctuations with Polystyrene 3
wood can be significant. Damp wood therefore is Celluloid 3
registered much more effectively by capacitive Perspex 3.2
proximity switches than dry wood. Araldite 3.6
Bakelite 3.6
Silica glass 3.7
Hard rubber 4
Oil-impregnated paper 4
Chipboard 4
Porcelain 4.4
Laminated paper 4.5
Quartz sand 4.5
Glass 5
Polyamide 5
Mica 6
Marble 8
Alcohol 25.8
Water 80

3-21
Electronic position switches LSE-Titan®
Switching point adjustable and variable
The switching point on electronic position
switches LSE-Titan is adjustable and variable. Two adjust
high-speed and bounce-free PNP switching
outputs enable high switching frequencies. fasten
The position switch is overload as well as
conditionally short-circuit proof and has
snap-action switching behaviour. This ensures a
3 defined and reproduceable switching point. The
switching point lies in the range from 0.5 to
5.5 mm (supplied as = 3 mm). LED 1s
Adjustment to a new switching point is carried out adjust
fmax F 2 N
as follows:
Move the plunger from the original to the new
adjust
switch position. For this purpose, press the setting
button for 1 s. The LED now flashes with a high
Bauart geprüft
pulse frequency and the new switching point is Functional
retentively set.
TÜV
In redundant structures, position switches Rheinland
Safety
Type approved
LSE-Titan just like electromechanical position
switches, achieve safety category 3 or 4 to
EN 954-1, Safety of machinery. Contact travel diagram
Note LSE-11 +Ue 0 0.5 5.5 6.1
Q1
This means that all the devices are also suitable
Q2
for safety applications designed for personnel or electron.
default=3.0
process protection. Q1 Q2
0V
LSE-02 +Ue 0 0.5 5.5 6.1

Q1
Q2
electron. default=3.0
Q1 Q2
0V
For
Analog electronic position switches
Two types are available: data. This means that the safe status can be
• LSE-AI with current output, monitored and analysed at all times. The position
• LSE-AU with voltage output. switch also has a self-test function. The outputs
Q1 and Q2 are constantly scanned for overload,
Analog, mechanically actuated position short circuit against 0 V and short circuit against
switches directly linked with the world of +Ue.
automation Contact travel diagram
Analog position switches LSE-AI (4 to 20 mA) and LSE-AI 3
LSE-AU (0 to 10 V) represent another innovation
I [mA]
in electronic position switches. Using them, it is 20
now possible for the first time to monitor the
actual position of a flue gas valve or an actuator
continuously. The actual position is converted in 4 S [%]
analog fashion into voltage (0 to 10 V) or current
0 100
(4 to 20 mA) and then continuously signalled to
the electronics. Even objects of varying sizes or
thicknesses, such as brake shoes, can be scanned LSE-AU
and the results processed further.
U [V]
Simple rotational-speed dependent control
10
systems of fan motors or smoke-venting blowers
signal the opening angle of the air damper
(e.g. 25, 50 or 75 %) and thus save power and
S [%]
material wear. The analog position switches also
0 100
have a diagnosis output for further processing of
Connection diagram
+24 V (–15 / +20 %)
LSE-AI
+Ue
F 200 mA
diagnosis +Q2
4 – 20 mA
analog +Q1
0V
A
< 400 O Q Ue
0V

3-23
+24 V (–15 / +20 %)
LSE-AU
+Ue
F 200 mA
diagnosis +Q2
F 10 mA
analog +Q1
0V
3 V 0 V – 10 V Q Ue
0V
Circuit diagram
Normal scenario
LSE-AI LSE-AU
Q1 4 – 20 mA 0 – 10 V
Q2 Q Ue Q Ue
LED
LED LED
t t
Fault scenario
LSE-AI LSE-AU
Q1 0 mA 0V
Q2 0V 0V
LED
LED LED
t t
Reset
+Ue +Ue
t t
>1s >1s
For
New combinations for your solutions
RMQ-Titan® and LS-Titan®
a
3
LS-Titan
RMQ-Titan
a Operating heads in four positions, each

turned by 90°, can be fitted subsequently.
Actuating devices RMQ-Titan® simply snap In addition, all the operating heads and the
fitted adapter for accepting the RMQ-Titan actuators
Another unique feature is the possibility to have a bayonet fitting that enables quick and
combine control circuit devices from the secure fitting. Using the bayonet fitting, the heads
RMQ-Titan range with the position switches can be attached in any of the four directions
LS-Titan. Pushbuttons, selector switches or (4 x 90°).
Emergency-Stop buttons can all be directly
snapped on to any position switch as operating
head. The complete unit then has at least the high
degree of protection IP66 at front and rear.

3-25
Notes
For
Rotary Switches
Page
Overview 4-2
ON-OFF Switches, main switches,
maintenance switches 4-3
Changeover switches, reversing switches 4-5
(Reversing) star-delta switches 4-6
Multi-speed switches 4-7
Interlock circuits 4-11 4
Meter selector switches 4-12
Meter selector switches 4-13
Heater switches 4-14
Step switches 4-15
Rotary switches and switch-disconnectors with
ATEX approval 4-17

4-1
Rotary Switches
Overview
Use and mounting forms
Moeller rotary switches and switch-disconnectors The following mounting forms are available:
are used as: g Flush mounting,
a Main switches, main switches used as h Centre mounting,
Emergency-Stop devices, i Surface mounting,
b ON-OFF switches, j Service distribution board mounting,
c Safety switches, k Rear mounting.
d Changeover switches, Refer to the latest issue of our Main Catalogue for
e Reversing switches, star-delta switches, “Industrial Switchgear”.
multi-speed switches, Other contact arrangements are listed in the K115
f Step switches, control switches, coding
4 switches, meter selector switches.
specialist catalog in addition to the switches listed
in the Main Catalogue.
Basic P Iu Use as Mounting type
type
[KW] [A] a b c d e f g h i j k
TM 3.0 10 – x – x – x k k – k –
T0 6.5 20 x x – x x x + k k k +
T3 13 32 x x – x x – + k k k +
T5b 22 63 x x x x x – + – k – +
T5 30 100 x – x x – – + – k – +
T6 55 160 x – – x – – – – + – +
T8 132 3151) x – – x – – – – + – +
P1-25 13 25 x x x – – – + k + k +
P1-32 15 32 x x x – – – + k + k +
P3-63 37 63 x x x – – – + – + k +
P3-100 50 100 x x x – – – + – + k +
P5-125 45 125 x x – – – – + – – – +
P5-160 55 160 x x – – – – + – – – +
P5-250 90 250 x x – – – – + – – – +
P5-315 110 315 x x – – – – + – – – +
P = Max. motor rating; 400/415 V; AC-23 A
Iu = Max. rated uninterrupted current
1) In enclosed version (surface mounting), max. 275 A.
k Depending on the number of contact units, function and contact sequence.
+ Irrespective of the number of contact units, function and contact sequence.

Rotary Switches
ON-OFF Switches, Main Switches, Maintenance Switches
Circuit diagram example for maintenance T0(3)-3-15683 maintenance switch
switches with a load shedding contact and
(or) switch position indicator
L1 Function
L2 Load shedding: When
L3 switching on, the main
N current contacts close first,
then the contactor is
F1 F0 activated via the late-make
N/O contact. When
95
switching off, the contactor
1 3 5
4 Q11 F2
is first disconnected by
opening of the early-break
2 4 6 96
21
contact, then the main
F2 contacts isolate the motor
O
supply.
22
Switch position
13 13 indication: The position of
I Q11 the switch can be signalled
14 14 to the control panel or
mimic diagram panel via
additional NO and NC
1 3 5 7 9 11 contacts.
Q1
2 4 6 8 10 12
U V W
A1
P1 P2 Q11
M A2
P1: On
P2: Off
Q11: Load shedding
T0(3)-3-15683 circuit diagram
1-2,3-4,5-6
7-8,11-12
9-10

Rotary Switches
Changeover Switches, Reversing Switches
Changeover switches
T0-3-8212 L1 L2 L3
T3-3-8212 10 2
1
T5B-3-8212 2
T5-3-8212 3
4
T6-3-8212 5
6
T8-3-8212 7
8
0
9
1 2
10
11
12
FS 684 4
Reversing switches
T0-3-8401 L1 L2 L3
T3-3-8401 1 0 2
1
T5B-3-8401 2
T5-3-8401 3
4
0 5
1 2 6
7
8
9
10
FS 684

4-5
Rotary Switches
(Reversing) Star-Delta Switches
Star-delta switches
T0-4-8410 L1 L2 L3
0 YΔ
T3-4-8410 1
Y 2
3
0 T5B-4-8410 4
T5-4-8410 5
6
FS 635 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
4 W2 U1
14
15
16
W1
U2
V2 V1
Reversing star-delta switches

T0-6-15877 L1L2L3
T3-6-15877 Y 0 Y
1
0 SOND 28 1 ) 2
3
Y Y
4
5
6
7
FS 638 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
W2 U1
20
21
22
W1 U2
23
V2 V1 24
1)Standard contactor interlock

a section “Interlock Circuits”, page 4-11

Rotary Switches
Multi-Speed Switches
2 speeds, non-reversing
Tapped winding arrangement L1 L2L3
T0-4-8440 0 1 2
1
T3-4-8440 2
T5B-4-8440 3
4
T5-4-8440 5
6
1 7
0 2 8
9
10
11
FS 644 12
13
1U 14
15
4
2W 2V 16
2U
1W 1V
햲
a without links
2 separate windings
T0-3-8451 L1L2L3
T3-3-8451 0 1 2
1
T5B-3-8451 2
T5-3-8451 3
4
5
1
0 2 6
7
8
9
10
FS 644 11
12
1U 2U
1W 1V 2W 2V

4-7
Rotary Switches
2 speeds, reversing
Tapped winding arrangement
T0-6-15866 L1L2 L3
T3-6-15866 2 1 0 1 2
1
0 2
1 1 3
2 2 4
5
6
FS 629 7
8
9
T5B-7-15866 10
T5-7-15866 11
4 0
12
13
1 1 14
2 2 15
16
17
18
FS 441 19
1U 20
21
2W 2V 22
23
2U 24
1W 1V
2 separate windings, reversing L1 L2L3

T0-5-8453 2 1 0 1 2
1
T3-5-8453 2
3
0
4
1 1
5
2 2 6
7
8
FS 629 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1U 2U
17
18
19
20
1W 1V 2W 2V

Rotary Switches
Tapped winding arrangement, single
L1 L2 L3
winding for low speed 0 1 2 3
T0-6-8455 1
2
T3-6-8455 3
T5B-6-8455 4
5
T5-6-8455 6
7
1 2 8
0 3 9
10
11
12
FS 616 13
14 4
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1U
1U
2W 2V
2U
1W 1V 1W 1V
A B
0-(A)y- (B)d = (B)y y

4-9
Rotary Switches
Tapped winding arrangement, single
L1 L2 L3
winding for high speed 0 1 2 3
T0-6-8459 1
2
T3-6-8459 3
4
1 2 5
0 3 6
7
8
9
FS 616 10
11
T5B-6-8459 12
4 T5-6-8459 13
14
15
2
1 3 16
0 17
18
19
20
FS 420 21
22
23
24
1U
1U
2W 2V
2U
1W 1V 1W 1V
A B
0-(B)d- (B)y y -(A)y
For
Rotary Switches
Interlock Circuits
Interlock circuits between rotary switches and • Protection against automatic restarting after a
contactors with overload relays provide neat and motor overload or power failure
economical solutions for many switching drive • The facility for remote disconnection (e.g.
tasks.The following points are common to all emergency-stop) can be provided by one or
interlock circuits: more Off pushbuttons.
Without mains disconnection (SOND 27) With mains disconnection (SOND 28)
Mains disconnection only by contactorprimarily Mains disconnection by contactor and switch
for star-delta circuit
F0 F0
Q11
F2
Q11
F2
4
Q1 Q1
S0 01 2 S0 01 2
Control section Control section
SOND 27 SOND 28
Q11 Q11
Power section Power section
Q11
without mains without mains
Q11
disconnection disconnection
Circuit as required Circuit as required
M M
3~ 3~
Interlock with contactor (SOND 29) Interlock with contactor (SOND 30)
Contactor can be energized only when switch is Contactor can be energized only when switch is
in the Off position in an operating position
Q11 F0 Q11 F0
F2 F2
Q1 Q1
S0 S0
01 2 Control section 01 2 Control section
S1 SOND 29 SOND 30
Q11 S1 Q11
Power section Power section
Q11 Q11
Circuit as required Circuit as required
M M
3~ 3~

4-11
Rotary Switches
Single-Phase Starting Switches
Meter selector switches enable you to measure Numerous circuits are possible for the different
currents, voltages and power in three-phase measurements, some of the most common ones
systems with only one measuring device. being shown below.
Voltmeter selector switches

T0-3-8007 T0-2-15922
3 x phase to phase 3 x phase to neutral without “0”
3 x phase to neutral with “0” position position
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
L3-L1
L2-L3
L1-L2
0 L2-L3
L1L2L3 N L1L2 L3
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2 L1-N
L1-L2 L3-L1
L2-L3 L2-N
0
4 L3-L1 L3-N 1
2
1
2
FS 1410759 3 FS 164854 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9
V
10
11
V 12
Ammeter selector switches

T0-5-15925
T3-5-15925
For direct measurement
0 L1 L2 L3
L3 L1 0 L1L2L3 0
1
L2
2
FS 9440 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
L1 L2 L3
For
Rotary Switches
Meter Selector Switches
Ammeter selector switches
T0-3-8048
T3-3-8048
For measurement via transformers, complete rotation possible
0 L1
L3 L1 L2
L2 L3
0 L1L2L3 0
FS 9440 1
2
3
4
5
6
7 4
8
9
A 10
11
12
Wattmeter selector switches

T0-5-8043 The Aron circuit will give a correct result for
T3-5-8043 four-cable systems only when the sum of the
Two-phase method (Aron circuit) for three-cable currents equals zero, i.e. only when the four-cable
installations loaded as required. The sum of the system is balanced.
two readings gives the total output.
0 L1
1 2 L2
L3
FS 953
W
1 2 3 11
10 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

4-13
Rotary Switches
Heater Switches
1-pole disconnection, 3 steps
T0-2-8316
T3-2-8316
T5B-2-8316
1
2
3 L1 L2 L3
0 0 1 2 3 I II III
1
2
3
1
FS 420 4
5
I II III 6 2
7
4 8
T0-2-15114, complete rotation possible

1
0 1 1+2 2 0
0 1+2 1
2
2
3
4
FS 193840 5
6
7
8
q switched
Q not switched
Further heater switches, 2- and 3-pole, with alternative

circuitry, output stages, and number of steps are
described in the Moeller Main Catalogue, Industrial
Switchgear and in the catalogue K 115.
For
Rotary Switches
Step Switches
One step closed in each position, complete rotation possible
T0-6-8239
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
T3-6-8239 1
2
345 3
2 6 4
1 7
12 8 5
1110 9 6
7
FS 301 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

4-15
Rotary Switches
Step Switches
Stay-put switches
On-Off stay-put switches
0 1
1-pole: T0-1-15401 1
2-pole: T0-1-15402 2
3
3-pole: T0-2-15403 4
5
0 6
1
FS 415
4
Changeover switches
1-pole: T0-1-15421 1-pole: T0-1-15431
2-pole: T0-2-15422 2-pole: T0-2-15432
3-pole: T0-3-15423 3-pole: T0-3-15433
2
0
1 20 1 0
HAND AUTO
HAND 0 AUTO
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
FS 429 5 FS 1401 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
On-Off stay-put switches (also usable as main switches, mains isolating device)
1-pole: T0-1-15521
2-pole: T0-2-15522
3-pole: T0-3-15523
With pulsed contact in the intermediate position
ON
0 1
OFF
1
2
3
4
FS 908 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
For
Rotary Switches
Rotary Switches and Switch-Disconnectors with ATEX Approval
What does ATEX stand for?
ATmosphéres EXplosibles = ATEX
Explosive atmospheres
Gas Dust
Two standards
For operators: 1999/92/EC For manufacturers: 94/9/EC 4

(binding from 06/2006) (binding from 06/2003)
Explosion risk assessment Device groups

Gas, steam, Dust Ex risk Group Application field
mist I Mining
Zone 0 Zone 20 continuous, frequent, long, II everything apart from
Zone 1 Zone 21 occasional mining
Zone 2 Zone 22 normally not, but
otherwise for a short
period
Selection of devices and protective Selection of devices by device

systems by categories groups
Gas, steam, Dust Category Group Category Safety
mist Zone 0, I M1 very high
1, 2 Zone 1, 2 Zone 20, 21, 22 1 I M2 high
Zone 2 Zone 21, 22 1, 2 II 1 very high
Zone 22 1, 2, 3 II 2 high
II 3 normal

4-17
Rotary Switches
Rotary Switches and Switch-Disconnectors with ATEX Approval
ATEX approval for Moeller
Moeller offers T rotary switches (from 32 to 100 A) • Changeover switches.
and P switch-disconnectors (from 25 to 100 A) in
accordance with the binding ATEX Directive The following ATEX switches are available:
94/6 EC (binding from 06/2006). The switches are
provided with the equipment marking Ex II3D Current T rotary P
range switches switch-discon-
IP5X T90°C and are approved for the Ex zone 22
nectors
in explosive dust atmospheres.
Explosive dust atmospheres are present in:
25 A – P1-25/I2
• Mills,
• Metal polishing workshops, 32 A T3-.../I2 P1-32/I2
4 • Woodworking facilities,
• Cement industry, 63 A T5B-.../I4 P3-63/I4
• Aluminium industry, 100 A T5-.../I5 P3-100/I5
• Animal feed industry,
• Grain storage and preparation, Note
• Agriculture, Moeller ATEX switches have passed the EC
• Pharmacy etc. prototype test for main, maintenance and repair
switches for the current ranges from 25 to 100 A.
The ATEX switches are used as: They are approved for explosive dust atmospheres
• Main switches in accordance with category II 3D, with the test
• Maintenance switches number: BVS 04E 106X.
• Repair switches, For further information see installation
• ON-OFF switches or, instructions AWA1150-2141.
General installation and application notes

• Only suitable cable glands may be used for • Never open the device in dust explosive
category 3D! atmospheres!
• Use only temperature resistant cables (> 90°C)! • Observe the requirements of EN 50281-1-2!
• The maximum surface temperature is 90°C! • It should be checked that the device is free of
• Operation only permissible at an ambient dust prior to assembly!
temperature between –20 and +40°C! • Do not open the device when energized!
• Observe the technical data of the switch used!
For
Contactors and Relays
Page
Contactor relays 5-2
Time and special purpose relays 5-8
Control relay easy, Multi Functions
Display MFD-Titan® 5-12
Contactors DIL, Overload relays Z 5-58
Contactors DIL 5-60
Overload relays Z 5-64
Electronic Motor Protective relay ZEV 5-67
Thermistor Motor protection Device EMT6 5-74 5
Electronic Safety Relay ESR 5-77
Measurement and Monitoring Relay EMR4 5-78

5-1
Contactor relays
Contactor relays
Contactor relays are often used in control and contact input and output. All Moeller contactor
regulating functions. They are used in large relays have double-break contacts.
quantities for the indirect control of motors, The German Trade Associations demand that, for
valves, clutches and heating equipment. control systems of power-driven metalwork
In addition to the simplicity which they offer in presses, the contacts of contactors must be
project engineering, panel building, interlocked. Interlocking means that the contacts
commissioning and maintenance, the high level of are mechanically connected to one another such
safety which they afford is a major factor in their that break contacts and make contacts can never
favour. be closed simultaneously. At the same time, it is
Safety necessary to ensure that the contact gaps are at
The contactor relay contacts themselves constitute least 0.5 mm over the entire life, even when
a considerable safety feature. By design and defective (e.g. when a contact is welded). The
5 construction they ensure electrical isolation contactor relays DILER and DILA fulfil this
between the actuating circuit and the operating requirement.
circuit, in the de-energized state, between the
Moeller contactor relays

Moeller offers two ranges of contactor relays as a Modules having auxiliary functions
modular system:
Auxiliary contact modules having 2 or 4 contacts
• Contactor relays DILER,
The combination of normally open and normally
• Contactor relays DILA.
closed contacts is according to EN 50011. The
and the modules are described on the following auxiliary contact modules of the contactors DILEM
pages. and DILM cannot be snapped onto the basic
device to prevent duplication of terminal markings
e.g. contact 21/22 on the basic unit and 21/22 on
Modular system the add-on auxiliary contact module.
The modular system has many advantages for the
user. The system is formed around basic units,
which are equipped with additional functions by
means of modules. Basic units are intrinsically
functional units, consisting of an AC or DC drive
and four auxiliary contacts.

Contactor relays
The system and the Standard
European Standard EN 50011 “Terminal For 6 and 8 pole contactor relays, the “E” version
markings, reference numbers and reference letters means that four make contacts must be arranged
for certain contactor relays” has a direct bearing in the lower/rear contact level. If, for example, the
on the use and application of the modular system. available auxiliary contact modules are used in the
There are various types, which the Standard DILA-22 and DILA-3131, they result in contact
differentiates between by means of reference combinations with reference letters X and Y.
numbers and reference letters, depending on the
number and position of the make and break Below are 3 examples of contactors with 4
contacts in the device, and their terminal normally open and 4 normally closed contacts
markings. with different reference letters. Version E is to be
Ideally devices with the reference letter E should preferred.
be used. The basic devices DILA-40, DILA-31,
DILA-22 as well as DILER-40, DILER-31 and 5
DILER-22 comply with the E version. .
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
DILA-XHI04 DILA-XHI13 DILA-XHI22
51 61 71 81 53 61 71 81 53 61 71 83
52 62 72 82 54 62 72 82 54 62 72 84
+ + +
DILA-40 DILA-31 DILA-22
A1 13 23 33 43 A1 13 21 33 43 A1 13 21 31 43
A2 14 24 34 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 22 32 44
q 44 E q 44 X q 44 Y
DILA40/04 DILA31/13 DILA22/22

5-3
Contactor relays
Coil connections
On the contactor relay DILA the coil connection A1
A1 is at the top and A2 at the bottom. As suppressor
circuits the following are connected on the front :
• RC suppressors
A1 A2 • Varistor suppressors
The DC operated contactors DILER and DILA have

an integrated suppressor circuit.
A2
DILER DILA
5 On the top positioned terminals A1–A2 of the
contactor DILER the following accessories are
connected to limit the relay coil switch off voltage
peaks :
• RC suppressors
• Diode suppressors
• Varistor suppressors
Suppressor circuits
Electronic equipment is nowadays being Since interference-free disconnection is impossible
increasingly used in combination with without an accessory, the coils may be connected
conventional switching devices such as to a suppressor module, depending on the
contactors. This equipment includes application. The advantages and disadvantages of
programmable logic controllers (PLCs) timing the various suppressor circuits are explained in the
relays and coupling modules, whose operation following table.
can be adversely affected by disturbances from
interactions between all the components.
One of the disturbance factors occurs when
inductive loads, such as coils of electromagnetic
switching devices, are switched off. High cut-off
induction voltages can be produced when such
devices are switched off and, under some
circumstances, can destroy adjacent electronic
devices or, via capacitive coupling mechanisms,
can generate interference voltage pulses and thus
cause disruptions in operation.

Notes

5-5
Contactor relays
Circuit diagram Load current and Proof Addi- Induction

voltage responses against tional voltage
incorrect dropout limiting
connec- delay defined
tion also
for AC
+ – Very long 1V
i
I0
D 0 t0 t
5 u U
0
– t1 t2
0 t
U
+ – Medium UZD
i
I0
D
0
t
ZD t0
u U0
– t1 t2
0
t
U
Yes Short UVDR

i I0
0
VDR t
u U0
t1 t2
0
t
U
Yes Short –
i I0
R 0
t0 t
C u U0
0
T1 t

Contactor relays
Circuit diagram Damping Increased Remarks

also rating
below with
ULIMIT circuitry.
+ – – Advan- Dimensioning uncritical.

tages: Minimum possible
induction voltage, Very
D
simple and reliable.
5
–
Disadvan- Long drop-out delay

tage:
+ – – Advan- Very short drop-out

tages: delay. Dimensioning
D uncritical. Simple
construction
ZD
–
Disadvan- No damping below UZD
tage:
– – Advan- Dimensioning uncritical.
tages: High energy absorption.
Very simple construction
VDR
Disadvan- No damping below UVDR

tage:
Yes Yes Advan- HF damping due to
tages: stored energy.
R Immediate
de-energisation. Highly
C suitable for AC.
Disadvan- Precise dimensioning

tage: required

5-7
Timing and special purpose relays
Electronic timing relays are used in contactor • ETR2-44
control systems which require short reset times, Function 44 (flashing, two speeds; can be set
high repetition accuracy, high switching to either pulse initiating or pause initiating)
frequency, and a long component lifespan. Times • Multifunction relay DILET70, ETR 4-69/70
between 0.05 s and 100 h can be easily selected Function 11 (on-delayed)
and set. Function 12 (off-delayed)
The switching capacity of electronic timing relays Function 16 (on and off delayed)
corresponds to the utilisation categories AC 15 Function 21(fleeting contact on energisation)
and DC 13. Function 22 (fleeting contact on
In terms of the actuating voltages there are with de-energisation)
timing relays the following differences : Function 42 (flashing, pulse initiating)
• Version A (DILET… and ETR4) Universal • Function 81 (pulse generating)
devices: Function 82 (pulse shaping)
DC 24 to 240 V ON, OFF
5 AC 24 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz • Multifunction relay ETR2-69
• Version W (DILET… and ETR4) Function 11 (on-delayed)
AC devices: Function 12 (off-delayed)
AC 346 to 440 V, 50/60 Hz Function 21 (fleeting contact on energisation)
• ETR2… (as row mounting device to Function 22 (fleeting contact on
DIN 43880) de-energisation)
Universal device: Function 42 (flashing, pulse initiating)
DC 24 to 48 V Function 43 (flashing, pause initiating)
AC 24 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz Function 82 (pulse forming)
• Star/delta timing relay ETR4-51
Function 51 (on delayed)
The functions of each of the timing relays are as
follows:
With both DILET70 and ETR4-70 an external
• DILET11, ETR4-11,ETR2-11
potentiometer can be connected. Upon
Function 11 (on-delayed)
connection, both timing relays automatically
• ETR2-12
recognize that a potentiometer is fitted.
Function 12 (off-delayed)
• ETR2-21 The ETR4-70 has a special feature. Equiped with
Function 21 (fleeting contact on energisation) two change-over contacts which can be converted
• ETR2-42 to two timing contacts 15-18 and 25-28 (A2-X1
Function 42 (flashing, pulse initiating) bridged) or one timing contact 15-18 and a
non-delayed contact 21-24 (A2-X1 not bridged). If
the link A2-X1 is removed, only the timed contact
15-18 carries out the functions described below.

Function 11 Function 16
On-delayed On- and Off-delayed
A1-A2
A1-A2 Y1-Y2
15-18 B1
t 15-18
t t (25-28)
The control voltage Us is applied via an actuating
contact to the terminals A1 and A2. The control voltage Us is applied directly to the
terminals A1 and A2. If the terminals Y1 and Y2 in
After the set delay time the change-over contact
the DILET70 are linked by a potential-free contact,
of the output relay goes to the position 15-18
or in the case of of the ETR4-69/70 a potential is
(25-28).
applied to B1, after a set time t the changeover
contact goes to the position 15-18 (25-28). 5
Function 12 If the connection Y1-Y2 is now interrupted, or B1
Off-delayed is separated from the potential, the changeover
contact goes back to it´s original position 15-16
A1-A2 (25-26) after the same time t.
Y1-Y2
B1
15-18 Function 21
t (25-28)
Fleeting contact on energization
After the control voltage has been applied to the A1-A2
terminals A1 and A2, the changeover contact of
the output relay remains in the original position 15-18
15-16 (25-26). If the terminals Y1 and Y2 in the t (25-28)
DILET70 are linked by a potential-free make
contact or, in the case of the ETR4-69/70 or After the voltage Us has been applied to A1 and
ETR2-69, a potential is applied to B1, the A2, the changeover contact of the output relay
changeover contact changes without delay to the goes to position 15-18 (25-28) and remains
position 15-18 (25-28). actuated for as long as the set fleeting contact
If the connection between the terminals Y1–Y2 is time.
now interrupted, or B1 is separated from the A fleeting pulse (terminals 15-18, 25-28) of
potential, once the set time has elapsed, the defined duration is therefore produced from a
changeover contact returns to it´s original position two-wire control process (voltage on A1/A2) by
15-16 (25-26). this function.

5-9
Function 82 Function 22
Pulse forming Fleeting contact on de-energization
A1-A2 A1-A2
Y1-Y2
B1 Y1-Y2
15-18 B1
t 15-18
(25-28) t (25-28)
After the control voltage has been applied to A1 The control voltage Us is applied directly to A1 and
and A2, the changeover contact of the output A2. If the terminals Y1 and Y2 of the DILET70, that
relay remains in the rest position 15-16 (25-26). If have been shorted (DILET-70 potential-free)
the terminals Y1 and Y2 in the DILET70 are linked before at a convienient time, are opened again (or
by a potential-free contact, or in the case of the for ETR4-69/70 or ETR2-69 the contact B1 again
5 ETR4-69/70 or ETR2-69, a potential is applied to potential-free) the contact 15-18 (25-28) closes
B1, the changeover contact changes without for the duration of the set time.
delay to the position 15-18 (25-28).
If Y1-Y2 is now opened again, or B1 is separated
Function 42
from the potential, the changeover contact
remains actuated until the set time has elapsed. If, Flashing, pulse initiated
instead, Y1-Y2 remain closed or B1 is separated A1-A2
from the potential for longer, the output relay
likewise changes back to its rest position after the 15-18
(25-28)
set time. An output pulse of precisely defined t t t t
duration is thus produced in the pulse-forming
function, irrespective of whether the input pulse After the voltage Us has been applied to A1 and
via Y1-Y2 or B1 is shorter or longer than the set A2, the changeover contact of the output relay
time. changes to position 15-18 (25-28) and remains
actuated for as long as the set flashing time. The
Function 81 subsequent pause duration corresponds to the
Pulse generating with fixed pulse flashing time.
A1-A2
15-18
t 0.5 s (25-28)
The actuating voltage is applied to the terminals

A1 and A2 via an actuating contact. After the set
delay time has elapsed the changeover contact of
the output relay goes to position 15-18 (25-28)
and returns to it´s original position 15-16 (25-26)
after 0.5 s. This function is therefore a fleeting
pulse with a time delay.
For
Function 43 Function 51 Star-delta
Flashing, pause initiated On-delayed
A1-A2 A1-A2
15-18 17-18
t t t t t 17-28
t tu
LED
When the control voltage Us is connected to A1

After the voltage Us has been applied to A1 and
and A2 the instantaneous contact goes to position
A2 the change-over contact of the output relay
17-18. After the set time duration the
stays in position 15-16 for the set flashing time
instantaneous contact opens and the timing
and after the duration of this time goes to position
contact 17-28 closes after a changeover time tu of
15-18 (the cycle begins with a pause phase).
50 ms. 5
Function 44
On-Off Function
Flashing, two speeds
A1-A2
A1-A2
15-18
A1-Y1
OFF ON OFF (25-28)
15-18
t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 LED
Rel LED The On-Off function allows the operation of a

A1-Y1 control system to be tested and is an aid, for
15-18
example, for commissioning. The Off function
t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 allows the output relay to be de-energized and it
no longer reacts to the functional sequence. The
Rel LED
On function energizes the output relay. This
function is dependent on the supply voltage being
After the voltage Us has been applied to A1 and
applied to the terminals A1/A2. The LED indicates
A2 the changeover contact of the output relay
the operational status.
goes to position 15-18 (pulse begin). By bridging
the contacts A1 and Y1 the relay can be switched
to pause begin. The times t1 and t2 can be set to
different times.

5-11
Control relay easy, Multi Function Display MFD-Titan®
Control relay easy
1
5
5 7
3
ES
C
DE
L
12
ALT
8
ES
OK
C
POWER
COM-ERR
ADR
4
9
POW
BUS
4
10
ERR
11
MS
4 NS
For
1 Basic unit easy512
2 Basic unit, expandable easy719, easy721
3 Basic unit, expandable easy819, easy820,
easy821, easy822
4 Multi Function Display MFD-Titan,
expandable
5 Expansion unit easy618, easy620
6 Expansion unit easy202
7 Coupling unit easy200 for remote expansion
of easy700, easy800 and MFD-Titan
8 Network module PROFIBUDS-DP;
EASY204-DP
9 Network module AS-Interface; EASY205-ASI
10 Network module CANopen; EASY221-CO
11 Network module DeviceNet; EASY222-DN 5
12 Data plug EASY-LINK-DS

5-13
1 2
5
4
6
4
5
DEL
ALT
ES
OK
C
For
1 Basic unit easy512
2 Basic unit, expandable easy719, easy721
3 Basic unit, expandable easy819, easy820,
easy821, easy822
4 Multi Function Display MFD-Titan
5 Power supply/communication module
MFD-CP4-800
6 Power supply/communication module
MFD-CP4-500

5-15
Programming instead of wiring
Circuit diagramms are the basis of all “Remote” Display – Text display for
electrotechnical applications. In practice electrical easy500, easy700, easy800 in IP65
devices are wired to each other. With the control
relay easy it is simply by pushbutton or with easy
to use easy-soft... by computer. Simple menu
operation in many languages simplify the input.
That saves time and therefore costs. easy and
MFD-Titan are the professionals for the world
market.
5 S1 K1 S4 S6
S5 Using Plug & Work the display MFD-80.. is

connected via the supply and communication
module MFD-CP4.. to the easy. The MFD-CP4..
K3 K3 has an integrated, 5 m long connection cable.
Advantage: No software or driver is necessary for
connection. The MFD-CP4.. offers real
K1 K2 K3 Plug & Work. The input and output wiring is
connected to the easy. The MFD-80.. is mounted
into two 22.5 mm mounting holes. The IP65
display is backgound illuminated and easily
readable. Individual labeling of the displays is
possible.
For
Control relay easy500 and easy700 MFD-Titan and easy800
easy500 and easy700 have the same functions. MFD…CP8… und easy800 have the same
easy700 offers more inputs and outputs, is functions. MFD-80.. with IP65 they can be used in 5
expandable and can be connected to a standard harsher environments. In addition for expansion
bus system. The series and parallel linking of and connection to standard bus systems 8
contacts and coils takes place in up to 128 current easy800 or MFD-Titan can be networked via
paths. Three contacts and and a coil in series. The easyNet. The series and parallel linking of contacts
display of 16 operating and report texts is via an and coils takes place in up to 256 current paths.
internal or external display. Four contacts and a coil in series. The display of
The main functions are: 32 operating and report texts is via an internal or
• Multi-function timing relay external display.
• Current impulse relay, Extra to the functions offered by easy700 the
• Counter easy800 and the MFD-Titan offers:
– forwards and backwards, • PID controller,
– Fast counter, • Arithmetic modules,
– Frequency counter, • Value scaling,
– Operational time counter, • and much more.
• Analog value comparator,
• Week and year time switch, Individual labeling of the MFD-80 is possible.
• Automatic summertime changeover,
• Remanent actual values of markers, numbers
and timing relays.

5-17
Power supply connection
for AC devices for DC devices

L +
N —
> 1A L.1 > 1A +.1
L N N +...V 0 0
Basic unit Basic units

EASY512-AB-… 24 V AC EASY512-DA-… 12 V DC
EASY719-AB- 24 V AC EASY719-DA-… 12 V DC
EASY512-AC-… 115/230 V AC EASY512-DC-… 24 V DC
EASY719-AC-… 115/230 V AC EASY719-DC-… 24 V DC
EASY811-AC-… 115/230 V AC ASY819-DC-… 24 V DC
EASY82.-DC-… 24 V DC
MFD-AC-CP8-… 115/230 V AC MFD-CP8-… 24 V DC
Expansion devices Expansion devices
EASY618-AC… 115/230 V AC EASY618-DC… 24 V DC
EASY620-DC… 24 V DC
For
Digital input connection of the AC devices
L.1
N
100 nF
/275 V h
100 nF
1N4007
/275 V h 1 kO
1 N 5
a b c d e f g h
a Input signal via relay contact e.g. DILER Note

b Input signal via pushbutton RMQ Titan • Due to the input circuitry the drop-out time of
c Input signal via position switch e.g. LS Titan the input is increased.
d Conductor length 40 to 100 m for input • Length of input conductor without addtional
without additional switching (e.g. easy700 I7, switching F40 m, with additional switching
I8 already has addition switching, possible F100 m.
conductor length 100 m)
e Increasing the input current
f Limiting the input current
g Increasing the input current with
EASY256-HCI
h EASY256-HCI

5-19
Digital input connection of the DC devices
+.1
–
p p
a b c d e
a Input signal via relay contact e.g. DILER Note
b Input signal via pushbutton RMQ Titan • With conductor length consider also the
c Input signal via position switch e.g. LS Titan volt-drop.
d Proximity switch, three wire • Due to the high residual currents don´t use two
e Proximity switch, four wire wire proximity switches.
For
Analogue inputs
Depending upon the device two or three 0 to 10 V • With short conductor lengths earth the screen
inputs are available. on both sides and fully. With a conductor length
The resolution is 10 Bit = 0 to 1023. of approx. 30 m the earthing on both sides can
Valid: lead to circulating currents between the
earthing points and interference of the
I7 = IA01 analogue signals. In this case only earth the
EASY512-AB/DA/DC… conductor on one side.
I8 = IA02
• Don´t lay the signal conductor parallel to the
EASY719/721-AB/DA/DC… power conductor.
EASY819/820/821/822-DC… • Inductive loads that must be switched by easy
I11 = IA03 MFD-R16, MFD-R17, should be connected to a seperate power
MFD-T16, MFD-TA17 supply or a suppressor circuit should be used for
I12 = IA04 motors and valves. Supplying loads such as
motors, magnetic valves or contactors and easy
5
Caution! from the same power supply can by switching
Analogue signals are more sensitive to lead to interference of the anologue input
interferance than digital signals, therefore the signal.
signal cables should be carefully routed and
connected. Inappropriate connections can lead to
unwanted switching conditions.
• Use screened, twisted pair conductors, to stop
interference of the analogue signals.

5-21
Connection of power supply and analogue inputs for easy..AB device
L
N
~
+12 V
0V
5 F1 L01h
N01 h
L N N I1 I7 I8
Note
easy..AB devices that process analogue signals Be sure the common reference potential is earthed
must be supplied via a transformer so that there is or monitored by an earth-fault monitoring device.
a galvanic seperation from the mains supply. The Pay attention to the applicable reglations.
neutral conductor and the reference potential of
DC supplied analogue sensors must be
galvanically connected.
For
Analogue input connections to easy…DA/DC-… or MFD-R…/T…
+
–
+.1
a
4...20 mA
(0...20 mA)
+..V
h -0 V
Out
0...10 V -35...55 ˚C 500 O
5
0V -12 V
+...V 0V 0V
a b c d
a Setpoint device via separate power supply and • Connect the 0 V of the or the MFD-Titan with
potentiometer F1 kO, e.g. 1 kO, 0.25 W the 0 V of the power supply of the analogue
b Setpoint device with upstream resistance encoder.
1.3 kO, 0.25 W, potentiometer 1 kO, 0.25 W • sensor of 4(0) to 20 mA and a resistance of
(value for 24 V DC) 500 O give the following approx. values:
c Temperature monitoring via temperature – 4 mA Q 1.9 V,
sensor and transducer – 10 mA Q 4.8 V,
d Sensor 4 to 20 mA mit resistor 500 O – 20 mA Q 9.5 V.
Note • Analogue input 0 to 10 V, Resolution 10 Bit,
• Pay attention to the differing number and 0 to 1023.
designation of the analogue inputs of each
device type.

5-23
Connection “fast counter”, “frequency generator”and “incremental encoder” for
easy…DA/DC devices or MFD-R…/-T…
+ +
– –
+.1 +.1
p
5
A B
a b c
a Fast counter, square wave signal via proximity c Square wave signal via incremental encoder
switch, pulse pause relationship should be 1:1 24 V DC
easy500/700 max. 1 kHz easy800DC… and MFD-R/T… max. 3 kHz
easy800 max. 5 kHz Note
MFD-R/T… max. 3 kHz Pay attention to the different number and
b Square wave signal via frequency generator, designation of the inputs of the “fast counter”,
pulse pause relationship should be 1:1 “frequency generator” and “incremental
easy500/700 max. 1 kHz encoder” for each device type.
easy800 max. 5 kHz
MFD-R/T… max. 3 kHz
For
Connection of relay outputs for easy and MFD-Titan
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
5
L..
L..
L..
L..
L..
a b c d e
Protection operating potential L.. a Lamp, max. 1000 W at 230/240 V AC

b Fluorescent tube, max. 10 x 28 W with
electronic starter, 1 x 58 W with
conventional starter at 230/240 V AC
c AC motor
d Valve
e Coil
F 8 A/B16
Possible AC voltage range:
24 to 250 V, 50/60 Hz
z. B. L1, L2, L3 phase against neutral
Possible DC voltage range:
12 to 300 V DC

5-25
Connection from transistor outputs for easy and MFD-Titan
+ 24 V 0V
5 f 2.5 A
F 10.0 A
24 V DC
a b c d
a Contactor coil with zener diode as Note

suppressor, 0.5 A bei 24 V DC When switching off inductive loads the following
should be considered:
b Valve with diode as suppressor, Suppressed inductances cause less interference in
0.5 A at 24 V DC
the total electrical system. It is generally
c Resistor, recommended to connect the suppressor as close
0.5 A at 24 V DC as possible to the inductance.
When the inductances are not suppressed, then :
d Indicator lamp 3 or 5 W at 24 V DC, several inductances must not be switched off at
Output dependant upon device the same time, so that in the worst case the driver
types and outputs block does not overheat. Should, in an emergency
stop situation the +24 V DC supply be switched
off by another contact and thereby more than one
controlled output be switched off, the inductances
must have a suppressor.
For
Parallel switching Note
The outputs may only be switched parallel within
a group (Q1 to Q4 or Q5 to Q8, S1 to S4 or S5 to
S8) ; e.g. Q1 and Q3 or Q5, Q7 and Q8. Parallel
switched outputs must be similtaneously
energised.
when 4 outputs in parallel,
max. 2 A at 24 V DC
when 4 outputs in parallel,

max. 2 A at 24 V DC
Inductance without suppression
max. 16 mH
12 or 20 W at 24 V DC
Output dependant upon device types
5
and outputs
0V
a
a Resistor

5-27
Connection of analogue outputs for EASY820-DC-RC…, EASY822-DC-TC…, MFD-RA… and
MFD-TA…
+
ñ
+.1
0V IA
+...V 0V 0V 0V Q A1 0V Q A1
a b
a Servo valve control
b Set value sekection for drive control
Note
• Analogue signals are more sensitive to
interferance than digital signals, therefore the
signal conductors should be carefully routed.
Inappropriate connections can lead to
unwanted switching conditions.
• Analogue output 0 to 10 V, Resolution 10 Bit,
0-1023.
For
Expansion of the input and output points for easy and MFD-Titan
To expand the input and output points there are Networking via EASY-Net, up to 320 I/O
various solutions : When expanding the inputs and outputs via
Central expansion, to 40 I/O EASY-Net eight easy800 or MFD-Titan can be
easy700, easy800 and MFD-Titan can be connected to each other. Every easy800 or
expanded via easy202, easy618 or easy620. Here MFD-Titan can be extended with an expansion
there are a maximum of 24 inputs and 16 outputs device. 1000 m Network length is possible. There
available. An expansion of the basic device is are two types of operation:
possible. • One master (position 1, device address 1) plus
up to 7 further devices. The programme is in the
Decentral expansion, to 40 I/O master.
easy700, easy800 and MFD-Titan can be • One master (position 1, device address 1) plus
expanded via the coupling module easy200-EASY up to 7 further “intelligent” or
with easy618 or easy620. The expansion device “non-intellegent” devices. Every “intelligent”
can be operated up to 30 m from the basic device. device has a programme.
5
There are a maximum of 24 inputs and 16 outputs
available. An expansion of the basic device is
possible.

5-29
Central and decentral expansion for the basic devices easy700, easy800 and MFD-Titan
1 2
I 1 - I... R 1 - R... central expansion
Q 1 - Q... S 1 - S...
easy700... easy618...
easy800... easy620...
easy202...
decentral expansion
5 I 1 - I...
1 2 E+ E-
R 1 - R...
F 30 m
Q 1 - Q... S 1 - S...
E+ E-
easy700... easy618...
easy800... easy200... easy620...
R 1 - R... central expansion
MFD
S 1 - S...
MFD-AC-CP8... easy618...
MFD-CP8... easy620...
easy202...
E+ E-
decentral expansion
R 1 - R...
F 30 m
MFD
S 1 - S...
E+ E-
MFD-AC-CP8... easy618...
MFD-CP8... easy200... easy620...
EASY-LINK-DS
For
EASY-NET, Network connection “through the device”
EASY-NET-R EASY-NET Geographic Device

(124 O location, Example 1 Example 2
PIN 1 + 2) position1)
1 1 1
easy800
2 2 3 5
easy800 easy618
easy620
3 3 8
MFD-AC-CP8 easy618
MFD-CP8 easy200 easy620
8 8 2
easy800... easy202
EASY-LINK-DS 1) The geographic location/place 1 always has the

device address 1.
• Addressing the devices: • The max. total length with EASY-NET is 1000 m.
– Automatic addressing of device 1 or via • Should EASY-NET be interrupted or a device is not
EASY-SOFT… by PC, geographic location = operational, the network isn´t active past the
device, interrupted point.
– Single addressing on the corresponding device or • 4 core cable unscreened, each two cores twisted.
via EASY-SOFT… on each device, geographic Characteristic impedance of the cable must be
location and device can be different. 120 O.

5-31
EASY-NET, Network connection “T piece with spur cable”
EASY-NET-R EASY-NET Geographic Device

(124 O location, Example 1 Example 2
PIN 1 + 2) position1)
1 1 1
easy800 F 0.3 m
5 2 2 3
easy800 easy618
easy620
F 0.3 m
3 3 8
MFD-AC-CP8 easy618
MFD-CP8 easy200 easy620
F 0.3 m
8 8 2
easy800... easy202
1) The geographic location/place 1 always has the

EASY-LINK-DS device address 1.
• Addressing the devices: • Should EASY-NET be interrupted between the T

– Single addressing on corresponding device or via piece and the device, or a device is not operational,
EASY-SOFT… on every device. the network is still active to any further device.
• The max. total length, including spur cables, with • 4 core cable unscreened, each two cores twisted.
EASY-NET is 1000 m. Three cores are required.
• The max. length of T pieces to easy800 or to Characteristic impedance of the cable must be
MFD-Titan is 0,30 m. 120 O.
For
Network connection
Sockets RJ 45 and plug Configuration of the network cable for
Connection layout of socket RJ 45 on easy and EASY-NET
MFD-Titan. The network cable does not need to be screened.
The characteristic impedance of the cable must be
1 120 O.
2
A 1 ECAN_H
3
A 2 ECAN_L
4 B 3 GND (Ground)
5 B 4 SEL_IN
6
7
8
Note 5
The minimal operation with easy-NET functions
with the conductors ECAN_H, ECAN_L, GND. The
Connection layout of plug RJ45 on easy and
SEL_IN conductor is solely for automatic
MFD-Titan.
addressing.
1 Bus terminal resistor
2 A bus terminal resistor must be connected to the
geographical first and last device in the network:
3
• Value of the bus terminal resistor 124 O,
4 • Connect to PIN 1 and PIN 2 of the RJ-45 plug,
5 a • Connection plug : EASY-NT-R.
6
7 Pre-finished conductors, RJ45 plug on both
8 ends
Conductor length Part reference
a Cable entry side [cm]
8 pole RJ 45, EASY-NT-RJ 45
Layout with EASY-NET 30 EASY-NT-30
PIN 1; ECAN_H; Data conductor; conductor pair A
PIN 2; ECAN_L; Data conductor; conductor pair A 80 EASY-NT-80
PIN 3; GND; ground conductor; conductor pair B
PIN 4; SEL_IN; Select conductor; conductor pair B 150 EASY-NT-150

5-33
Freely useable conductors Calculation of conductor length when the
100 m 4 x 0.14 mm2; twisted in pairs: cross section is known
EASY-NT-CAB For a known conductor cross section the
RJ-45 plug: maximum conductor length is calculated.
EASY-NT-RJ 45 lmax = Length of conductor in m
Crimping tool for RJ-45 plug: EASY-RJ45-TOOL. S = Conductor cross section in mm2
rcu = specific resistance of copper, when
Calculation of cross section when conductor
nothing else given 0,018 Omm2/m
length is known
The minimum cross section is calculated for the
know maximum use of the network. S x 12.4
l = Length of conductor in m lmax =
Smin = minimum cross section in mm2 rcu
rcu = specific resistance of copper, when
5 nothing else given 0,018 Omm2/m
l x rcu
Smin =
12.4
Note
When the result of the calculation doesn´t give a
normal cross section use the next highest normal
cross section.
For
Permissible network length for EASY-NET
Conductor Transmission Conductor cross section, Bus conductor,
length speed standardised minimum conductor
EASY-NET total cross section
EN AWG
m kBaud mm2 mm2
F6 F1000 0.14 26 0.10

F 25 F 500 0.14 26 0.10
F 40 F 250 0.14 26 0.10
F 125 F 1251) 0.25 24 0.18
F 175 F 50 0.25 23 0.25 5
F 250 F 50 0.38 21 0.36
F 300 F 50 0.50 20 0.44
F 400 F 20 0.75 19 0.58
F 600 F 20 1.0 17 0.87
F 700 F 20 1.5 17 1.02
F 1 000 = 10 1.5 15 1.45
1) Default setting
Note
The chacteristic impedance of the conductor
must be 120 O!

5-35
Network connection with conductor cross Network connection with T piece and spur
section > 0.14 mm2, AWG26 cable
Network connect “through the device”. Network connection “T piece with spur cable”
Example A, with terminals Example A, with terminals
1 1
2
IN
3 2
4 IN
3
1
a 2
3 c 4
5 RJ 45 RJ 45 4 RJ 45
OUT
OUT
easy800
easy800
MFD-Titan
MFD-Titan
a Recommendation F 0.3 m
c F 0.3 m (3 core)
Example B, with interface element

Example B, with interface element
IN
8 6 4 2
7 5 3 1
IN
8 6 4 2
7 5 3 1
RJ 45
RJ45
b
8 6 4 2
7 5 3 1
OUT
RJ 45 RJ 45
RJ 45 d
RJ 45
OUT
easy800
MFD-Titan easy800
MFD-Titan
b Recommendation F 0.3 m (EASY-NT-30) d F 0.3 m (EASY-NT-30)
For
Remote display in IP65
+ L.1 L L.1
– N
> 1A > 1A
+ 24 V 0V L N
115/230 V
50/60 Hz
MFD-80...
MFD-...CP4... MFD-...CP4...
MFD-CP4-500-CAB5
MFD-CP4-500-CAB5
F5m
F5m
easy500 easy800
easy700 easy800...x
easy500...x
easy700...x
On the “remote display” MFD-80… the easy No extra software or programming is necessary to
indication display is shown. operate the “remote display”.
The easy can also be operated with the MFD-80-B. The connection cable MFD-CP4-…-CAB5 can be
shortened.

5-37
COM-LINK connection
MFD-80… MFD-…-CP8… + MFD..T../R.. easy800 MFD…CP8… + MFD..T../R..
POW-Side
5
The COM-LINK is a point to point connection serial The remote device can be a easy800 or a
interface. Via this interface the status of the inputs MFD…CP8… and answers to the requests of the
and outputs are read as well as marker areas read active devices. The remote device dosen´t
and written. Twenty marker double words read or recognise the difference if the COM-LINK is active
written are possible. Read and written are freely or a PC with EASY-SOFT-PRO uses the interface.
selectable. This data can be used for the set values The devices of the COM-LINK can be centralised or
or display functions. decentralised extended with easy expansion
The devices of the COM-LINK have different devices.
functions. The active device is always a The remote device can also be a device in the
MFD…CP8… and controls the complete EASY-NET.
interface.
For
Field bus connection to the production process
easy204-DP easy221-C0 easy222-DN easy205-ASI 5
easy700, easy800
MFD…CP8…
network module can be connected with easy700, Further information can be found in the associated
easy800 or MFD-Titan. The network module is manuals:
intergrated as slave in the configuration. • AWB2528-1508
Expansion of the input and output points via easy500, easy700, control relay,
EASY-NET is possible (a section “EASY-NET, • AWB 2528-1423
Network connection “through the device””, easy800, control relay,
page 5-31 and a section “EASY-NET, Network • AWB2528-1480D
connection “T piece with spur cable””, MFD-Titan, Multi Function Display.
page 5-32).

5-39
Contacts, coils, function modules, operand
Operand Description easy500, easy700 easy800, MFD…CP8…
I Input basic device x x

R Input expansion device 1) x x
Q Output basic device x x
S Output expansion device x x
ID Diagnosis annuciator easy-NET – x
M Marker x x
N Marker x –
5 P P button x x
: : x x
RN Bit input easy-NET – x
SN Bit output easy-NET – x
A Analogue value comparitor x x
AR Arithmetic – x
BC Block comparison – x
BT Block transfer – x
BV Boolean function – x
C Counting relay x x
CF Frequency counters x2) x
CH High speed counter x2) x
CI Incremental value counter – x
CP Comparitor – x
DB Data module – x
D Text output x x
DC PID controller, – x
FT PT1 Signal smoothing filter – x
GT Draw value out of the easy-NET – x
Ö H/HW (clock)/Week time clock x x
Y/HY Summer/winter changeover clock x x
LS Value scaling – x
Z/MR Master reset x x
For
Operand Description easy500, easy700 easy800, MFD…CP8…
NC Number transducer – x
O/OT Hours run counter x x
PT Place value in the easy-NET – x
PW Pulse width modulation – x
SC Sychronise clock via network – x
ST Reference cycle time – x
T Time-delay relay x x
VC Value limiting – x
MB Marker byte – x
5
MD Marker double word – x
MW Marker word – x
I; IA Analogue input x x
QA Analogue output – x
1) With easy700, easy800 and MFD…CP8…
2) With easy500 and easy700 programmable as operation type.
Coil functions
The switching behaviour of the relay coil is Not used outputs Q and S can also be used as
determined by the selected coil function. The markers like M and N.
specified function should for each relay coil only
be used once in the wiring diagram.
Circuit diagram symbol easy display Coil function Example
Ä Contactor function ÄQ1, ÄD2,

ÄS4, Ä:1,
ÄM7
Å Contactor function with ÅQ1, ÅD2,

inverse result ÅS4
è Cyclical impulse at èQ3, èM4,

negative edge èD8, èS7

5-41
Circuit diagram symbol easy display Coil function Example
È Cyclical impulse at ÈQ4, ÈM5,

positive edge ÈD7, ÈS3
ä Surge function äQ3, äM4,

äD8, äS7
S Latch (set) SQ8, SM2,

5 SD3, SS4
R Reset (reset) RQ4, RM5,

RD7, RS3
Parameter sets for times

Example based on EASY-512… T1 Relay No.
Depending up on the programme the following I1 Time 1
parameters can be set: I2 Time 2
• Switching function, # Switch state output:
• Time range, # Normally open contact open,
• Parameter display, â Normally open contact closed
ü Switching function
• Time 1 and
• Time 2.
S Time range
+ Parameter display
T1 ü S + 30.000 constant as value, e. g. 30 s
i1 30.000
I7 Variable, e. g. Analoge value I7
T:00.000 clock time
i2 i7
# T:00.000
For
Possible coil functions:
• Trigger = TT..
• Reset = RT..
• Halt = HT..
Parameter Switching function
X Switching with On-delay
?X Switching with On-delay and random time range
â Switching with Off-delay
?â Switching with Off-delay and random time range

5
Xâ Switching with On-delay and Off-delay
?Xâ Switching with On-delay and Off-delay with random time
ü Switching with single pulse
Ü Switching with flashing
Parameter Time range and set time Resolution
S 00.000 Seconds: 0.000 to 99,999 s easy500, easy700 10 ms

easy800, MFD…CP8… 5 ms
M:S Minutes: Seconds 00:00 to 99:59 1s

00:00
H:M Hours: Minutes, 00:00 to 99:59 1 min.

00:00
Parameter set Displaying the parameter set via menu item “Parameter”
+ Can be accessed
- Cannot be accessed

5-43
Basic circuits
The easy circuit configuration is input in ladder Permanent contact
diagram. This section includes a few circuit
examples which are intended to demonstrate the To keep a relay coil
---------ÄQ1
possibilities for your own circuit diagrams. permanently
energised wire the
The values in the logic table have the following
connection
meanings for switching contacts:
completely across
0 = Normally open contact open, normally all contact areas
closed contact closed from the coil to the
1 = Normally open contact closed, normally left hand side.
closed contact open
For relay coils Qx” Logic table
0 = Coil not energized --- Q1
5 1 = Coil energized
Note 1 1
The examples are shown as for easy500 and
easy700. For easy800 and MFD…CP8… four
contacts and one coils can be used in each path.
Negation
Negation means that the contact opens, rather
than closes when actuated (NOT circuit).
In easy circuit
i1-------ÄQ1
example contact I1
changes with the
ALT button
normally closed and
normally open
contacts.
Logic table
I1 Q1
1 0
0 1
For
Series circuit Parallel switching
Q1” is actuated Q1 is controlled via
I1-I2-I3-ÄQ1 I1u------ÄQ1
via three normally a parallel circuit of
open contacts several normally
connected in series i1-i2-i3-ÄQ2 open contacts (OR I2s
(AND circuit). circuit).
Q2” is actuated A parallel circuit of I3k
via three normally normally closed
closed contacts contacts controls
connected in series Q2 (NOR circuit). i1u------ÄQ2
i2s
(NAND circuit).
In the easy circuit configuration, up to three
normally open or normally closed contacts can be i3k
connected in series in one line. Where more than 5
three normally open contacts have to be wired in
series, use an auxiliary relay M. Logic table
Logic table I1 I2 I3 Q1 Q2
I1 I2 I3 Q1 Q2
0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 0

5-45
Changeover circuit Logic table
A changeover I1 I2 Contact Coil Q1
I1-i2u---ÄQ1
circuit is realised in Q1
easy with two series
circuits that are i1-I2k 0 0 0 0
then combined in
parallel (XOR). 1 0 0 0
XOR means 0 1 0 0
eXclusive OR
circuit. Only when a contact is closed, is the coil 1 1 0 1
energized.
1 0 1 0
Logic table
0 1 1 1
I1 I2 Q1
5 1 1 1 1
0 0 0
The hold-on (self-maintaining) circuit is used to
1 0 1 switch machines on and off. The machine is
0 1 1 switched on at the input terminals via normally
open contact S1 and is switched off via normally
1 1 0 closed contact S2.
S2 opens the connection to the control voltage in
order to switch off the machine. This ensures that
Hold-on circuit the machine can be switched off even in the event
A combination of S1 normally open contact of a wire breaking. I2 is always closed when not
series and parallel on I1 actuated.
contacts are wired S2 normally closed Alternatively a S1 normally open contact
to a hold-on circuit. contact on I2 hold-on circuit with on I1
The hold-on wire break S2 normally closed contact
I1uI2----ÄQ1
(self-maintaining) monitoring can on I2
function is achieved used with the set
by the Q1 contact Q1k and reset coil I1-------SQ1
being connected in functions.
parallel to I1. When i2-------RQ1
I1 is actuated and
reopened, the
current flows via contact Q1 until I2 is actuated.
For
When I1 is switched, coil Q1 latches. I2 inverts the On-delayed timing relay
normally closed signal from S2 and switches when The on-delay can be S1 normally open contact
S2 is actuated and the machine must be switched used to override a on I1
off or when there is a broken wire. short impulse or
I1-------TT1
Keep to the order that each coil is wired in the with a machine, to
easy circuit diagram: first wire the “S”-coil, and start a further
then the“R”-coil. When I2 is actuated, the operation after a T1-------ÄM1
machine will then be switched off even if I1 is time delay.
switched on again.
Impulse changeover relay

An impulse S1 normally open contact
changeover relay is on I1
often used for 5
I1-------äQ1
lighting control e.g.
stairway lighting.
Logic table
I1 Status of Q1 Q1
0 0 0
1 0 1
0 1 1
1 1 0

5-47
Wiring of contacts and relays
Fixed wiring Wired with easy
t t
S1 S1 S2
K1
K1
S2
K1 P1
P1
Star-delta starting
With easy it is possible to implement two star and delta contactors, and also the time delay
star/delta circuits. The advantage of easy is that it between switching off the star contactor and
is possible to select the changeover time between switching on the delta contactor.
.
S1
S2 Q11
Q12 Q11 K1
Q13 Q12
K1 Q11 Q12 Q13

N
For
L
N
S1
S2 Q11
K1
L N I1
Q1 Q2
1 2 1 2
Q11 Q12 Q13

N
Operation of the easy circuit configuration

Start/stop the circuit T1: Changeover time star/delta (10 to 30 s)
with the external I1u------TT1 T2: Waiting time between starcontactor off and
pushbuttons S1and delta contactor on (30, 40, 50, 60 ms)
S2. The mains dt1----ÄQ1 If your easy has an integral time switch, star/delta
dT1----TT2
protection starts the starting can be combined with the time switch. In
time relay in easy. this case, use easy to also switch the mains
I1: Mains hT2----ÄQ2 contactor.
protection
switched on
Q1: Star contactor ON
Q2: Delta contactor ON

5-49
Stairway lighting
For a conventional circuit a minimum of five easy needs only four elements. With five
elements are required. An impulse relay, two connections and the easy circuit the stairway
timing relays, two auxiliary relays. lighting is operational.
S1
S2
E1
E2
S3
E3
5
L
N
K3 K1 Q12 Q12
Q11
K3 K2
K1 K2 K3 Q11 Q12
5s 6 min
Important note
Four such stairway circuits can be implemented
with one easy device.
For
S1
S2
E1
E2
S3
E3
L
N
K1
5
L N I1
Q1
1 2
Button pressed briefly Light On or Off, the impulse changeover relay function is able
to switch off continuous lighting where required.
Light Off after 6 min. Switched off automatically. With continuous lighting this
function is not active.
Button pressed for longer than 5 s Continuous lighting

5-51
The easy circuit configuration for the function Meaning of the contacts and relays used:
below looks like this: I1: Pushbutton ON/OFF
Q1: Output relay for lighting ON/OFF
I1-------TT2
M1:Auxiliary relay used to block the “switch off
automatically after 6 minutes” when using
T2-------SM1 continuous lighting.
T1: Cyclical impulse for switching Q1 ON/OFF, (ü,
I1u------äQ1 impulse with value 00.00 s)
T3k
T2: Scan to determine how long the pushbutton
was pressed. When pressed for longer than
Q1-m1----TT3 5 s, it changes to continuous lighting. ( X,
q1-------RM1
On-delayed, value 5 s)
T3: Switch off after the light has been on for von
6 min. ( X, on-delayed, value 6:00 min.)
5 T4: Switch off after 4 hours continuously on. ( X,
Expanded easy circuit configuration: after four On-delayed, value 4:00 h)
hours, the continuous lighting is switched off.
I1------uTT1
hTT2
T2-------SM1
T1u------äQ1
T3s
T4k
Q1um1----TT3
h------TT4
q1-------RM1
For
4 way shift register
A shift register can be used for storing an item of Function:
information – e.g. sorting of items into “good” or Pulse Value Storage position
“bad” – two, three or four transport steps further
on. 1 2 3 4
A shift pulse and the value (0” or 1”) to be shifted
are required for the shift register. 1 1 1 0 0 0
Values which are no longer required are deleted
via the reset input of the shift register. The values 2 0 0 1 0 0
in the shift register pass through the register in the 3 0 0 0 1 0
following order:
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th storage position. 4 1 1 0 0 1
Block diagram of the 4-way shift register 5 0 0 1 0 0
5
a b c Reset = 1 0 0 0 0
d
Allocate the value 0 with the information content
bad. Should the shift register be accidently
1 2 3 4 deleted, no bad parts will be reused.
I1: Shift clock pulse (PULSE)
I2: Information (good/bad) for shifting (VALUE)
a Pulse I3: Delete contents of shift register (RESET)
b Value M1:1. memory position
c Reset M1:2. memory position
d Storage position M1:3. memory position
M1:4. memory position
M7:Auxiliary relay one shot cycle pulse
M8:One shot cycle pulse clock pulse

5-53
I1um7----ÄM8 Generate shift tact

h------ÄM7
M8uM3----SM4 4th memory position, set
dm3----RM4 4th memory position, delete
dM2----SM3
3rd memory position, set
dm2----RM3
3rd memory position, delete
dM1----SM2
2nd memory position, set
dm1----RM2
2nd memory position, delete
1st memory position, set
dI2----SM1 1st memory position, delete
5 hi2----RM1 Delete all memory positions
I3------uRM1
dRM2
dRM3
hRM4
For
Display text and actual values , display and edit set values
easy500 and easy700 can display 16, easy800 can
SWITCHING;
display 32 freely editable texts. In these texts
actual values of function relays such as, timer
relays, counters, hours run counters, anolog value CONTROL;
DISPLAY;
comparitors, dates, times or analog values can be
displayed. Set values of timer relays, counters,
hours run counters and analog value comparitors ALL EASY!
can be altered during the display of the texts.
Example of a text display:
The text display has the following display
characteristics:
RUN TIME M:S

Line 1, 12 characters
T1 :012:46 Line 2, 12 characters, one actual value or set value
C1 :0355 ST Line 3, 12 characters, one actual value or set value
PRODUCED Line 4, 12 characters
The text output unit D (D = Display,) functions in D2 to D16/D32 are displayed when activated.
the circuit diagram like a normal marker M. When several displays are activated they are
Should a text be attached to a marker this would shown one after the other every 4 secs. When a
be shown at condition 1 of the coil in the easy set value is edited the corresponding display
display. A precondition is that the easy is in RUN remains shown until the value transfer.
mode and before the texts are displayed the status In one text several values, actual and set values,
display is shown. from for example, function relays, analog input
D1 is defined as alarm text and has therefore values or times and dates can be combined. The
priority over other displays. set values can be edited:
• easy500 and easy700, two values,
• easy800, four values.

5-55
Visualisation with MFD Titan
The visualisation with MFD-Titan is by “screens”, • Pushbutton elements
on which the display is shown. – Latching pushbuttons
Example of a “screen”: – Pushbutton area
• Text elements
– Static text
– Message text
S1 S2 – Screen menu
S3 – Ticker text
– Rolling text
• Value display elements
– Date and time displays
M
3h – Number values
– Timer relay value display
5 • Value input elements
The following screen elements can be combined. – Value inputs
• Graphic elements – Timer relay value inputs
– Bit display – Date and time inputs
– Bitmap – Weekly timer inputs
– Bargraph – Yearly timer inputs
For
Notes

5-57
Contactors DIL, Motor overload relays Z
Rated Max. AC-3 motor rating Conv. Part no.

opera- therm.
tional 220 V, 380 V 660 V, 1000 V current
current Ie 230 V ,400 V 690 V Ith = Ie
at 400 V AC-1
A kW KW kW kW A
6.6 1.5 3 3 – 22 DILEEM
8.8 2.2 4 4 – 22 DILEM
7 2.2 3 3.5 – 22 DILM7
9 2.5 4 4.5 – 22 DILM9
12 3.5 5.5 6.5 – 22 DILM12
5
17 5 7.5 11 – 40 DILM17
25 7.5 11 14 – 45 DILM25
32 10 15 17 – 45 DILM32
40 12.5 18.5 23 – 60 DILM40
50 15.5 22 30 – 70 DILM50
65 20 30 35 – 85 DILM65
80 25 37 63 – 130 DILM80
95 30 45 75 – 130 DILM95
115 37 55 105 – 190 DILM115
150 48 75 125 – 190 DILM150
185 55 90 175 108 275 DILM185
225 70 110 215 108 315 DILM225
250 75 132 240 108 350 DILM250
300 90 160 286 132 400 DILM300
400 125 200 344 132 500 DILM400
500 155 250 344 132 700 DILM500
580 185 315 560 600 800 DILM580
650 205 355 630 600 850 DILM650
750 240 400 720 800 900 DILM750
820 260 450 750 800 1000 DILM820
1000 315 560 1000 1000 1000 DILM1000
For
Contactors DIL, Motor overload relays Z
Auxiliary contact blocks

Part no. For top For side mounting Motor Electronic
mounting overload motor
relay protection
system ZEV
DILEEM 02DILEM – ZE-0,16 to

11DILEM ZE-9
DILEM 22DILEM
DILM7 DILA-XHI(V) – ZB12-0,16 to
… ZB12-12
DILM9 DILM32-XHI
…
DILM12 ZB32-0,16 to
ZB32-32
5
DILM17
DILM25
DILM32
DILM40 DILM150XHI( DILM1000-XHI(V) ZB65-10 to ZEV
V)… … ZB65-65 +
DILM50 ZEV-XSW-25
DILM65 ZEV-XSW-65
ZEV-XSW-145
DILM80 ZB150-35 to ZEV-XSW-820
ZB150-150
DILM95
DILM115
DILM150
DILM185 – DILM1000-XHI… Z5-70/FF250
to
DILM225 Z5-250/FF250
DILM250
DILM300 ZW7-63 to
ZW7-630
DILM400
DILM500
DILM580
DILM650
DILM750 –
DILM820
DILM1000

5-59
Contactors DIL
Accessories
Unit DILE(E)M DIL7 to DILM150 DILM185 DILM580 to

to DILM1000
AC DC DILM500
Suppressor circuits – – integrated integrated integrated

RC suppressors X X
Varistor suppressors X X
Star-point bridge X X X X –
Parallel connector X X X to –
5 DILM185
Mechanical inter- X X X X X
lock
Sealable shroud X – – – –
Cable terminals – – – X to DILM820
Individual coils – X1) X1) X X
Electronic modules – – – X X
Electronic modules – – – X X
including coils
Terminal cover – – – X X
1) from DILM17
For
Contactors DIL
Contactors DILM
These are designed and tested to IEC/EN 60 947. sections and have protection against incorrect
For every motor rating between 3 kW and insertion to ensure safe connection.
560 kW there is a suitable contactor available. • Integrated auxiliary contact
The contactors up to DILM32 have an
Equipment features integrated auxiliary contact as normally open or
normally closed contact.
• Magnet system • Screw or spring terminals
Due to the new electronic operation the DC The contactors DILE(E)M and DILA/DILM12,
contactors from 17 to 65 A have a sealing including the corresponding auxiliary contacts,
power of only 0.5 W. Even for 150 A is only up to 1000 A, are available with screw or spring
1.5 W necessary. terminals.
• Accessible control voltage connections • Contactors with screwless terminals
The coil connections are on the front of the They have spring terminals in the mains current
contactor. They are not covered by the main circuit as well as for the coil terminals and
5
current wiring. auxiliary contacts. The shake proof and
• Can be controlled directly from the PLC maintenance free spring terminals can
The contactors DILA and DILM to 32 A can be terminate two conductors each of 0.75 to
controlled directly from the PLC. 2.5 mm2 with or without ferrules.
• Intergrated suppressor DC • Connection terminals
With all DC contactors DILM a suppressor is Up to DILM65 the connection terminals for all
integrated in the electronics. auxiliary contacts and coils as well as for main
• Plug-in suppressors AC conductors can be tightened with a Pozidriv
With all AC contactors DILM up to 150 A a screwdriver size 2.
suppressor can be simply plugged in on the For contactors DILM80 to DILM150 Allen
front when required. screws are used.
• Control of the contactors DILM185 to • Mounting
DILM1000 by three different methods: All contactors can be fitted on to a mounting
– Conventionally via coil terminals A1-A2 plate with fixing screws. DILE(E)M and DILM up
– Directly from a PLC via terminals A3-A4 to 65 A can also be snapped on to a 35 mm
– by a low power contact via terminals top-hat rail to IEC/EN 60715.
A10-A11. • Mechanical interlock
• Conventional control of contactors DILM185-S With two connectors and a mechanical interlock
to DILM500-S via coil terminals A1-A2. an interlocked contactor combination up to
There are two coil versions (110 to 120 V 150 A can be achieved without extra space
50/60 Hz and 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz) available. requirement. The mechanical interlock ensures
• All contactors up to DIL150 are finger and that both connected contactors cannot be
back-of-hand proof to IEC 536. Additional similtaneously be operated. Even with a
terminal covers are available from DILM185 mechanical shock the contacts of both
onwards. contactors cannot close similtaneously.
• Double-frame terminal for contactors DILM7 to
DILM150
With the new double frame-clamp the
connection area is not limited by the screw.
They give total security with varying cross

5-61
Contactors DIL
In addition to individual contactors, complete Physical motor design results in that rated currents
contactor combinations are also available from for the same rating sometimes differ widely.
Moeller: Furthermore it determines the ratio of the
• DIUL reversing contactors from 3 to transient peak current and the locked-rotor
75 kW/400 V current to the rated operational current (Ie).
• SDAINL star-delta starters from 5.5 to 132 Switching electrical heating installations, lighting
kW/400 V fittings, transformers and power factor correction
installations, with their typical individual
Application characteristics, increases the wide range of
different uses for contactors.
The three-phase motor dominates the electric
The switching frequency can vary greatly in every
motor sector. Apart from individual low-power
application. The difference can be, for example,
drives, which are often switched directly by hand,
from less than one operation per day up to a
most motors are controlled using contactors and
thousand operations or more per hour. Quite
5 contactor combinations. The power rating in
often, in the case of motors, a high switching
kilowatts (kW) or the current rating in amperes (A)
frequency coincides with inching and plugging
is therefore the critical feature for correct
duty.
contactor selection.
Contactors are actuated by hand or automatically,
using various types of command devices,
depending on the travel, time, pressure or
temperature. Any interrelationships required
between a number of contactors can easily be
produced by means of interlocks via their auxiliary
contacts.
The auxiliary contact of the contactor DILNM can
be used as mirror contact to IEC/EN 60947-4-1
Appendix F to show the condition of the main
contacts. A mirror contact is a normally closed
contact that cannot be similtaneously closed with
the normally open main contacts.
For
Contactors DIL
Contactor DILP
DILP contactors are used for problem-free order to switch the neutral pole as well in special
switching of supply systems including the neutral applications.
pole or for economical switching of resistive loads. In the area of 4 pole applications, there are
In three-phase distribution systems, mainly 3 pole national differences concerning the Standards
switchgear and protective devices are used. 4 pole situation, the customary distribution system and
switchgear and protective devices are used in conventions that go beyond the Standards.
Rating data
max. rated operational current Ie
AC-1 open conv. therm.

current
40 °C 50 °C 70 °C Ith = Ie AC-1 Part no. 5

open
160 A 160 A 155 A 160 A DILP160/22

250 A 230 A 200 A 250 A DILP250/22
315 A 270 A 215 A 315 A DILP315/22
500 A 470 A 400 A 500 A DILP500/22
630 A 470 A 400 A 630 A DILP630/22
800 A 650 A 575 A 800 A DILP800/22

5-63
Overload relays Z
Motor protection using Z thermal overload relays
Overload relays are included in the group of Tripping occurs when the reference temperature is
current-dependent protective devices. They reached. The tripping delay depends on the
monitor the temperature of the motor winding magnitude of the current and preloading of the
indirectly via the current flowing in the supply relay. Whatever the current, the relay must trip out
cables, and offer proven and cost-efficient before the motor insulation is endangered, which
protection from destruction as a result of: is why EN 60947 states maximum response times.
• Non starting, To prevent nuisance tripping, minimum times are
• Overload, also given for the limit current and locked-rotor
• Phase-failure. current.
Overload relays operate by using the characteristic Phase-failure sensitivity

changes of shape and state of the bimetal when Overload relays Z offer, due to their design, an
5 subjected to heating. When a specific temperature effective protection against phase failure. They
is reached, they operate an auxiliary contact. The have phase failure sensitivity to IEC 947-4-1 and
heating is caused by resistances through which therefore can also provide protection for EEx e
the motor current flows. The equilibrium between motors (a following diagramms).
the reference and actual value occurs at various
temperatures depending on the magnitude of the
current.
햴
S
97 95 97 95 97 95
햲
98 96 98 96 98 96
Normal operation (no fault) Three phase overload One phase drops out
a Trip bridge
b Differential bar
c Differential travel
For
Overload relays Z
When the bimetallic strips in the main current This differential movement is converted in the
section of the relay deflect as a result of device by a step-up mechanism into a
three-phase motor overloading, all three act on a supplementary tripping movement, and thus
trip bar and a differential bar. A shared trip lever accelerates the tripping action.
switches over the auxiliary contact when the limits
are reached. The trip and differential bars lie Design note a section “Motor protection in
against the bimetallic strips with uniform special applications”, page 8-7;
pressure. If, in the event of phase failure for Further information to motor protection
instance, one bimetallic strip does not deflect (or a section “All about Motors”, page 8-1.
recover) as strongly as the other two, then the trip
and differential bars will cover different distances.
Tripping characteristics
The overload relays ZE, ZB12, ZB32 and the Z5 up These tripping characteristics are mean values of 5
to 150 A are, due to the German the scatter bands at an ambient temperature of
Physical/Technical Bureau (PTB), suitable for 20 °C from cold. The tripping time is dependant
protection of EEx e-motors to the upon the current. When units are warm, the
ATEX-Guidelines 94/9 EG. In the relevant manual tripping delay of the overload relay drops to about
all tripping characteristics are printed for all a quarter of the value shown.
currents.
2h 2h
100 100 Z5
60 60
40 40
20 20
Minutes
Minutes
10 10
6 6
4 4
2 2
1 1
40 3-phase 40 3-phase
20 20
10
Seconds
Seconds
10
6 6
4 2-phase 4 2-phase
2 2
1 1
0.6 0.6
1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 1015 20
x Setting current x Setting current

5-65
Overload relays Z
2h
100 ZW7
60
40
20
Minutes
10
6
4
2
1 Maximum
40
20
10 Minimum
Seconds
6
4
2
5 1
0.6
1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20
x Setting current
For
ZEV electronic motor-protective system
Method of operation and control
Like overload relays operating on the bimetallic With direct measurement, the temperature in the
strip principle, electronic motor-protective relays motor winding is detected by means of one or
are current-dependent protective devices. more PTC thermistors. In the event of excessive
The acquisition of the actual flowing motor temperature rise, the signal is passed to the
current in the three external conductors of the tripping unit and the auxiliary contacts are
motor connections is with motor protection actuated. A reset is not possible until the
system ZEV with seperate push-through sensors or thermistors cool to less than the response
a sensor belt. These are combined with an temperature. The built-in thermistor connection
evaluation unit so that seperate arrangement of allows the relay to be used as complete motor
the current sensor and the evaluation unit is protection.
possible. In addition, the relay protects the motor against
The current sensor is based on the Rogowski earth faults. Small currents flow out even in the
principle from the measurement technology. . The event of minor damage to the motor winding 5
sensor belt has no iron core, unlike a current insulation. These earth faults currents are
transformer, therefore it doesn´t become registered on an external summation current
saturated and can measure a very wide current transformer which adds together the currents in
range. the phases, evaluats them and reports earth-fault
Due to this inductive current detection, the currents to the microprocessor in the relay.
conductor cross-sections used in the load circuit By selecting one of the eight tripping classes
have no influence on the tripping accuracy. With (CLASS) allows the motor to be protected to be
electronic motor-protective relays, it is possible to adapted from normal to extended starting
set higher current ranges than is possible with conditions. This allows the thermal reserves of the
electromechanical thermal overload relays. In the motor to be used safely.
ZEV System, the entire protected range from 1 to The motor-protective relay is supplied with an
820 A is covered using only an evaluator . auxiliary voltage. The evaluator has a
The ZEV electronic motor-protective system carries multi-voltage version, which enables all voltages
out motor protection both by means of indirect between 24 V and 240 V AC or DC to be applied
temperature measurement via the current and as supply voltage. The devices have monostable
also by means of direct temperature measurement behaviour; they trip out as soon as the supply
in motors with thermistors. voltage fails.
Indirectly, the motor is monitored for overload,
phase failure and unbalanced current
consumption.

5-67
In addition to the usual normally closed contact Tripping in the event of a three-pole balanced
(95-96) and the normally open contact (97-98) for overload at x-times the set current takes place
overload relays the motor protection relay ZEV is within the time specified by the tripping class. The
equipped with a programmable normally open tripping delay in comparison with the cold state is
contact (07-08) and a programmable normally reduced as a function of the preloading of the
closed contact (05-06). The above mentioned, motor. Very good tripping accuracy is achieved
usual contacts react directly via thermistors or and the tripping delays are constant over the
indirectly via the current, to the detected entire setting range.
temperature rise of the motor, including If the motor current imbalance exceeds 50 %, the
phase-failure sensitivity. relay trips after 2.5 s.
The programmable contacts can be assigned to The accredition exists for overload protection of
various signals, such as explosion proof motors of the explosion protection
• Earth-fault, “increased safety” EEx e to guideline 94/9/EG as
• Pre-warning at 105 % thermal overload, well as the report of the German
5 • separate indication of thermistor tripping Physical/Technical Bureaux (PTB report )
• internal device fault (EG-Prototype test certificate number PTB 01
The function assignment is menu-guided using a ATEX 3233). Further information can be found in
display. The motor current is entered without tools the manual AWB2300-1433D “Motor protection
using the keypad, and can be clearly verified on system ZEV, overload monitoring of motors in
the display. EEx e areas”.
In addition the display allows a differential
diagnosis of tripping causes, and therefore a
faster error handling is possible.
Electronic motor protection system ZEV
Evaluation device Push-through sensor Sensor belt

1 to 820 A 1 to 25 A 40 to 820 A
3 to 65 A
10 to 145 A
For
Tripping characteristics Tripping characteristics for 3 phase loads
These tripping characteristics show the
2h relationship between the tripping time from cold
ZEV 3 pole
100 to the current (multiples of set current IE ). After
preloading with 100 % of the set current and the
temperature rise to the operational warm state
15
Minutes
associated with it, the stated tripping delays are

10
reduced to approx. 15 %.
5 CLASS 40
2 35
30
1 25
20
20
Seconds
10 15
7 10 5
5
3 CLASS 5
2
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910
x Setting current
Tripping limits for 3 pole balanced load

Response time
< 30 min. at up to 115 % of the set current
> 2 h at up to 105 % of the set current from cold

5-69
Electronic motor protection sytem ZEV with earth-fault monitoring and thermistor
monitored motor
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
f
Z1
S1 e
Z2
S2 Q11
Q11 C1 C2 A1 A2 PE 95 97 05 07
~
Reset =
5 a
L1 L2 L3
A
d I µP b
D %
Class
c
T1 Mode Up
<
M
3~ T2 >
Test Down
Reset
96 98 06 08
Q11
a Fault e Self hold-in of the contactor prevents an

b Programmable contact 1 automatic re-start after the control voltage
c Programmable contact 2 has failed and then returned (important for
d Current sensor with A/D transducer EEx e applications, a AWB2300-1433D)
f Remote reset
For
Thermistor protection temperature sensors with a thermistor resistance
With thermistor motor protection, to DIN 44081 of RK F 250 O or nine with a RK F 100 O can be
and DIN 44082, up to six PTC thermistor connected to terminals T1-T2.
R[ ]
12000
c d
4000
5
a
1650
b
750
TNF T [ ˚ C]
TNF TNF TNF TNF
–20˚ –5˚ +5˚ +15˚
TNF= Nominal response temperature input the contacts 95-96 and 97-98 switch over.
a Tripping range IEC 60947-8 Additionally, the thermistor trip can be
b Re-switch on range IEC 60947-8 programmed to different trip messages on
c Tripping at 3200 O g15 % contacts 05-06 or 07-08.
d Re-switch on at 1500 O +10 % With temperature monitoring with thermistors, no
dangerous condition can occur should a sensor fail
The ZEV switches off at R = 3200 O g15 % and as the device would directly switch off.
switches on again at R = 1500 O +10 %. With
switch off due to thermistor

5-71
Electronic motor protection system ZEV with short-circuit monitoring at the thermistor
input
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
a
Z1
S1
Z2
S2 Q11 S3
Q11 C1 C2 A1 A2 PE 95 97 05 07
~
Reset =
5
L1 L2 L3
A I µP
D %
Class
T2 Mode Up
<
M
3~ T1 >
Test
Reset
Down
96 98 06 08
IN1 IN2 IN3 11 Q11

K1 M
A1 A2 12 14
Short-circuit in the thermistor circuit can, when • Total PTC thermistor sensor resistance
required, be detected by the additional use of a F 1500 O
current monitor K1 (e. g. type EIL 230 V AC from • Programming ZEV: “Auto reset”,
the company Cronzet or the similar type • Setting current monitor:
3U6352-1-1AL20 from the company Siemens). – Device to lowest current level,
Basic data – Overload tripping,
• Short-circuit current in the sensor circuit F – Store the tripping,
2.5 mA, • Confirmation of the short-circuit after clearing
• max. cable length to sensor 250 m with pushbutton S3.
(unscreened),
For
Device mounting
The mounting of the device is very simple due to
the clip-on and the push-through mounting.
Mounting details of every device can be found in 1
the mounting instructions AWA2300-1694 or the
2
manual AWB2300-1433D.
3
Mounting ZEV and current sensor
1 Wrap the band around the current 5

conductors.
2 Engage the fixing pin.
3 Pull the fixing band tight and close with the
velcro fastener.
Attaching the sensor coils a following diagram.
• Place the ZEV in the desired mounting position.
• Click the ZEV on the current sensor.
• Position motor conductors through the current
sensor.
Mounting on the current conductors
Due to the fixing band the Rogowski sensor
ZEV-XSW-820 is particularly easy to mount. And
this saves the user time and money.

5-73
Thermistor machine protection device EMT6
EMT6 for PTC thermistors
LED. As soon as the sensors have cooled enough
L
so that the respective smaller resistance is reached
the EMT6-(K) switches automatically on again.
With the EMT6-(K)DB(K) the automatic re-switch
on can be defeated by switching the device to
“Hand”. The unit is reset using the reset button.
A1 21 13 The EMT6-K(DB) and EMT6-DBK are fitted with a
Power Tripped
short-cicuit in sensor circuit monitor. Should the
US resistance in the sensor circuit fall below 20 Ohm
it trips. The EMT6-DBK also has a zero voltage
safe, re-switch on lock-out and stores the fault by
a loss of voltage. Switching on again is possible
5 A2 T1 T2 22 14 only after the fault has been rectified and the
control voltage is present again.
PTC Since all the units use the closed-circuit principle,
they also respond to a broken wire in the sensor
N
circuit.
The thermistor machine protection relays EMT6…
L are accredited for protection of EEx e motors to
ATEX-Guideline 94/9 EG by the German
Physical/Technical Bureaux. For protection of
EEx e motors the ATEX Guidelines require
short-circuit monitoring in the sensor circuit.
Because of their integrated short-circuit
A1 Y1 Y2 21 13 monitoring the EMT6-K(DB) and EMT6-DBK are
Power Tripped
especially suitable for this application.
+24 V
Reset
US
A2 T1 T2 22 14
PTC
Method of operation
The output relay is actuated when the control
voltage is switched on and the resistance of the
PTC thermistor temperature sensor is low. The
auxiliary contacts operate. On reaching the
nominal actuation temperature (NAT), the sensor
resistance becomes high and causes the output
relay to drop out. The defect is indicated by an
For
EMT6 as contact protection relay
3 400 V 50 Hz Application example

L1
Control of a storage tank heater
L2
L3 a Control circuit
N b Heater
Q11: Heater protection
-Q1
I> I> I>

L1
a
A1 1 3 5
-Q11
A2 2 4 6 5
U V W
400 V 50 Hz
b
Description of operation
Switching on the heater Switching off the heater
The heater can be switched on provided the main The heater protection Q11 stays in self maintain
switch Q1 is switched on, the safety thermostat F4 until the main switch Q1 is switched off, the
has not tripped and the condition T F Tmin is pushbutton S0 is pressed, the thermostat trips or
satisfied. When S1 is actuated, the control voltage T = Tmax.
is applied to the contactor relay K1, which When T = Tmax the changeover contact of the
maintains itself via a make contact. The contact thermometer has the position I-III. The
changeover contact of the contact thermometer sensor circuit of the EMT6 (K3) is low resistance,
has the position I-II. The low resistance sensor the normally closed contact K3/21-22 open. The
circuit of the EMT6 guarantees that Q11 is main protection Q11 drops out.
actuated via K2 normally open contact 13-14; Q11
goes to self-maintain.

5-75
Safety against broken wires
Security against wire break in the sensor circuit of when Tmax is exceeded it´s normally closed contact
K3 (e.g. non-recognition of the limit value Tmax) is F4 switches off so that “switch off by
guaranteed by the use of a safety thermostat that deenergisation” is carried out.
230 V 50 Hz
13
14
L1
-K1
4AF
-F1
13 13
-S0 -K2 -Q11
14 14
-S1 -K1
5
-F4 a II III 21
-K3
22
A1 X1 T1 T2 A1 T2 T1 A1 A1
-K1 - H1 -K2 -K3 -Q11
A2 X2 EMT6 A2 EMT6 A2 A2
23
24
a Contact thermometer change over contact K1: Control voltage "On"

I-II position at T F Tmin K2: switch on at T F Tmin
I-III position at T F Tmax K3: switch off at Tmax
S0: Off
S1: Start
F4: Safety thermostat
For
Electronic safety relay ESR
Application
The electronic safety relay is used for monitoring Function
safety relevant controls. The requirements for the
electrical equiping of machines is defined in After switch on, in failure free operation the safety
IEC/EN 60204. The machine operater must assess relevant circuit is controlled via the electronics and
the risk on his machine to EN 954-1 and install the using a relay the switching circuit is switched on.
controls to the necessary safety category 1, 2, 3 After switch off and in the case of a failure
or 4. (earth-fault, short-circuit, wire break) the
switching circuit is immediately (stop category 0)
or delayed (Stop category 1) switched off and the
Surface mounting motor isolated from the mains supply.
The electronic safety relay consists of a mains unit, In redundant safety circuits a short-circuit is not
the electronics and two redundant relays with dangerous, so that only by renewed switch on is
forced contacts for the switching and indication the failure recognised and re-switch on is blocked.
circuits. 5
Further information sources
Mounting instructions
• Evaluation device for two handed switching
ESR4-NZ-21, AWA2131-1743
13
A1
23
S33
24
S34
37
S35
• Basic device for emergency and safety barrier
apllications
– ESR4-NV3-30, ESR4-NV30-30,
AWA2131-1838
– ESR3-NO-31 (230V), AWA2131-1740
POWER – ESR4-NO-21, ESR4-NM-21, AWA2131-1741
– ESR4-NO-30, AWA2131-2150
K1 K3
K2 K4 – ESR4-NT30-30, AWA2131-1884
1 1.5 • Basis device for emergency applications
.5 2 ESR4-NO-31, AWA2131-1742
.3 2.5
.15 3 • Emergency relay
ESR4 -NV3-30 ESR4-NE-42, ESR4-VE3-42, AWA2131-1744
Safety manual , TB0-009D

S21 S22 S31 A2 Main catalogue Industrial Switchgear, Section 4
14 S11 S12 38
“monitoring relays”.

5-77
Measurement and monitoring relay EMR4
General
For the various applications measurement amd Selected bridging of short current peaks
monitoring relays are necessary. With the new By using the selected time delay of between 0.05
EMR4 range Moeller covers a large number of and 30 s short current peaks can be bridged.
requirements :
• general use, current monitor EMR4-I Phase monitoring relay EMR4-W
• space saving monitoring of the rotary field,
phase sequence relay EMR4-F
• protection against destruction or damage of
single system parts, phase monitoring relay
EMR4-W
• safe recognition of phase failure, phase
imbalance monitoring relay EMR4-A
5 • increased safety by motor current principle ,
level relay EMR4-N
• increase of the operational safety, insulation
monitoring relay EMR4-R The phase monitoring relay EMR4-W monitors as
well as the field rotation also the voltage height.
Current monitoring relay EMR4-I That means protection against destruction or
damage of single system parts. Here the minimum
low voltage and also the maximum over voltage
can be easily set, within a defined range, to the
required voltage.
Also a delayed on or a delayed off can be set. In
the delayed on position short voltage breaks can
be bridged. The delayed off position allows for a
failure storage for the set time. The delay time can
be set between 0.1 und 10 s.
The current monitoring relay EMR4-I is suitable for The relay activates with the correct rotation and
the monitoring of AC as well as DC current. Pumps voltage. After drop-out the device reactivates
and drill machines can be monitored for low load when a the voltage exceeds a 5 % hysteresis.
or overload. That is due to the selectable under or
over limit.
There are two versions each with three measuring
ranges (30/100/1000 mA, 1.5/5/15 A). The
multi-voltage coil allows universal use of the relay.
The two auxiliary changeover contacts allow for a
direct feedback.
For
Phase sequence relay EMR4-F500-2 Level monitoring relay EMR4-N
With the only 22.5 mm wide phase sequence The level monitoring relay EMR4-N is used mostly
relay, portable motors, by which the direction of as dry running protection for pumps or for level
rotation is important (e. g. pumps, saws, drills), regulation of liquids. It operates with sensors that
can be monitored for correct rotation. That means measure conductivity. A sensor is required for the 5
space in the switchboard due to the narrow width maximum and also a sensor for the minimum
and protection against damage due to the level. A third sensor is used for earth potential.
monitoring of the rotating field. The 22.5 mm wide device EMR4-N100 is suitable
With correctly rotating field the changeover for conductive liquids. It can be switched from
contact switches the control voltage of the motor level regulation to dry running protection. The
switching device. The EMR4-F500-2 covers the safety is increased as in both cases the motor
total voltage range from 200 to 500 V AC. current principle is used.
Phase imbalance relay EMR4-A
The level monitoring relay EMR4-N500 has an

increased sensitivity and is suitable for less
The 22.5 mm wide phase imbalance relay is the conductive liquids. Due to an integrated rise and
correct protection device against phase failure. fall delay of between 0.1 and 10 s moving liquids
The motor is then protected against destruction. can also be monitored.
That the phase failure is monitored on the basis of
phase displacement can be recognised with a
higher motor feedback and an overload of the
motor can be prevented. The relay is able to
protect motors with a rated voltage of
Un = 380 V, 50 Hz.

5-79
Insulation monitoring relay EMR4-R Further information sources

Mounting instructions
• Phase imbalance monitoring relay
EMR4-A400-1 AWA2431-1867
• Insulation monitoring relay EMR4-RAC-1-A
AWA2431-1866
• Insulation monitoring relay EMR4-RDC-1-A
AWA2431-1865
• Level monitoring relay EMR4-N100-1-B
AWA2431-1864
• Phase sequence relay EMR4-F500-2
EN 60204 “Safety of machines” provides AWA2431-1863
increased operational safety by the monitoring of • Phase monitoring relay EMR4-W…
the control voltage circuit for earth-fault using an AWA2431-1863
5 insulation monitor. This is the main application for • Current monitoring relay EMR4-I…
the EMR4-R. There are similar requirements in AWA2431-1862
medically used areas. An earth-fault is signalled
via a changeover contact so that a fault can be Main catalogue Industrial Switchgear, Section 4
cleared without expensive down time. “monitoring relays”.
The device has a selectable fault memory so that
the fault must be acknowledged after it´s removal.
By the use of a Test button the device can be
checked for correct operation at any time.
AC or DC control voltage
There is a device for AC and also DC. Therefore the
total control voltage range is covered. The DC
device has a multi-voltage source. Therefore AC as
well as DC is possible.
For
Motor-protective circuit-breaker
Overview
Definition
Motor-protective circuit-breakers are winding (overload protection) and an
circuit-breakers used for switching, protection and electromagnetic release (short-circuit protection).
isolation of circuits primarily associated with The following accessories can be fitted to
motor loads. At the same time, they protect these motor-protective circuit-breakers:
motors against destruction from locked-motor • Undervoltage release,
starting, overload, short-circuit and phase-failure • Shunt release,
in three-phase power supplies. They have a • Auxiliary contact,
thermal release for protection of the motor • Trip-indicating auxiliary contact.
Moeller motor-protective circuit-breakers

PKZM01 The major system modules are:
The motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZM01 • Motor-protective circuit-breakers
reintroduces the pushbutton actuation up to 16 A • Transformer-protective circuit-breakers
which was very popular with customers. The • (High-capacity) contact modules
6 mushroom actuator for Emergency-Stop operation
Description a section “The motor-protective
on simple machines is also being reintroduced.
circuit-breakers PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4”,
The PKZM01 is preferably installed in
page 6-4.
surface-mount or flush-mount enclosures. Many
accessory parts from the PKZM0 can be used. PKZ2
Major system module: motor-protective PKZ2 for motor and distribution circuit protection
circuit-breaker The PKZ2 is a modular and efficient system for
protecting, switching, signalling and remote
PKZM4
operation of motors and systems in low-voltage
The PKZM4 system is a modular and efficient
switchgear systems up to 40 A.
system for switching and protecting motor loads
up to 63 A. It is the “big brother” of the PKZM0 The major system modules are:
and can be used with almost all PKZM0 accessory • Motor-protective circuit-breakers
parts. • System-protective circuit-breakers
Major system modules: motor-protective • (High-capacity) contact modules
circuit-breakers Description a section “Motor and system
PKZM0 protection”, page 6-16.
The PKZM0 motor-protective circuit-breaker is a
modular and efficient system for switching and
protecting motor loads up to 32 A and
transformers up to 25 A.

Overview
PKZM01 PKZM0 PKZM4 PKZ2

circuit-breaker circuit-breaker circuit-breaker circuit-breaker
In surface mounting
enclosure
PKZM0 PKZ2
compact starter compact starter
6
MSC-D MSC-R
direct-on-line starter reversing starter

6-3
PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4
The motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4
The PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4 use bimetallic sensitivity of PKZM0 and PKZM4 allows for the
releases which are delayed depending on the use in the protection of EEx e motors. An ATEX
magnitude of the current to offer a proven, certificate has been awarded. The
technical solution for motor protection. The motor-protective circuit-breakers are set to the
releases are sensitive to phase failure and are rated motor current in order to protect the motors.
temperature-compensated. The rated current with The following accessories complement the
the PKZM0 up to 32 A is split into 15 ranges, for motor-protective circuit-breaker for the various
the PKZM01 it is split into 12 ranges and for the secondary functions:
PKZM4 up to 63 A into 7 ranges. The installation • Undervoltage release U,
(motor) and the supply cable are reliably protected • Shunt release A,
by short-circuit releases, permanently set to 14 x • Standard auxiliary contact NHI,
Iu. The motor start is also guaranteed in every • Trip-indicating auxiliary contact AGM.
operational situation. The single-phasing
The compact starter

6 It consists of the motor-protective circuit-breaker to be capable of immediate switch on even after a
PKZM0 and the contact module SE00-...-PKZ0 short-circuit of up to 100 kA/400 V.
which can be attached and features identical The compact starters and high-capacity compact
contours. It has been developed for standard starters from the PKZ2 are available for motor
applications such as switching and protection of a ratings of more than 4 kW/400 V (up to
cooling water pump or a similar application, and 18.5 kW/400 V, or the combination of PKZM4
complies to the latest motor starter standards: with the proven contactor DIL.
• IEC/EN 60 947-4-1
• &$§
• &$§
Whereas the motor-protective circuit-breaker
PKZM0 guarantees the disconnection,
short-circuit and overload protection tasks, the
contact module (contactor) S(E)00-...-PKZ0
assumes the operational switching of the motor
current. The compact starter can master a
short-circuit current of 100 kA at 4 kW and 400 V.
While the compact starter represents an economic
solution for standard tasks, the high-capacity
compact starter was developed specifically for
switching and protection of motors in critical
processes. This refers to motors whose failure
would involve severe consequential costs. In order
to guarantee the highest possible level of system
availability, the high-capacity compact starter is
comprised of the motor-protective circuit-breaker
PKZM0 and the weld-free high-capacity contact
module (contactor) S00-...-PKZ0. It is guaranteed

Motor starter combinations
The motor-starter combinations MSC are available The motor-starter combination MSC from 16 A
up to 32 A. Motor starters up to 12 A consist of a consists of a motor-protective circuit-breaker
motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZM0 and a PKZM0 and a contactor DILM. Both are fitted to a
contactor DILM. Both are connected by a tool-less top-hat rail and mechanically and electrically
mechanical connection element. Furthermore, a interconnected by a connector element.
plug-in electrical connector is used to establish the The MSC is available as a direct-on-line starter
connection with the main circuit wiring. The MSC-D and as a reversing starter MSC-R.
motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZM0 and the
contactor DILM up to 12 A feature the respective
interfaces for this purpose.
Motor-protective circuit-breakers for starter combinations

PKM0 for protection of resistive loads where no
The PKM0 motor-protective circuit-breaker is a overloading is to be expected.
protective switch for starter combinations or for These protective switches are also used in 6
use as a basic unit in a short-circuit protective motor-starter combinations with and without
switch in the range 0.16 A to 32 A. The basic unit automatic reset, where an overload relay or a
is without overload release, but equipped with thermistor overload relay is used as well.
short-circuit release. This circuit-breaker is used
Transformer-protective circuit-breaker and current limiter

PKZM0-T CL-PKZ0
The transformer-protective circuit-breaker is The current limiter module CL-PKZ0 is a
designed for protecting transformer primaries. The short-circuit protective device specially developed
short-circuit releases in the types from 0.16 A to for the PKZM0 and PKZM4 for
25 A are permanently set to 20 x Iu. The response non-intrinsically-safe areas. The CL module has
ranges of the short-circuit releases are higher here the same base area and uses the same
than with motor-protective circuit-breakers in termination's as the PKZM0. When they are
order to cope with the even higher inrush currents mounted on a top-hat rail alongside one another,
of idling transformers without tripping. The it is possible to connect them by means of
overload release in the PKZM0-T is set to the rated B3...-PKZ0 three-phase commoning links. The
current of the transformer primary. With the switching capacity of the series connected PKZM0
exception of the S00-...-PKZ0 high-capacity or PKZM4 + CL is 100 kA at 400 V. In a
contact module, all the PKZM0 system accessories short-circuit the contacts of the motor-protective
can be combined with the PKZM0-T. circuit-breaker and CL will open. While the current
PKZM0-...-C limiter returns to the closed rest position, the
The PKZM0 features a version with springloaded motor-protective circuit-breaker trips via the
terminals. A version with springloaded terminals instantaneous release and produces a permanent
on both sides, and a combined version which isolating gap. The system is ready to operate
features springloaded terminals on the outgoer again, once any defect has been rectified. The
side only can be chosen. The conductors can be current limiter can conduct an uninterrupted
connected here without ferrules. The connections current of 63 A. The module may be used for
are maintenance-free. individual or group protection. Any feed direction
may be used.
6-5
Individual and group protection using
CL-PKZ0
Use the BK25/3-PKZ0 for

Iu = 63 A terminals > 6/4 mm2
l> l> l>
For grouped connection use
B3...PKZ0 three-phase
commoning links B3...PKZ0.
Note utilization factors to
IEC/EN 60 947.
l> l> l> l> l> l> l> l> l>
Examples:
6
PKZM0-16, PKZM0-16/20, PKZM0-20, PKZM0-25,
PKZM4-16 PKZM4-16/20 PKZM4-20 PKZM4-25
or or or
4 x 16 A x 0.8 2 x (16 A + 20 A) 3 x 20 A x 0.8 3 x 25 A x 0.8
= 51.2 A x 0.8 = 57.6 A = 50 A = 60 A

PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4 – auxiliary contacts
Auxiliary contacts and standard auxiliary contacts NHI for PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4
They switch at the same time as the main against one another. They are available with
contacts. They are used for remote indication of screw terminals or springloaded terminals.
the operating state, and interlocking of switches
Side mounted:
1.13 1.21 1.13 1.21 1.31 1.13 1.21 1.33
I>
1.14 1.22 1.14 1.22 1.32 1.14 1.22 1.34
Integrated:
1.53 1.61 1.53
6
1.54 1.62 1.54
Only for (high-performance) compact

circuit-breakers PKZM0-.../S...
1.13 1.21 31 43
L
I>
T
1.14 1.22 32 44

6-7
PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4 – auxiliary contacts
Trip-indicating auxiliary contact AGM for PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4
These provide information about the reason for 4.13-4.14 or 4.21-4.22) two potential-free
the PKZM0 having tripped. In the event of a contacts are actuated independently of one
voltage/overload release (contact 4.43-4.44 or another. It is thus possible to indicate the
4.31-4.32) or short-circuit release (contact difference between short circuit and overload.
"+" "I >" "+" "I >"

4.43 4.13 4.31 4.21
I>
4.44 4.14
4.32 4.22

PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4 – releases
Voltage releases
These operate according to the electromagnetic Shunt releases
principle and act on the switch mechanism of the
circuit-breaker. These switch the circuit-breaker off when they are
connected to voltage. Shunt releases can be
provided in interlock circuits or for remote releases
Undervoltage release where voltage dips or interruptions are not to lead
These switch the circuit-breaker off when no to unintentional switch off.
voltage is present. They are used for safety tasks. C1
The undervoltage release U-PKZ0, which is
connected to voltage via the early-make auxiliary
contacts VHI20-PKZ0, allows the circuit-breaker
to be switched on. In the event of power failure,
the undervoltage release switches the
circuit-breaker off via the switch mechanism.
Uncontrolled restarting of machines is thus
reliably prevented. The safety circuits are proof
against wire breaks. C2
6
The VHI-PKZ0 can be used together with the
PKZM4!
D1
U<
D2

6-9
PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4 – operating principle schematics
Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4
Manually operated motor-starter
L1 L2 L3
-Q1
I> I> I>
T1 T2 T3
Compact starter and high-capacity compact starter with maximum number of auxiliary
contacts fitted
6
Compact starters consist of: Compact starter
• PKZM0 motor-protective circuit-breaker and PKZM0-.../SE00-... + NHI2-11S-PKZ0
• Contact module (contactor) SE00-...-PKZ0
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21 31 43
–Q1 -Q1
I> I> I> I> I> I>
A1 13 21 A1 13 21
A2 14 22 A2 14 22
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 1.14 1.22 32 44
For
High-capacity compact starter consisting High-capacity compact starters

of: PKZM0-.../S00-... + NHI2-11S-PKZ0
• PKZM0 motor-protective circuit-breaker and
• High-capacity contact module (contactor)
SE00-...-PKZ0 L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21 31 43
L1 L2 L3
-Q1
-Q1
I> I> I>

I> I> I>
A1 13 21
A1 13 21
A2 14 22
A2 14 22 I>> I>> I>>
I >> I >> I >> T1 T2 T3 1.14 1.22 32 44 6
T1 T2 T3

6-11
Motor-protective circuit-breaker with auxiliary contact and trip-indicating auxiliary
contact
PKZM01(PKZM0-...)(PKZM4...) + NHI11-PKZ0 +
AGM2-10-PKZ0
L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21
-Q1
1.14 1.22
4.43 4.31 4.21 4.13
I> I> I>
4.44 4.32 4.22 4.14
T1 T2 T3
For differential fault indication

6 (Overload or short-circuit)
L1
1.13 1.21 4.43 4.13
-Q1 -Q1 -Q1 -Q1

1.14 1.22 4.44 4.14
-X1 1 -X1 2 -X1 3 -X1 4
X1 X1 X1 X1
-E1 -E2 -E3 -E4

X2 X2 X2 X2
-X1 5
N
E1: circuit-breaker ON E3: general fault, overload release

E2: circuit-breaker OFF E4: short-circuit release
For
Remote switch off via shunt release
High-capacity compact starter with auxiliary contact and shunt release
PKZM0-.../S00-.. + A-PKZ0
L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21 Q11: Contact module
-Q1
C1 1.14 1.22
I> I> I>
C2
A1 13 21
-Q11
A2 14 22
I>> I>> I>>
T1 T2 T3
-X1 1 2 3 PE 6
U1 V1 W1
M
3
-M1
L1
1.13 S1: Off
-Q1 S2: On
1.14 S3: Circuit-breaker On
21
-S1
22 13
-S3
14
13 13
-S2 -K1
14 14 C1
-Q1
A1
-Q11
A2
N C2

6-13
Direct switch-on, reversible
(High-capacity) compact reversing starter PKZM0-.., 2 x (S)00-.../EZ-PKZ0
(with mechanical interlock MV-PKZ0 if required)
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5
L1 L2 L3
-Q1
a
I> I> I>
T1 T2 T3
6 2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 13 21 A1 13 21
-Q11 -Q12
A2 14 22 A2 14 22
I>> I>> I>> I>> I>> I>>
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
2 4 6 2 4 6
U1 V1 W1
M
3
-M1
a Fuseless
For
For standard applications contact modules SE00-...-.PKZ0

may be used instead of high-capacity contact modules S00-...-PKZ0.
Q11 Q1 Q12 Q12 Q11 Q11 Q1 Q12 Q12

13 1.14 14 13 13 14 1.14 14 13
I 0 II 0
14 14 L1 -S11 L1 -S11
21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22
-Q11 -Q12 (Q11/1) (Q11/1)
13 13 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14
-F0 A B
-F0
C A B C
a -Q1 1.13 -Q1 1.13
1.14
1.14
22 22 21
21
-Q12 -Q11 0 0 22
21 21 22
21 22 21 22
-S11 II -S11 II
22 21 22 21
14 13 14 13 6
I I
13 14 14 14 13 14 14 14
-Q11 -Q12 -Q11 -Q12
13 13 13 13
22 22 22 22
-Q12 -Q11 -Q12 -Q11
21 21 21 21
A1 A1 A1 A1
-Q11 -Q12 -Q11 -Q12
A2 A2 A2 A2
N N
a With position switches

remove the links

6-15
PKZ2 – overview
Motor and system protection
The PKZ2 achieves its modularity by combining Special motor-protective trip block
the motor or system-protective circuit-breaker ZMR-...-PKZ2
with various accessories. This results in numerous
application options and adaptation to widely This trip block features an overload relay function
differing requirements. which allows the following interesting
application:
In the event of an overload, the circuit-breaker
The circuit-breaker does not trip. Instead, a normally closed contact
The circuit-breakers PKZ2/ZM... consists of: (95-96) is actuated which switches off the
• Basic unit and contactor in the control circuit (contactors up to
• Plug-in trip block. 18.5 kW, AC-3). At the same time, a normally
There is a choice of trip blocks: open contact (97-98) is actuated, which ensures
• Motor-protective trip blocks (11 versions for the remote indication. The normally closed contact
range from 0.6 to 40 A) and normally open contact are suitable for
• System-protective trip blocks (5 versions for the carrying two different potentials.
6 range from 10 to 40 A) The trip block has a manual and an automatic
All trip blocks are equipped with adjustable position:
overload and short-circuit releases. • Automatic position: The normally closed
Overload from ... to: contact and normally open contact
• Motor-protective trip-blocks: 8.5 to 14 x Ie automatically return to the original position
• Trip block for distribution circuit protection: after the bimetallic strips have cooled down.
5 to 8.5 x Ie The contact can be actuated again by actuation,
for example, of a pushbutton.
• Manual position: An acknowledgement locally,
Standards
at the unit, moves the contacts back to the
The motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZ2 original position after tripping.
complies with the IEC 947 and EN 60947
standards. The circuit-breaker has a switching
capacity of 30 kA/400 V outside the Important note!
inherently-safe range. It is auto-protected up to a For an EEx e application, the normally closed
rated operational current of 16 A. In addition, the contact 95-96 must be used to shed the contact
PKZ2 complies with the requirements stipulated in module or contactor, to achieve disconnection.
IEC/EN 60 204 for disconnectors and main
switches.
For
PKZ2 – overview
(High-capacity) contact module (High-capacity) contact module for
S-...-PKZ2 24 V DC control voltage
A compact starter combination is produced by An actuating voltage of 24 V DC can be used with
combining a contact module S-...-PKZ2 the contact module SE1A-G-PKZ2 (24 V DC) and
(contactor) featuring the same contours with the the high-capacity contact module S-G-PKZ2 (24 V
PKZ2: DC). It is necessary to take account of:
• Switch + standard contact module • Pull-in capacity: 150 VA,
SE1A-...-PKZ2. The contact module features the • Pull-in current: 6.3 A (16 to 22 ms),
same functions and properties of a standard • Holding power: 2.7 W,
contactor and can be used for operational • Holding current: 113 mA.
switching of 1 x 106 AC-3 operations.
A1 13
A1 13 21
+24 V
A2 14
A2 14 22 2 6
4
2 4 6 T1 T2 T3
T1 T2 T3
6
• Switch + S-PKZ2... high-capacity contact
module. A high-capacity compact starter is Current limiter CL-PKZ2
obtained by using a motor-protective
circuit-breaker (PKZ2/ZM...) as the switch, and A specially developed current-limiter module
a combination circuit-breaker is produced by which can be attached and featuring the same
using a circuit-breaker (PKZ2/ZM-...-8) as the contours is available to increase the switching
switch. capacity of the circuit-breaker to 100 kA/400 V. In
The high-capacity contact module increases the the event of a short-circuit the contacts of the
switching capacity of the combination to PKZ2 and CL-PKZ2 will open. The PKZ2 trips via
100 kA/400 V, and is suitable for 1 x 106 AC-3 the magnetic release and remains in this position.
operations. The CL-PKZ2 returns to the rest position after the
short circuit. Both units are ready for operation
A1 13 21
again after the fault.
A2 14 22
2 4 6
T1 T2 T3
I >> I >> I >>
2 4 6
T1 T2 T3

6-17
PKZ2 – remote operator
The remote operator allows the PKZ2 to be Both remote operators must be supplied with the
switched on and off remotely during operation. mains supply of 700 W/VA for 30 ms at the
After tripping, it can be reset to 0 by the remote terminals 72–74 during the switching operation
operator. (On/Off/Reset). Twelve voltage versions are
The PKZ2 system has two remote operators: available per remote operator. These cover a wide
• In the RE-PKZ2 – the electronic remote operator application range. The remote operators can
for standard applications – both CONTROL and optionally be set for manual or automatic
LINE are separate inputs, but with the same operation.
reference potential. This allows actuation using • Manual position: remote switching on is reliably
low current units, e.g. control circuit devices. electrically interlocked.
• The electronic remote operator RS-PKZ2 can be • Automatic position: remote switching on is
actuated directly, without any coupling possible.
elements, from the semiconductor outputs of a An integrated normally open contact (33–34)
PLC (24 V DC). when closed indicates the automatic position of
Electrical isolation between the CONTROL and the remote operator.
LINE allows it to take power for the switching
6 process from a separate power supply
(e.g. 230 V 50 Hz).
Minimum command time for the remote operators RE-PKZ2 and RS-PKZ2
CONTROL ON
I
ON
0
f 15 t (ms)
CONTROL
I OFF/RESET
OFF/RESET
0
f 15 t (ms)
LINE f 300
I ON
CONTROL Main contact
0 OFF
F 30 F 30 t (ms)
For
PKZ2 – remote operator
Remote operator RE-PKZ2
Off and Reset separate Off equals Reset
L 72 74
L(+) N(-) L(+) N(-)
72 74 72 74
LINE 33 LINE 33
I> CONTROL 34 CONTROL 34

A20 A40 B20 A20 A40 B20
I 0 I 0
T A20 A40 B20 ON OFF RESET ON OFF RESET
Remote operator RS-PKZ2 6

Off equals Reset
L 72 74
L(+) N(-) L(+) N(-)
72 74 72 74
LINE 33 LINE 33
CONTROL 34 CONTROL 34
I>
A20 A30 A0 A20 A30 A0
–
OFF/ I 0 OFF/
ON RESET RESET
24 V H ON 24 V h/H
T A20 A30 A0 +

6-19
PKZ2 – release
Voltage releases
Undervoltage release U Undervoltage releases which switch off without

Undervoltage releases trip the circuit-breaker in delay are suitable for Emergency-Stop circuits.
the event of a power failure and prevent restarting The undervoltage release can be energized early
when the power returns. Three versions are by an additional link (see circuit diagram).
available: Undervoltage release with a 200 ms dropout
• Non-delayed, delay.
• With/without early-make auxiliary contact,
• With 200 ms dropout delay.
D1 2.13
D1 2.13 2.23
U<
6 U<
D2 2.14
D2 2.14 2.24
Shunt release A
Shunt releases trip the circuit-breaker when a C1
voltage is applied. These are an economic option
for switching off remotely.
Shunt releases are suitable for AC and DC, and
one version covers a wide voltage range.
C2
For
PKZ2 – auxiliary contact, trip-indicating auxiliary contact
Standard auxiliary contact NHI
The NHI is available in 2 versions. NHI ... S for the starter combination, featuring the
NHI for circuit-breakers, fitted and featuring the same contours, for indication of the position of the
same contours, for indicating the position of the main contacts of the contactor and/or those of the
main contacts of the switch. circuit-breaker.
1.13 1.21 1.21 1.43 1.21 43

1.13 1.21 1.13 1.31 1.13 31
NHI11
1.14 1.22
I>
1.13 1.21 1.31 1.43 I>
or
13 21
PKZ 2(4)/ZM... NHI22 A1
A2
6
1.14 1.22 1.32 1.44 14 22
I >>
1.14 1.22 1.14 1.32 1.14 32
PKZ 2(4)/ZM.../S 1.22 1.44 1.22 44
NHI 11S NHI 22S NHI 2-11S
Trip-indicating auxiliary contact AGM

The trip-indicating auxiliary contact is of particular
importance. Two separate contact pairs signal
that the circuit-breaker is in the tripped position. "+" "I >"
4.43 4.31 4.21 4.13
One contact pair (normally open & normally
closed) signals general tripping and one pair
signals tripping in the event of a short circuit. If the
normally open contact 4.43/4.44 and the normally I>
closed contact 4.21/4.22 are connected in series,
then it is also possible to indicate overload
tripping differentially. 4.44 4.32 4.22 4.14
PKZ 2(4)/ZM... AGM 2-11

6-21
PKZ2 – operating principle schematics
Motor-protective circuit-breaker consisting of:
• PKZ2 basic unit High-capacity compact starter, consisting
• Plug-in trip block Z of:
L1 L2 L3
• Basic unit
• Trip block
-Q1 • High-capacity contact module fitted with same
contour profile
L1 L2 L3
I I I -Q1
T1 T2 T3
I I I
6 Compact starter, consisting of:

A1 13 21
• Basic unit
• Trip block A2 14 22
• Contact module SE1A...-PKZ2, which can be I I I

T1 T2 T3
attached and has the same contours, for
operational switching
L1 L2 L3
Circuit-breaker with current limiter fitted
–Q1
L1 L2 L3
-Q1
I> I> I>
A1 13 21 I I I
A2 14 22
T1 T2 T3
I I I

T1 T2 T3
For
On-off switching with remote operator
Separate actuation of Off and Reset Circuit-breaker with remote operator, standard
version.
Example 1: PKZ2/ZM-.../RE(...)
L1 72 74 33
A20 A40 B20 34
N
L1 L2 L3
-Q1
1 2
-X1
I> I> I>
6
72 74 T1 T2 T3
-Q1
A20 A40 B20
햲
3 4 5 6
-X1 -X1 -X1
7
13 13 13 33
-S11 -S01 -S21 -Q1
14 14 14 34
8
-X1
햵 햴 햳
a Separate actuation of OFF and Reset
b Reset
c OFF
d ON
Actuation by control circuit devices Auxiliary contact for signalling the
(e.g. pushbuttons NHI, AGM, VS3, EK...SPS with manual/automatic position of the remote
potential-free contacts). operator. Indicates the automatic position when
closed.

6-23
Joint actuation of Off and Reset Example 2: PKZ2/ZM-.../RS(...)
Circuit-breaker with remote operator, standard
version.
L1 72 74 33
A20 A40 B20 34
N
L1 L2 L3
-Q2
9 10
-X1
I> I> I>
6 72 74
T1 T2 T3
-Q2
A20 A40 B20
햲
11 12 13
-X1 -X1 -X1 14
13 13 33
-S12 -S02 -Q2
14 14 34
15
-X1
햴 햳
a Off = Reset
b Off/Reset
c ON
Actuation by control circuit devices Auxiliary contact for signalling the
(e.g. pushbuttons NHI, AGM, VS3, EK...SPS with manual/automatic position of the remote
potential-free contacts). operator. Indicates the automatic position when
closed.
For
Circuit-breaker with remote operator, 24 V DC version with electronic outputs
For direct actuation by a programmable logic Example 3: PKZ2/ZM-.../RS(...)
controller (PLC).
L1 72 74 33
A20 A40 B20 34
N L1 L2 L3
-Q3
1 2
-X2
I> I> I>
72 74
-Q3 T1 T2 T3
6
A20 A30 B20
3 4
-X2 -X2
5
24 V H
33
ON OFF/ -Q3
RESET 34
6
-X2
Actuation by PLC with 24 V DC electronic Indicates the automatic position when closed.
outputs.
Auxiliary contact for signalling the
manual/automatic position of the remote
operator.

6-25
Circuit-breaker with remote operator
Actuation by control circuit devices. Example 4: PKZ2/ZM-.../RS(...)
L1 72 74 33
A20 A40 B20 34
N
L1 L2 L3
-Q4
7 8
-X2
I> I> I>
72 74
6 -Q4 T1 T2 T3
A20 A30 A0
9 10
-X2 -X1 11
24 V /
~
13 13 33
-S22 -S23 -Q1
14 14 34
12
-X2
S22: On
S23: Off/Reset
Actuation by control circuit devices via
24 V AC/DC.
Auxiliary contact for signalling the
manual/automatic position of the remote
operator. Indicates the automatic position when
closed.
For
Indication by auxiliary contacts
Circuit-breaker with auxiliary contact and Example: PKZ2/ZM-... + NHI11-PKZ2 +
trip-indicating auxiliary contact. AGM2-11-PKZ2
L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21
-Q1
1.14 1.22
4.43 4.31 4.21 4.13
I> I> I>
4.44 4.32 4.22 4.14
T1 T2 T3
For differential fault indication.

L1
6
1.13 1.21 4.43 4.13
-Q1 -Q1 -Q1 -Q1

1.14 1.22 4.44 4.14
1 2 3 4
-X1 -X1 -X1 -X1
X1 X1 X1 X1
-E1 -E2 -E3 -E4

X2 X2 X2 X2
5
N -X1
E1: Circuit-breaker On
E2: Circuit-breaker Off
E3: General fault, Overload tripping
E4: Short-circuit tripping

6-27
Use of the undervoltage release in the Emergency-Stop circuit
Motor-protective circuit-breaker with auxiliary Example: PKZ2/ZM... + NHI22-PKZ2 +
contact and undervoltage release. UHI-PKZ2
L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21 1.31 1.43
All poles of the Emergency-Stop circuit are
isolated from the mains supply in the event of
-Q1 a power failure.
D1 2.13 1.14 1.22 1.32 1.44
U> I> I> I>
D2 2.14
T1 T2 T3
1 2 3 PE
-X1
6 U1 V1 W1
M
3
-M1
L1 S1: Emergency-Stop
S2: Emergency-Stop
2.13
-Q1
2.14
21
-S1
22
21 D1
-S2
22
-Q1
U<
D2
For
Remote switch off via shunt release
High-capacity compact starter with auxiliary contact and shunt release
Example: PKZ2/ZM-.../S-PKZ2 + A-PKZ2

L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21 Q11: High-capacity contact module
-Q1
C1 1.14 1.22
I>I> I>
C2
A1 13 21
-Q11 A2 14 22
I>> I>> I>>
T1 T2 T3
-X1
1 2 3 PE 6
U1 V1 W1
M
3
-M1
L1 S1: Off
S2: On
1.13 S3: Circuit-breaker Off
-Q1
1.14
21
-S1
22 13
-S3
14
-S2
C1
-Q1
A1
-Q11
A2
C2
N

6-29
High-capacity compact starter with maximum number of auxiliary contacts fitted
Example: PKZ2/ZM.../S-PKZ2 +
NHI2-11S-PKZ2
L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21 1.31 1.43
-Q1
I> I> I>
A1
-Q11
A2
I>> I >> I>>
T1 T2 T3 1.14 1.22 1.3 1.4
1 2 3 PE
-X1
6
U1 V1 W1
M
3
-M1
L1
1.13 1.21 31 43 13 21
-Q1 -Q1 -Q1 -Q1 -K1 -K1
1.14 1.22 32 44 14 22
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-K1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K5 -K6
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
N
13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14
21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22
31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32
43 44 43 44 43 44 43 44 43 44 43 44
K1: Circuit-breaker On K4: Contact module On

K2: Circuit-breaker Off K5: Contact module On
K3: Contact module Off K6: Contact module Off
For
Remotely actuated circuit-breaker with switch status indication
Motor-protective circuit-breaker with remote Example: PKZ2/ZM.../RE + NHI11-PKZ2 +
operator + auxiliary contact (1 NO, 1 NC) + trip AGM2-11-PKZ2
indicating auxiliary contact
72 74 33
A20 A40 B20 34 L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21
-Q1
1.14 1.22
4.43 4.31 4.21 4.13
I> I> I>
4.44 4.32 4.22 4.14
T1 T2 T3
6
L1
1.13 1.21 4.43 4.13
-Q1 -Q1 -Q1 -Q1
1.14 1.22 4.44 4.14
13 13 13
-S5 14
-S2 14
-S1 14
21 72 74
-S2 22
-Q1
A20 A40 B20
A1 A1 A1 A1
-K1 -K2 -K3 -K4
N A2 A2 A2 A2
13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14
21 31 21 31 21 31 21 31
22 32 22 32 22 32 22 32
43 44 43 44 43 44 43 44
S1: On
S2: Off
S5: Reset
Q1: Auxiliary contact, indication: manual-auto
K1: Circuit-breaker On
K2: Circuit-breaker Off
K3: Overload indication
K4: Short-circuit indication

6-31
Circuit-breaker with current limiter in separate mounting
Example: PKZ2/ZM... + NHI11-PKZ2 with
CL/EZ-PKZ2
L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21 L1
-Q1
1.14 1.22
1.13 1.21
-Q1 -Q1
I> I> I> 1.14 1.22
T1 T2 T3
6 -Q2
L1 L2 L3
I>> I>> I>> A1 A1

T1 T2 T3 -K1 -K2
A2 A2
1 2 3 PE
-X1 N
U1 V1 W1
13 14 13 14
21 22 21 22
31 32 31 32
M 43 44 43 44
3
K1: Circuit-breaker On
-M1 K2: Circuit-breaker Off
Q2: Current limiter, separate mounting
For
Special trip block ZMR-...-PKZ2 with overload relay function
For switching off a contactor in the control circuit
in the event of an overload by means of a trip
block ZMR-...PKZ2 with an overload relay function
and with simultaneous indication. The
circuit-breaker thumb-grip remains in the “On”
position. Circuit-breaker with trip block ZMR,
high-capacity contact module S and NHI11-PKZ2.
L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21 L1
-Q1
1.14 1.22 95 97
97 95 -Q1 -Q1
96 98
I> I> I>
98 96
T1 T2 T3 6
A1 13 21 1.13
-Q11 14 22
A2 -Q1
I>> I>> I>> 1.14
T1 T2 T3
4
-X1
X1
1 2 3 PE
-X1
-E1
U1 V1 W1
A1 X2
-Q11
M 5
3
A2 -X1
N
-M1 Q11: Shutdown

E1: Overload indication
Q11: High-capacity contact module

6-33
Notes
For
Circuit-breakers
Page
Overview 7-2
Overview, shunt releases 7-3
Undervoltage releases 7-4
Contact sequence of the auxiliary contacts 7-5
Internal circuit diagrams 7-7
Remote switch-off with voltage releases 7-9
Application of the
undervoltage release 7-11
Shutdown of the undervoltage release 7-12
Indication of the switch position 7-13
Short-time delayed circuit-breakers –
internal circuit diagrams 7-14
7
Mesh network circuit-breaker 7-15
Remote operation with motor operator 7-16
as a transformer switch 7-17
with residual-current release 7-18
IZM circuit-breaker 7-22

7-1
Circuit-breakers
Overview
NZM circuit-breakers
These circuit-breakers protect electrical Circuit-breakers NZM and switch-disconnectors
equipment against thermal overloading and in the are built and tested to the specifications in
event of a short circuit. They cover the rated IEC/EN 60947.
current range from 20 to 1600 A. They feature isolating characteristics. In
Depending on the version, they have additional conjunction with a locking device, they are
protective functions such as fault-current suitable for use as main switches to
protection, earth-fault protection or the capability IEC/EN 60204.
for energy management by recognition of load The electronic releases of frame sizes NZM2,
peaks, and deliberate load shedding. NZM3 and NZM4 feature communication
Circuit-breakers NZM are distinguished by their capabilities.
compact shape and their current-limiting The current states of the circuit-breaker onsite can
characteristics. be visualized via a Data Management Interface
Switch-disconnectors without tripping units are (DMI) or via digital output signals. Additionally,
available in the same sizes as the circuit-breakers the circuit-breakers can be connected to a
and can be fitted with additional shunt or network, e.g. PROFIBUS-DP.
undervoltage releases to suit on the versions
concerned.
7 NZM1 NZM2 NZM3 NZM4

Circuit-breakers
Overview, shunt releases
IZM circuit-breakers Circuit-breakers IZM are built and tested to the

specifications in IEC/EN 60947.
These circuit-breakers protect electrical
They feature isolating characteristics. In
equipment in the rated current range from 630 to
conjunction with a locking device, they are
6300 A. They have digital tripping electronics,
suitable for use as main switches to
which are available in four different versions.
IEC/EN 60204.
The tripping units offer extensive protection and
The circuit-breakers in the IZM range are also
signalling functions, extending from standard
available as IN switch-disconnectors without
short-circuit and overload protection to energy
tripping units.
management with data transmission.
IZM1 IZM2 IZM3
Shunt releases A (Q1)
L1 An electromagnet which, when a voltage is

(L+) applied, actuates a tripping mechanism. When
de-energized, the system is in the rest position. A
-S11 normally open contact actuates the system. If the
C1 0 shunt release is rated for intermittent duty, the
C2 intermittent operation must be ensured by
Q1
positioning appropriate auxiliary contacts
(usually HIN/S1) upstream of the circuit-breaker.
E1 -Q1 C1 Shunt releases are used for remote tripping when
-Q1 an interruption in the voltage is not intended to
C2
lead to automatic disconnection. Tripping does
N not occur in the event of wire breakage, loose
(L-, L2) contacts or undervoltage.

7-3
Circuit-breakers
Undervoltage releases
Undervoltage release U (Q1)
L1 An electromagnet which actuates a tripping

(L+) mechanism upon interruption of the voltage. The
system is in the rest position when energized.
-S11 Actuation is produced by a normally closed
D1 0 contact. Undervoltage releases are always
D2 designed for uninterrupted operation. These are
Q1 U<
the ideal tripping elements for totally reliable
interlocking tasks (e.g. Emergency-Stop).
E1 -Q1 D1 Undervoltage releases trip the circuit-breaker
-Q1 U< when the power fails in order, for example, to
D2
prevent motors from restarting automatically.
N They are also suitable for very reliable interlocking
(L-, L2) and remote switching off since disconnection
always occurs in the event of a fault (e.g. wire
breakage in the control circuit). The
circuit-breakers cannot be closed when the
undervoltage releases are de-energized.
7
Off-delayed undervoltage release UV (Q1)
L1 The off-delayed undervoltage release is a

(L+) combination of a separate delay unit (UVU) and
the respective release. This release is used to
-S11 prevent brief interruptions in power leading to
D1 0 disconnection of the circuit-breaker. The delay
Q1 D2 time is adjustable between 0.06 and 16 s.
U<
E1 -Q1 D1
-Q1 U<
D2
N
(L-, L2)

Circuit-breakers
Contact sequence of the auxiliary contacts
Standard auxiliary contact HIN
I Used to provide command or signal outputs

1 from processes which are governed by the
L1L2L3
position of the contacts. They can be used for
HIN interlocking with other switches, and for the
I remote indication of the switching state.
1
L1L2L3
• Standard auxiliary contacts behave like
main switch contacts
HIN
• Switch position indication
+ I • Interlocking
1
• Disconnection of the shunt release
L1L2L3
HIN
Trip-indicating auxiliary contact RHI, new designation: trip-indicating auxiliary contact HIA
I Used to provide command and signal output

L1L2L3
1 relating to electrical tripping of the 7
circuit-breaker (trip position +) as is required,
HIA
for example, for mesh network switches. No
I pulse is produced when the switch is opened
1 or closed manually, or by a motor operator.
L1L2L3
HIA
• Indication that the switch is in the tripped
position
+ I • Switch position indication only if tripping
L1L2L3
is caused by, for example, overcurrent,
short-circuit, test or voltage release. No
HIA
fleeting contact when switched on or off
0rI manually or switched off with the motor
(exception: manual switch off with motor
Switch on operator NZM2, 3, 4).
0RI
Switch off
+RI
Trip
Q contacts closed
q contacts opened

7-5
Circuit-breakers
Contact sequence of the auxiliary contacts
Early-make auxiliary contact HIV
Used to provide command or signal outputs from
NZM 1, 2, 3
I processes which are initiated before the closure or
1
L1L2L3
opening of the main contact system. Because they
HIV
close early, they can be used for interlocks with other
switches. Furthermore, they allow a switch position
I indication.
1
L1L2L3 The HIV has the same position in the tripped position of
HIV the circuit-breaker and the off position of the
circuit-breaker. Because of their early-make feature, they
+ I can be used for energizing the undervoltage release
1
L1L2L3 (a section “Undervoltage releases”, page 7-4).
HIV
NZM 4
I 0rI
1
L1L2L3 Switched on
7 HIV
0RI
I Switch off
1
L1L2L3 +RI
HIV
Trip
+ I
Q contacts closed
1
L1L2L3
q contacts opened
HIV

Circuit-breakers
Internal circuit diagrams
NZM1
Contact elements M22-K10 (K01) from the
L1
L2
L3
1.13
1.11
4.13
4.11
3.13
3.23
RMQ-Titan range from Moeller are used
-Q1 for the auxiliary contacts. Two early-make
auxiliary contacts (2 NO) are also
available.
Maximum component fitting:
I> I> I> NZM

HIN HIA HIV
4.14
1.12
4.12
3.14
3.24
1.14
1 2 3 4
T1
T2
T3
HIN, 1 NO or 1 NC 1 2 3 3
HIA, 1 NO or 1 NC 1 1 1 2
HIV, 2 NO 1 1 1 1
7
NZM2
Details about the auxiliary
L1
L2
L3
1.23
1.21
1.13
1.11
4.13
4.11
3.13
3.23
contacts: a section
-Q1 “Maximum component
fitting:”, page 7-7
I> I> I>

HIN HIA HIV
1.22
4.14
1.24
1.12
4.12
3.14
3.24
1.14
T1
T2
T3

7-7
Circuit-breakers
Internal circuit diagrams
NZM3
Details about the
L1
L2
1.23
L3
1.33
1.21
1.31
1.13
1.11
4.13
4.11
3.13
3.23
auxiliary contacts:
-Q1 a section
“Maximum
component
fitting:”, page 7-7
I> I> I>

HIN HIA HIV
1.24
1.22
1.32
4.14
1.34
1.12
4.12
3.14
3.24
1.14
T1
T2
T3
NZM4
Details about
L1
the auxiliary
L2
1.23
L3
1.33
1.21
1.31
1.13
1.11
4.13
4.23
4.11
4.21
3.13
3.23
7 -Q1 contacts:
a section
“Maximum
component
fitting:”,
I> I> I> page 7-7
HIN HIA HIV
1.24
1.22
1.32
4.14
4.24
1.34
1.12
4.12
4.22
3.14
3.24
1.14
T1
T2
T3

Circuit-breakers
Remote switch-off with voltage releases
Remote switch-off with undervoltage releases
L1 N
L1
(L+) (L-, L2)
(L+)
-S.
-S.
D1
D2
-Q1
D1
-Q1 U<
D2
N
(L-, L2)
Remote switch-off with shunt release
L1 N 7
L1
(L+) (L-, L2)
(L+)
-S.
-S.
C1 1.13
C2 -Q1
HIN
-Q1 1.14
C1
1.13
1.14 -Q1
C2
N
(L-, L2)

7-9
Circuit-breakers
Remote switch-off with voltage releases
Main switch application in processing machines with Emergency-Stop function conform to
the IEC/EN 60204-1 standard
In the OFF position of the main switch all control
elements and control cables which exit the
-S.
control panel are voltage free. The only live
components are the control-voltage tap-offs with
the control lines to the early-make auxiliary
L1 L2 L3 N contact.
D1
HIV
-Q1
D2
-Q1 U<
E1 -Q1
NZM
-S.
L1 L2 L3
D1
3.13 HIV
3.14 -Q1
D2
-Q1 U<
E1
-Q1
NZM
For
Circuit-breakers
Application of the undervoltage release
Shut off of the undervoltage release
L1 N The early-make auxiliary contact HIV (Q1) can –

(L+) (L-, L2) L1 as shown above – disconnect the undervoltage
(L+) release from the control voltage when the
circuit-breaker is in the Off position. If the
undervoltage release is to be disconnected in 2
3.13 poles, then a further normally open contact of Q1
HIV
D1 -Q1 must be connected between terminals D2 and N.
D2 3.14
The early-make auxiliary contact HIV (Q1) will
always apply voltage to the undervoltage release
in time to permit closure.
-Q1
D1
-Q1 U<
3.13 D2
3.14
N
(L-, L2)
7
Starting interlock of the undervoltage release
L1 N Circuit-breakers with undervoltage release

(L+) (L-, L2) L1 produce a positive Off position in conjunction
(L+) with interlocking auxiliary contacts on the starter
D1 (S5), ancillary devices on the motor (e.g. brush
D2 -S5 lifting, S6) or on all switches in multi-motor
1.13 drives.
-S6 -Q1 The circuit-breaker cannot be closed unless the
1.14
1.13 starter or switch is in the zero or Off position.
D1
1.14
-Q1 U<
-S6 -S5 D2
N
(L-, L2)

7-11
Circuit-breakers
Shutdown of the undervoltage release
Interlocking of several circuit-breakers using an undervoltage release
L1 N L1
(L+) (L-, L2) (L+)
1.21 1.21
-Q2 -Q1
1.22 1.22
D1 D1
D1 D1
-Q1 U< -Q2 U<
D2 D2 D2 D2
1.21 1.21 N
-Q1 -Q2
1.22 1.22 (L-, L2)
7
When interlocking 3 or more circuit-breakers,
each circuit-breaker must be interlocked with the
series-connected normally closed contacts of the
auxiliary contacts on the other circuit-breakers
using one contactor relay – for contact
duplication – per auxiliary contact. If one of the
circuit-breakers is closed, the others cannot be
closed.
For
Circuit-breakers
Indication of the switch position
On and Off indication using standard auxiliary contacts HIN (Q1)
L1 N
(L+) (L-, L2)
-F0
L1 -F0 L1 -F0
(L+) (L+)
1.13 1.21 1.11
-Q1
1.14 1.22 1.14 1.12
1.21 -P2
X1 X2
1.22
-Q1
1.13 -P1 X1 X1 X1 X1
X1 X2
1.14 -P1 -P2 -P1 -P2
X2 X2 X2 X2
N N
(L-, L+) (L-, L+) 7
P1: On
P2: Off
Tripped indication using trip-indicating auxiliary contact HIA (Q1)

Trip-indicating auxiliary contacts for mesh network
switches
L1 N
(L+) (L-, L2)
-F0
L1 -F0
X1
(L+)
-P1 4.13
X2 -Q1
4.13 4.14
X1
4.14
-Q1 -P1
X2
N
(L-, L+)
P1: Tripped

7-13
Circuit-breakers
Short-time delayed circuit-breaker – internal circuit diagrams
Time-discriminating network topology
Short-time delayed circuit-breakers NZM2(3)(4)...-VE...
NZM2(3)(4)/VE enable a time-discriminating Trip block VE
network design with variable stagger times. Adjustable short-time delay:
Where the prospective short-circuit currents are 0, 20, 60, 100, 200, 300, 500, 750, 1000 ms
extremely high, additional installation protection
is achieved by instantaneous releases, which
respond without any delay.
L1
L2
L3
-Q1
7
I>
I>
For
Circuit-breakers
Mesh network circuit-breaker
NZM1, NZM2, NZM3, NZM4
Circuit with capacitor unit and shunt release mesh network circuit-breaker can be undertaken
230 V, 50 Hz. independently of the circuit-breaker.
The configuration of the capacitor unit which Connect the NZM-XCM to the power feed side!
provides the energy for the shunt release of the
18 24
19
20 23
22
21
19 24
USt
19 24
7
24 V H
18
b 18
20 23 20 NZM-XCM 23 HIN-NZM...
L1 NZM-XCM L1 51 (C1)
a
230 V 53 (C2)
HIN-NZM... 230 V
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
51 (C1)
53 (C2)
21 22 21 22
N N
a Mesh network relay b Mesh network relay with low-capacity contacts

7-15
Circuit-breakers
Remote operation with motor operator
Two-wire control Three-wire control Three-wire control with

automatic return to the Off
position after tripping
NZM2, 3, 4
L1 L1 L1
(L+) (L+) (L+)
0 I HIA
P1 0 P1 0 P1
I I
70 71 72 70 71 72 70 71 72
NZM-XR 75 NZM-XR 75
NZM-XR 75
74 74 74
N N N
(L-, L2) (L-, L2) (L-, L2)
7
For
Circuit-breakers
as a transformer switch
Faults upstream of the low-voltage sides. This interlocking with the high-voltage
circuit-breaker, e.g. in the transformer itself, are circuit-breaker must always be provided when
disconnected by suitable protective devices (e.g. a transformers are being operated in parallel.
Buchholz relay) on the high-voltage side. The S7 If only one normally open contact is available as
auxiliary contact of the high-voltage the auxiliary contact, an undervoltage release
circuit-breaker trips out the NZM transformer must be used instead of the shunt release. At the
switch on the low-voltage side in order to prevent same time, this provides protection against
feedback to the high-voltage network. S7 thus undervoltage.
isolates the transformer from the network on both
Circuit-breaker with shunt release Q1 Circuit-breaker with undervoltage

release Q1
L1 N L1
(L+) (L-, L2) L1 N
(L+) L1
(L+) (L-, L2)
(L+)
-S7 -S7
-S7
-S7
C1
C2 D1
Q1 D2 7
C1 Q1
-Q1 D1
C2
-Q1 U<
D2
N
(L-, L2) N
(L-, L2)

7-17
Circuit-breakers
with residual-current release
NZM2-4-XFI, XFI30
These circuit-breakers with integrated residual
current protection offer: N L1 L2 L3
• Overload protection
• Short-circuit protection 0+I
• Fault-current protection Q1
In addition to the protective functions, this
NZM74-...
circuit-breaker can perform the functions of a
main switch with isolating characteristics. Like
RCCB's built conform to VDE 0664, the residual
current release recognises AC and DC fault
currents. The residual-current release NZM74-...
and NZM2-4-FI(30) are “pulse current sensitive”.
The NZM2-4-FIA(30) is sensitive to AC and DC. In
the event of a fault the circuit-breaker disconnects I I I I
the fault circuitry. The residual-current protective
switches for the NZM2-4 and NZM74 are built and
tested to IEC/EN 60 947 and VDE 0664 Part 3.
The residual-current release requires no external
7 auxiliary voltage for tripping. For the switch rated
FIP
I n tv
current range 30–250 A at rated voltages
200–690 V (NZM2-4) and 380 – 690 V (NZM74),
rated fault currents IDn = 0.1-0.5*-1-3 A and
delay times tV ˜ 60-150-300-450 ms can be set in 햲
steps. The XFI30 or FIP30 trips at a rated fault
current of 30 mA.
* 0.3 at NZM74 a Test button
For
Circuit-breakers
Residual-current relay PFR with ring-type transformer
The area of application for the relay/transformer The fault current relay indicates when a fault
combination ranges – depending on the standards current has exceeded the predefined fault current
involved – from personnel protection to fire by using a changeover contact. The contact signal
prevention to general protection of systems for can be processed further as a signal in
1 to 4-pole electrical power networks. programmable logic controllers or can initiate a
There are three different relay types and seven trip via the undervoltage release of a
different transformer types available. They cover circuit-breaker/switch-disconnector. The compact
operating currents ranging from 1 to 1800 A. The ring-type transformer is placed without any
three relay types are: particular space requirement at a suitable position
• Rated fault current 30 mA, permanently set in the power chain.
• Rated fault current 300 mA, permanently set
• Rated fault current from 30 mA to 5 A and a
delay time from 20 ms to 5 s which is variable
in stages.
230 V AC g 20 %
50/60 Hz L1 L2 L3 N
3VA 7
N L 1S1
1S2
5 6 7 8
> 3 m – 50 m
LOAD
1 2 3 4
NO C NC
50/60 Hz 250 V AC 6A

7-19
Circuit-breakers
Trip of circuit-breakers with shunt release and possible external reset of the relay by a
pushbutton (NC contact)
N L1 L2 L3
-S.
6A
5 6 7 8
NZM.-XA... C2
7
C1
1 2 3 4
1S1
1S2 PFR-W
LOAD
For
Circuit-breakers
Trip of circuit-breakers with undervoltage release and possible external reset of the relay
by a pushbutton (NC contact)
N L1 L2 L3
-S.
6A
5 6 7 8
NZM.-XU... D2
U< 7
D1
1 2 3 4
1S1
1S2 PFR-W
LOAD

7-21
7
7-22
Terminal assignment of the control circuit plug
IZM circuit-breakers
Circuit-breakers
Control circuit plugs X8, X7, X6, X5 are identical Internal Terminals External
X8: optional control circuit plug X8

(Connections X8:1 to X8:8 only XFR remote reset 14 L/L+
with IZM...-U... and IZM...-D...) G-converter S2
13
N/L- Us
12
G-converter S1 11
e.g.1)
a Electronic IZM-XW(C) N-converter S2 10
Jumper with no
overload release IZM-XW(C) N-converter S1 9
N-converter
External voltage transformer star 8 L1
External voltage transformer L3 7 L2
External voltage transformer L2 a L3
6
External voltage transformer L1 5 N
0 V DC 4 24 V DC external
24 V DC 3 power supply
Internal system bus + 2
Internal system bus – 1 Terminating resistor,

if no external
X7: optional control circuit plug X7 system bus module
Internal
External
Not available with 14
communication Tripped signalling switch XHIA 13
IN Enable
function IZM- 12
DPWrite Free
1
XCOM-DP. Signal state 11 IZM-XCOM-DP
2
At the position of Spring-operated stored energy 10
3
X7 a communications module XEE electrically “ON” 9 L/L+ Us
is located. 8
Free
– +
7
5
XHIS signalling switch on 6
Close
– +
first voltage release 5 1) Convertor in
6
4
transformer star point
XE
3
8
XHIS signalling switch on or summation current
Open
– + OUT
2
second voltage release convertor 1200 A/1 A
9
1
XU
XA,
Circuit-breakers
X6: standard control circuit plug
X6 L/L+
XE/A first shunt release 14 Us
13 N/L-
12
Standard auxiliary switch XHI: S1 “NO” 11
10
Standard auxiliary switch XHI: S1 “NC” 9
8 N/L-
Closing release XE/A 7 L/L+ US
6
“Ready to close” auxiliary switch XHIB
5
4
Standard auxiliary switch XHI: S2 “NO”
3
2
Standard auxiliary switch XHI: S2 “NC”
1

X5: optional control circuit plug X5
Only XUV “non-delayed trip” 14 Emergency-stop
13 or jumper
XA1, XU, XUV second voltage release 12 L/L+
11
N/L- US
10
Standard auxiliary contact XHI11/XHI22/XHI31: S3 “NO”, XHI40: S7 9
8
Standard auxiliary contact XHI11/XHI22/XHI31: S3 “NC”, XHI40: S7 7
6
Standard auxiliary contact XHI22: S4 “NO”, XHI31/XHI40: S8 “NO” 5
4
Standard auxiliary contact XHI22: S4 “NC”, XHI31/XH40: S8 “NO” 3
Motor operators a b L/L+
M 2
Optional motor cut-off switch XMS 1 N/L- US
a black-white, b brown
7-23
For Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616 7

7
For
Control circuit isolator
XHI: S1, XHI: S2 XHI11(22)(31): S3, XHI22: S4 oder XHI40: S7, XHI40: S8
Standard-Hilfsstromschalter optionale Zusatz-Hilfsstromschalter
Standard auxiliary switches Optional auxiliary switches
Klemmen
Terminals Circuit-breakers
Leitungsnummer IZM circuit-breakers
Wire no.
Intern
Internal
Leitungsnummer
Wire no.
Klemmen
Terminals

Signalling switch
XHIB XHIF XHIS XHIS1 XHIA

Einschalt- Speicher- Meldeschalter Meldeschalter Ausgelöst-
bereitschafts- zustands- erster Spannungsauslöser XA zweiter Spannungsauslöser Melde-
meldung meldung XA1, XU oder XUV schalter
“Ready to “Spring Signal 1st voltage release Signal 2nd voltage release Bell switch
close” charged” energized XA1, XU or XUV energized alarm
signal signal
Circuit-breakers
Klemmen
Terminals
Leitungsnummer
Wire no.
color
Trip
Reset
energized
energized
de-energized
de-energized
XA1
Intern
Internal
XHIB XHIF XHIS XA XHIS1 XU XHIA
XUV
color
Leitungsnummer
Wire no.
Klemmen
Terminals
7-25
7
7
For
Voltage release/electrical manual reset
Optional: XA1 zweiter Arbeitsstromauslöser

XA XU Unterspannungsauslöser oder
erster Arbeitsstromauslöser XUV Unterspannungsauslöser, verzögert
Option: 2nd shunt release or
undervoltage release or
undervoltage release with delay
1 st shunt release
Circuit-breakers
Klemmen
Terminals
Leitungsnummer
Wire no.
color
Intern
Internal XHIS XA XHIS1 XA1 XU XUV
Leitungsnummer
Wire no.
Klemmen
Terminals
*) Emergency-stop or jumper

Closing release/electrical ON
XEE XE
Elektrisch "EIN" Einschaltmagnet
Electrical "ON" Closing release
Circuit-breakers
Klemmen
Terminals IZM circuit-breakers
Leitungsnummer
Wire no.
XEE
3
Intern
Internal XE
Leitungsnummer
Wire no.
Klemmen
Terminals
7-27
7
7
For
Motor operator, remote reset magnet
XM XM XFR Fern-Rücksetzmagnet
Motorantrieb Motorantrieb S13 Abstellschalter für
Optional: Motorabstellschalter XMS Fern-Rücksetzung
XFR remote reset coil

Motor operator Charging motor S 13 cut-off switch for
optional: motor cut-off switch XMS remote reset coll
Klemmen Circuit-breakers
Terminals
Leitungsnummer
Wire no.
color
XMS
Intern
Internal XFR
color
Leitungsnummer
Wire no.
Klemmen
Terminals

Protective circuits for overcurrent release with breaker status sensor and metering module
Circuit-breakers
Auslösemagnet für Elektronischer Messmodul Interner Systembus
Überstromauslösung Überstromauslöser
Trip magnet for Overcurrent Metering module Breaker Status Sensor Internal system bus
overcurrent release
release 1)
Klemmen
Terminals
-
Spannungswandler
G-Wandler N-Wandler Voltage transformer
G sensor N sensor
Messmodul
Metering module
Internal system bus

Interner Systembus

Intern
-
Internal
XZM... +
BSS-Modul
BSS module
7-29

7
7-30
Protective circuits for overcurrent release, metering module only
Circuit-breakers
Auslösemagnet für Elektronischer Messmodul Interner Systembus
Überstromauslösung Überstromauslöser
Trip magnet for Overcurrent Metering module Internal system bus

overcurrent release
release 1)
Klemmen
Terminals
-
Spannungswandler
G-Wandler N-Wandler
Voltage transformer
G sensor N sensor
Messmodul
Metering module
Internal system bus

Interner Systembus

Intern
Internal
-
+
XZM...

Protective circuits for overcurrent release, breaker status sensor only
Circuit-breakers
Auslösemagnet für Elektronischer
Überstromauslösung Überstromauslöser Breaker Status Sensor Interner Systembus
Trip magnet for Overcurrent Breaker Status Sensor Internal system bus
overcurrent release
release 1)
Klemmen
Terminals
-
G-Wandler N-Wandler
G sensor N sensor
Internal system bus

Interner Systembus

Intern
-
Internal
XZM... +
BSS-Modul
BSS module
7-31

Notes
For
All about Motors
Page
Motor protection 8-3
Engineering notes 8-13
Circuit documentation 8-17
Power supply 8-19
Control current supply 8-22
Contactor markings 8-23
Direct-on-line start of
three-phase motors 8-24
Direct-on-line start with

motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZ2 8-32
Control circuit device for direct-on-line start 8-36
Star-delta starting of 8
three-phase motors 8-37
Star-delta starting with

motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZ2 8-46
Control circuit devices for

star-delta starting 8-49
Pole-changing motors 8-51
Motor windings 8-54
Multi-speed contactors 8-57
Multi speed switch for three-phase motors 8-59
Control circuit devices for

multi-speed contactors UPDIUL 8-67
Multi speed switch for three-phase motors 8-72
Multi speed switch with motor-protective

circuit-breaker PKZ2 8-87

8-1
All about Motors
Page
Three-phase automatic stator starters 8-89
Three-phase automatic rotor starters 8-94
Switching of capacitors 8-98
Duplex pump control 8-102
Fully automatic pump control 8-104
Off position interlock of the loads 8-108
Fully automatic main transfer switch with

automatic reset 8-109

All about Motors
Motor protection
Overload relay with manual reset
They should always be used where continuous Back-up fuses and instantaneous
contact devices (two-wire control) are releases
concerned (e.g. pressure and position
switches), to prevent automatic restarting. The They are needed to protect not only the motor,
reset button can be fitted as an external but also the relay, against the effects of short
feature in order to make it accessible to all circuits. Their maximum rating is shown clearly
personnel. Moeller overload relays are always on every relay and must be adhered to without
supplied with manual reset but can be fail. Higher ratings – chosen for instance
converted to automatic reset by the user. according to the cable cross-section – would
lead to the destruction of the motor and relay.
Overload relays with automatic reset The following important questions and
answers give a further guide to the behaviour
They can be used only with pulsed contact of an installation with motor protection.
devices (three-wire control) such as
pushbuttons etc., because on these, the
To what current must the overload relay
cooling of the bimetal strips cannot lead to
properly be set?
automatic reconnection.
To the rated motor current - no higher, no
Special circuitry lower. A relay set to too low a figure will 8
prevent the full utilization of the motor; set too
Special circuitry such as is found in star-delta high, it will not guarantee full overload
starters, individually compensated motors, protection. If a correctly set relay trips too
current transformer-operated relays etc. may frequently, then either the load on the motor
require that the relay setting deviates from the should be reduced or the motor should be
rated motor current. exchanged for a larger one.
Frequently recurring operating cycles When is it right for the overload relay to
It makes motor protection difficult. The relay trip?
should be set to higher than rated motor Only when the current consumption of the
current in view of its shorter time constant. motor increases due to mechanical
Motors which are rated for a high frequency of overloading of the motor, undervoltage or
operation will stand this setting to a certain phase failure when the motor is under full load
degree. Although this will not ensure complete or thereabout, or when the motor fails to start
protection against overload, it will due to a stalled rotor.
nevertheless provide adequate protection
against non-starting.

8-3
All about Motors
Motor protection
When does the overload relay fail to trip 3-pole overload relays should be so connected
in good time although the motor is in the case of single-phase and DC motors so
endangered? that all three poles of the overload relay carry
With changes in the motor which do not cause the current, whether in single-pole or 2-pole
an increase in current consumption: Effects of circuits.
humidity, reduced cooling due to a reduction 1-pole 2-pole
in speed or motor dirt, temporary additional
external heating of the motor or bearing wear.
What causes destruction of the over-

load relay?
Destruction will take place only in the event of
a short circuit on the load side of the relay An important characteristic feature of overload
when the back-up fuse is rated too high. In relays conforming to IEC/EN 947-4-1 are the
most cases, this will also endanger the tripping classes (10 A, 10, 20, 30). They
contactor and motor. Therefore, always determine different tripping characteristics for
adhere to the maximum fuse rating specified the various starting conditions of motors
on every relay. (normal starting to heavy starting).
8

All about Motors
Motor protection
Response values
Response limits of time-delayed overload
relays at all-pole load.
Type of Multiple of current setting Refer-
overload ence
relay ambient
temper-
A B C D ature
t>2h tF2h Tripping Tripping Tripping Tripping
starting class time in class time in
from cold minutes seconds
state of 10 A F2 10 A
relay 10 F4 10 2 < T F 10
20 F8 20 4 < T F 10
30 F 12 30 6 < T F 20
9 < T F 30
Non-ambient 1.0 1.2 1.5 7.2 + 40 °C
temperature
compensated
thermal relays
and magnetic
relays 8
Ambient 1.05 1.2 1.5 7.2 + 20 °C
temperature
compensated
thermal relays
In the case of thermal overload relays with a

current setting range, the response limits must
apply equally to the highest and the lowest
setting of the associated current.

8-5
All about Motors
Motor protection
Response limits of 3-pole thermal overload
relays at 2-pole load
Type of thermal overload Multiple of current setting Reference
relay ambient
tempera-
A B ture
t > 2 h, starting tF2h
from cold state of
relay
Ambient temperature 3 poles 1.0 2 poles 1.32 + 20 °C
compensated, without 1 pole 0
phase-failure sensitivity
Non-ambient temperature 3 poles 1.0 2 poles 1.25 + 40 °C
compensated, without 1 pole 0
phase-failure sensitivity
Ambient temperature 2 poles 1.0 2 poles 1.15 + 20 °C
compensated, with 1 pole 0.9 1 pole 0
8 phase-failure sensitivity
In the case of thermal overload relays with a The point of destruction is the point of
current setting range, the response limits must intersection between the projected tripping
apply equally to the highest and the lowest curves and the multiple of the current.
setting of the associated current.
Short-circuit rating of the main circuit
Overload capacity With currents that exceed the breaking
Overload relays and releases have heating capacity of the motor starter in relation to the
coils which can be thermally destroyed by utilization category (EN 60947-1), it is
overheating. The making and breaking permissible for the current flowing during the
currents of the motor flow in thermal overload operating time of the protective device to
relays which are used for motor protection. damage the motor starter.
These currents are between 6 and 12 x Ie The permissible behaviour of starters under
(rated operational current), depending on the short-circuit conditions is defined in the
utilization category and the size of the motor. so-called types of co-ordination (1 and 2). It is
The point of destruction depends on the frame common practice to state in the details of
size and design and is usually approximately protective devices which type of co-ordination
12 to 20 x Ie. is ensured by them.

All about Motors
Motor protection
Type “1” co-ordination The tripping characteristic of the overload
In the event of a short circuit the starter must relay must not differ from the given tripping
not endanger persons and installations. It does curve after a short circuit.
not have to be fit for renewed operation
without repair. Short-circuit withstand strength of the
auxiliary contact
Type “2” co-ordination
In the event of a short circuit the starter must The manufacturer details the required
not endanger persons and installations. It overcurrent protective device. The
must be fit for renewed operation. There is a combination is subjected to three test
risk of contact welding for which the disconnection's at 1000 A prospective current
manufacturer must give maintenance with a power factor between 0.5 and 0.7 at
instructions. rated operational voltage. Welding of the
contacts may not occur (EN 60947-5-1).
Motor protection in special applications

Heavy starting duty overload relay Z00. It is used principally for
An adequate tripping delay is essential in medium and large motors.
order to allow a motor to start up smoothly. In Up to two times rated current Ie, the
the majority of cases, overload relays ZB, transformation ratio I1/I2 of the saturable core 8
motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ(M) or current transformers is practically linear.
circuit-breakers NZM can be used. The tripping Within this range it does not differ from the
delays can be taken from the tripping normal overload relay, i.e. it provides normal
characteristics in the Moeller Main Catalogue, overload protection during normal operation.
Industrial Switchgear. However, within the transformer characteristic
In the case of especially high-inertia motors, range (I > 2 x Ie) , the secondary current no
whose run-up time exceeds the tripping delay longer increases proportionally to the primary
of the above devices, it would be completely current.
wrong to adjust an overload relay which This non-linear increase in the secondary
tripped out before the run-up time expired, to current produces an extended tripping delay if
a current level higher than the rated motor overcurrents greater than twice rated current
current. This would, it is true, solve the starting occur, and hence permits longer starting
problem, but the motor would no longer be times.
adequately protected during normal
operation. However, there are other solutions Adjusting the current transformer-oper-
to the problem: ated relay ZW7 for lower motor ratings
The setting ranges quoted in the Moeller Main
Current transformer-operated relay ZW7 Catalogue, Industrial Switchgear apply when
The ZW7 consists of three special saturable the incoming cable is looped once through the
core current transformers, supplying an transformer relay.

8-7
All about Motors
Motor protection
If the current transformer-operated overload current is then carried by the overload relay.
relay ZW7 is required to provide protection to Provided it has been set correctly to the rated
a motor of below 42 A rating (minimum value motor current, this will ensure full motor
in the setting range of 42 A to 63 A), the protection during operation. Starting must be
necessary range adjustment is achieved by monitored.
looping the incomer several times through the The motor is a limiting factor with regard to
aperture in the relay. The change in the rated the tripping delay of the current
motor current quoted on the rating plate is transformer-operated relay and the bridging
inversely proportional to the number of loops. period. One must ensure that the motor is able
Example: to tolerate the high temperature generated by
With the ZW7-63 relay, which has a setting direct starting, for the prescribed starting time.
range from 42 A to 63 A, a motor rating of 21 Motor and starting procedure have to be
A to 31.5 A can be accommodated by looping selected carefully when dealing with machines
the leads twice through the relay. having a very large rotating mass, which are
practically the only ones subject to this
problem when direct starting is used.
Bridging of motor protection during
Depending on the operating conditions
starting
adequate protection of the motor winding may
For small motors the bridging of the motor no longer be given by an overload relay. In that
protection during starting is more economical. case it must be weighed up whether an
8 Because of the additional parallel contactor, electronic motor-protective relay ZEV or a
the overload relay does not carry the full thermistor overload relay EMT 6 in conjunction
current during starting. Only when the motor with an overload relay Z meets the
has reached full speed is the bridging requirements.
contactor switched off and the full motor
Star-delta starter (y D)
Non-reversing
Changeover time with overload relay in position
A: < 15 s B: > 15 < 40 s C: > 40 s
Ie Ie Ie
B
-Q11 -Q15 -Q13 -Q11 -Q15 -Q13 -Q11 -Q15 -Q13

A C
Setting of the overload relay

0.58 x Ie 1 x Ie 0.58 x Ie
Full motor protection in Y Only partial motor protection Motor not protected in Y
(star) position in y position (star) position

All about Motors
Motor protection
Multi-speed switch
2 speeds One tapped winding 3 speeds
2 separate windings 1 x tapped winding
+ 1 winding
-Q17 -Q21 -Q23 -Q17 -Q21 -Q23 -Q17 -Q11 -Q21
Attention must be paid to short-circuit protection of the overload relays.

Separate supply leads should be provided if required.
Heavy starting duty
Current transformer-operated Bridging of motor protection Bridging during starting using

relay ZW7 during starting bridging relay 8
-Q11 -Q11 -Q12 -Q11 -Q12
For medium and large motors For small motors; no protection Automatic cut out
during starting

8-9
All about Motors
Motor protection
Individually compensated motor
Ie = Rated motor operational current [A] Iw = I e xy [ A ]

Iw = Active cur. } Proportion of motor
2 2
Ib = Reactive cur. rated operational current [A] Ib = I e – I w [ A ]
Ic = Rated capacitor current [A] Ic = –6
U e× 3 × 2πf × C × 10 [ A ]
P c × 10 3
IEM = Setting current of overload relay [A] Ic = ------------------
3 × Ue
cos v = Motor power factor
Ue = Rated operational voltage [V]
Pc = Rated capacitor output [kvar]
C = Capacitance of capacitor [mF]
Capacitor connected
to contactor terminals to motor terminals
8
-Q11 -Q11
PC
IEM IEM
PC
Setting IEM of overload relay

I EM = 1 × I e I EM = I w2 + ( I b – I c )
2
Capacitor does not relieve loading of cable Capacitor relieves loading of cable between
between contactor and motor. contactor and motor; normal arrangement.
For
All about Motors
Motor protection
Thermistor relay for machine protection relays
Thermistor overload relays are used in • Rotor-critical
conjunction with temperature-dependent Squirrel-cage motors whose rotor in the
semiconductor resistors (thermistors) for event of stalling reaches the permissible
monitoring the temperature of motors, temperature limit earlier than the stator
transformers, heaters, gases, oils, bearings winding. The delayed temperature rise in the
etc. stator can lead to a delayed tripping of the
Depending on the application, thermistors thermistor overload relay. It is therefore
have positive (PTC thermistors) or negative advisable to supplement the protection of
(NTC thermistors) temperature coefficients. rotor-critical motors by a conventional
With PTC thermistors the resistance at low overload relay. Three-phase motors above
temperature is small. From a certain 15 kW are usually rotor-critical.
temperature it rises steeply. On the other Overload protection for motors in accordance
hand, NTC thermistors have a falling with IEC/EN 60204. These standards specify
resistance-temperature characteristic, which that motors above 2 kW used for frequent
does not exhibit the pronounced change starting and stopping should be adequately
behaviour of the PTC thermistor characteristic. protected for this type of duty. This can be
achieved by fitting temperature sensors. If the
temperature sensor is not able to ensure
Temperature monitoring of electric
adequate protection with stalled rotors, an 8
motors
overcurrent relay must also be provided.
Thermistor overload relays EMT6 comply with
Generally, where there is frequent starting and
the characteristics for the combination of
stopping of motors, intermittent operation and
protective devices and PTC sensors to VDE
excessive frequency of operation, the use of
0660 Part 303. They are therefore suitable for
overload relays in conjunction with thermistor
monitoring the temperature of series motors.
overload relays is to be recommended. In order
When designing motor protection, it is to avoid premature tripping out of the
necessary to differentiate between overload relay in these operating conditions, it
stator-critical and rotor-critical motors: is set higher than the predefined operational
• Stator-critical current. The overload relay then assumes
Motors whose stator winding reaches the stalling protection; the thermistor protection
permissible temperature limit quicker than monitors the motor winding.
the rotor. The PTC sensor fitted in the stator Thermistor overload relays can be used in
winding ensures that the stator winding and conjunction with up to six PTC sensors to DIN
rotor are adequately protected even with a 44081 for direct monitoring of temperatures in
stalled rotor. EEx e motors compliant to the ATEX directive
(94/9 EC). Copies of PTB certification are
available on request.

8-11
All about Motors
Motor protection
Protection of current and temperature-dependent motor-protective devices
Protection of the motor under Using Using Using

the following conditions bimetal thermistor bimetal and
thermistor
Overload in continuous operation + + +

Extended starting and stopping (+) + +
Switching to stalled rotor + + +
(stator-critical motor)
Switching on stalled rotor (+) (+) (+)
(rotor-critical motor)
Single-phasing + + +
Intermittent operation – + +
Excessive frequency of operation – + +
Voltage and frequency fluctuations + + +
8 Increased coolant temperature – + +
Impaired cooling – + +
+ Full protection
(+) Partial protection
– No protection
For
All about Motors
Notes on engineering
Three-phase automatic starters
I Md I Three-phase automatic stator resistance starters
with starting resistors
a Single or multi-step resistors are connected upstream of the
I'
three-phase squirrel-cage motors to reduce the starting
current and torque.
Md
With single-step starters, the starting current is
b approximately three times the motor full-load current. With
M'd
multi-step starters, the resistors can be so designed that the
20 40 60 80 100 %
n starting current is only 1.5 to 2 times the motor full-load
current, with a very low level of starting torque.
I Md I
Three-phase automatic stator resistance starters
with starting transformers
a This type of starting is preferable where the same starting
torque is to be obtained as with the primary resistance
starters but the starting current taken from the mains is to
I'
Md be further reduced. A reduced voltage Ua (approximately
b 70 % of the rated operational voltage) is supplied to the
M'd
motor when starting via the starting transformer. Thus, the 8
20 40 60 80 100 %
n current taken from the mains is reduced to approximately
half the direct starting current.
I Md Three-phase automatic rotor starters with starting

resistors
Resistors are connected in the rotor circuit of the motor to
reduce the starting current of motors with slip-ring rotors.
The current taken from the mains is thus reduced. In
contrast to stator resistance starters, the torque of the
motor is practically proportional to the current taken from
the mains. The number of steps of the automatic starter is
20 40 60 80 100 %
n determined by the maximum permissible starting current
and by the type of the motor.
I: line current
Md: torque
n: speed
a Reduction of the line current
b Reduction of the torque

8-13
All about Motors
Important data and features of three-phase automatic starters
1) Style of starter Stator resistance starter (for squirrel-cage motors) Rotor starter (for
slipring rotors)
2) Type of starter Star-delta With starting With starting trans- Rotor resistance
switches resistors formers starter
3) Number of 1 only Normally 1 Normally 1 Selectable (no

starting stages longer selectable
when current or
torque have been
determined)
4) Voltage 0.58 x rated Selectable: Selectable: None

reduction at the operational a x rated 0.6/0.7/0.75 x Ua
motor voltage operational (transformer
voltage tappings)
(a < 1) e.g. 0.58
as with yd
starter
5) Starting current 0.33 x inrush a x inrush Selectable (see 4) Selectable: from 0.5
taken from mains current at rated current at rated 0.36/0.49/0.56 x to about 2.5 x
operational operational inrush current at rated current
voltage voltage rated operational
8 voltage
5a) Starting As above As above Selectable (see 4) As above

current at the 0.6/0.7/0.75 x Ie
motor
6) Starting torque 0.33 x tightening a2 x tightening Selectable (see 4) Selectable (see 5)

torque at rated torque at rated 0.36/0.49/0.56 x from 0.5 to pull-out
operational operational volt- tightening torque at torque
voltage age rated operational
voltage
7) Current and Proportional Current reduction Proportional Current reduction

torque reduction less than torque much greater than
reduction torque reduction.
From pull-out torque
to rated speed
almost proportional
8) Approximate 150–300 350–500 500–1500 500–1500

price (for similar
data).
DOL starting =
100 (with overload
relay, enclosed)
For
All about Motors
Switching of capacitors
DIL contactors for capacitors – individual switching
Individual compensation Group compensation
L1...3 L1...3
-F1 -F1
-Q11 -Q31 -Q11
M -C1 M M M
3 -C1 3
3 3
-M1 -M1 -M2 -M3 8
When capacitors are switched on, contactors A discharge circuit or discharge device must
are heavily stressed by transient current peaks. reduce the residual voltage of the capacitor to
When a single capacitor is switched on, less than 50 V within a minute of the capacitor
currents up to 30 times the rated current can being switched off.
occur; these can, however, be reliably
switched by Moeller DIL contactors.
When installing capacitors, the VDE
specification 0560 part 4 (Germany) and the
standards which apply to each country should
be observed. According to these, capacitors
not directly connected to an electrical device
which forms a discharge circuit, should be
equipped with a rigidly connected discharge
device. Capacitors connected in parallel to the
motor do not require a discharge device, since
discharging is performed via the motor
winding. No switch-disconnectors or fuses
must be installed between the discharge
circuit and the capacitor.

8-15
All about Motors
Contactor for capacitor DIL…K – Individual and group compensation
Group compensation
L1...3
-F1 -F2 -F3

-Q1 I>
-Q11 -Q12 -Q13
-Q31 -Q32
a
M M M -C0 -C1 -C2

3 3 3
-M1 -M2 -M3
a Additional inductance with standard

contactor
8
In the case of group compensation where If no special contactors are available, the
capacitors are connected in parallel, it must be inrush currents can be damped by additional
noted that the charging current is taken not inductance's. This is achieved either by longer
only from the mains but also from the incoming leads to the capacitors or by
capacitors connected in parallel. This produces inserting an air-cored coil with a minimum
inrush current peaks which can exceed 150 inductance of approximately 6 mH
times the rated current. A further reason for (5 windings, diameter of the coil
these peak currents is the use of low-loss approximately 14 cm) between contactor and
capacitors as well as the compact capacitor. The use of series resistors is another
construction, with short connecting elements way of reducing high inrush currents.
between contactor and capacitor.
Use of reactors
Where standard contactors are used, there is Frequently the capacitors in group
danger of welding. Special contactors for compensation are provided with reactors to
capacitors such as those available from avoid harmonics. The reactors also act to limit
Moeller in the DILMK… range, which can the inrush current and normal contactor can be
control inrush current peaks of up to 180 times used.
the rated current, should be used here.
For
All about Motors
Circuit documents
General
Circuit documents serve to explain the Classification according to the type of
function of circuits or electrical connections. representation
They provide information for the construction,
installation and maintenance of electrical Simplified or detailed
installations. • Single-line or multi-line representation
The supplier and the operator must agree on • Connected, semi-connected or separate
the form in which the circuit documents are to representation
be produced: paper, film, diskette, etc. They • Topographical representation
must also agree on the language or languages In addition to this, there is the
in which the documentation is to be produced. process-orientated representation with the
In the case of machines, user information must function chart (see previous pages).
be written in the official language of the Examples for drawing up circuit documents are
country of use to comply with EN 292-2. given in IEC/EN 61082-1.
The circuit documents are divided into two
groups: Circuit diagrams
Diagrams indicate the voltage-free or
Classification according to the purpose current-free status of the electrical installation.
Explanation of the mode of operation, the A distinction is drawn between: 8
connections or the physical position of the • Block diagram: simplified representation of
components. These include: a circuit with its main parts, which shows
• Explanatory circuit diagrams, how the electrical installation works and
• Block diagrams, how it is subdivided.
• Equivalent circuit diagrams, • Circuit diagram: detailed representation of a
• Explanatory tables or diagrams, circuit with its individual components, which
• Flow diagrams, tables shows how the electrical installation works.
• Time flow diagrams, tables • Equivalent circuit diagram: special version of
• Wiring diagrams, an explanatory circuit diagram for the
analysis and calculation of circuit
• Device wiring diagrams,
characteristics.
• Interconnection diagrams,
• Terminal diagrams,
• Assignment diagrams.

8-17
All about Motors
Circuit documents
L1, L2, L3
L1
L2
L3
Q1 1 3 5 13
Q
14
I> I> I>I>

2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5
Q11 Q12 Q11 Q12
2 4 6 2 4 6
PE
U V W
M M
3~ 3~
Circuit diagram: 1-pole and 3-pole representation
8
Wiring diagrams
Wiring diagrams show the conductive • Terminal diagram: representation of the
connections between electrical components. connection points of an electrical
They show the internal and/or external installation and the internal and external
connections but, in general, do not give any conductive connections connected to them.
information on the mode of operation. Instead • Assignment diagram (location diagram).
of wiring diagrams, wiring tables can also be representation of the physical position of the
used. electrical equipment, which does not have
• Unit wiring diagram: representation of all to be to scale.
the connections within the device or You will find notes on the marking of electrical
combination of devices. equipment in the diagram as well as further
• Interconnection diagram: representation of diagram details in the section “Specifications,
the connections between the device or Formulae, Tables”.
combination of devices within an
installation.
For
All about Motors
Power supply
4-conductor system, TN-C-S
L11 a Protective earth conductor

L21 Protective earth terminal in enclosure
L31 (not totally insulated)
N
햲
PE
L1 L2 L3 N PEN
Overcurrent protective device is required in

the supply for compliance to IEC/EN 60204-1
5-conductor system, TN-S supply system

8
L11 a Protective earth conductor
L21 Protective earth terminal in enclosure
L31 (not totally insulated)
N
L1 L2 L3 N PE


8-19
All about Motors
Power supply
3-conductor system, IT supply system
L11
L21
L31
N
PE
L1 L2 L3 N

For all systems: use the N conductor only with
the agreement of the user
8
L1 Separate primary and secondary
L3 protection
Earthed control circuit. In non-earthed control
1 3 5 circuit, remove link and provide insulation
monitoring.
I I I
2 4 6
L01
L02
For
All about Motors
Power supply
L1 Combined primary and secondary

L3 protection
Earthed control circuit. In non-earthed control
circuit, remove link and provide insulation
1 3 5
monitoring.
Maximum ratio of U1/U2 = 1/1.73
I> I> I>
Circuit not to be used with STI/STZ (safety and
2 4 6
isolating transformers).
L01
L02

8-21
All about Motors
Control circuit supply
L1 Separate primary and

L2
L3 secondary protection, with
insulation monitoring on the
1 3 5
L011 secondary side
a Clear button
I. I. I. b Test button
2 4 6
PE
ab
0 L01
A1 15 S1 S2 E
L E 15
R< E
A1 A2 16 18
16 18 L A2
L02
DC power supply with

L1 three-phase bridge rectifier
8 L2
L3
1 3 5
I I I
2 4 6
Yy0
– +
For
All about Motors
Contactor markings
The contactors in contactor combinations mains contactor with anticlockwise rotation
have, in accordance with EN 61346-2 for for high speed).
equipment and function, the code letter Q, as The following table shows the marking used in
well as numerical identification, which shows this Wiring Manual and in Moeller circuit
the function of the component (e.g. Q22 = documentation.
Type of Mains contactors Step contactors
component
Standard motor 2 speed/4 speed
3 speed
One speed Low speed High speed
For- Reve- For- Reve- For- Reve- Star Delta Starting Remarks
ward rse ward rse ward rse stage
Up Down Up Down Up Down
Hoist Lower Hoist Lower Hoist Lower
DIL (/Z) Q11
DIUL (/Z) Q11 Q12
SDAINL (/Z) Q11 Q13 Q15
SDAIUL (/Z) Q11 Q12 Q13 Q15
UPIL (/Z/Z) Q17 Q21 Q23
UPIUL (/Z/Z) Q17 Q18 Q21 Q22 Q23
8
UPSDAINL (/Z) Q17 Q21 Q23 Q19
U3PIL (/Z/Z/Z) Q11 Q17 Q21 Q23
UPDIUL (/Z) Q17 Q21
ATAINL (/Z) Q11 Q13 Q16 to 1-n
DAINL Qn start-
Q11
ing
DDAINL Q11 stages
DIL + discharge Q11 Q14
resistors
DIGL + dis- Q11
charge resistors
With contactor combinations which are made

up of several basic types, the basic type is
always maintained. Thus, the circuit diagram
for a reversing star-delta starter, for example,
is formed by combining the basic circuit of the
reversing contactor and that of the standard
star-delta starter.

8-23
All about Motors
Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors
Typical circuits with DIL contactors
Fuseless without overload relay Fuses with overload relay
Short-circuit protection1)and overload Short-circuit protection2) for contactor and
protection by means of PKZM overload relay by means of fuses F1.
motor-protective circuit-breaker or NZM Short-circuit protection3) for contactor by
circuit-breaker means of fuses F1.
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 13 -F1
-F1
14
-Q1
I> I> I>
1 3 5
2 4 6 -Q11
2 4 6
1 3 5
-F2
1 3 5
-Q11 97 95
-Q11 2 4 6
2 4 6
98 96
97 95
-F2
8 2 4 6 98 96
PE
U V W
PE
PE M
U V W
U V W
3
M
-M1
M 3
3
-M1
-M1
1) Protective device in the supply line in accordance with Moeller Main Catalogue, Industrial
Switchgear or AWA installation instructions
2) Fuse size in accordance with data on the rating plate of the overload relay
3) Fuse size in accordance with Moeller Main Catalogue, Industrial Switchgear (Technical data
for contactors)
For
All about Motors
Typical circuit with bridging of overload relay during starting
Without overload relay With overload relay
L1 L1
(Q11/1) (Q11/1)
-F0 -F0
95
13
-Q1 -F2 96
14
21 21
0 0
22 22
-S11 -S11
13 13
I I
14 14
14
14
-Q11 -Q11
13
13 8
A1
A1
-Q11 -Q11
A2
A2 N
N
F2 Q11 Q11 The short-circuit capacity of the contacts in the circuit has to be
96 14
0 I 13 considered when selecting F0.
Two-way pushbutton
21
21
22
22
14
13
13
14
A B
Control circuit device maintains itself after the button is enables via its
I: ON own auxiliary contact Q11/14-13 and
0: OFF pushbutton 0 (three-wire control contact).
For connection of further control circuit Contactor Q11 is de-energized, in the normal
devices a section “Three-wire course of events, by actuation of pushbutton 0. In
control”, page 8-36 the event of an overload, it is de-energized via
Method of operation: Actuation of the normally closed contact 95-96 on the
pushbutton I energizes the coil of contactor Q11. overload relay F2. The coil current is interrupted,
The contactor switches on the motor and and contactor Q11 switches the motor off.

8-25
All about Motors
Application on drive motors with severe

starting duty
For connection when used with
L1 L2 L3
motor-protective circuit-breakers
PKZM... and circuit-breakers NZM(H)...
-F1 a section “Fuses with overload relay”,
page 8-28
1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q11 -Q14
2 4 6 2 4 6
97 95
-F2
2 4 6 98 96
U V W PE
8 M
3
-M1
For
All about Motors
L1 Q14: Bridging contactor

(Q11/1) K1: Timing relay
-F0
95 13
-F2 -Q1
96 14
21
0
22
-S11
13 14 44 14
I -Q14 -Q14 -Q11
14 13 43 13
22
F2 Q14 Q11
96 14 22
-Q11 0 I
21
-S11
21
21
22
22
16
-K1
13
13
14
14
15 A B
A1 A1 A1
-Q14 -K1 -Q11
N
A2 A2 A2 8
Control circuit device
I: ON
0: OFF
For connection of further control circuit
devices a section “Three-wire
control”, page 8-36
Method of operation
Actuation of pushbutton I energizes the motor has been switched off by pressing
bridging contactor Q14 which then maintains pushbutton 0. The normally closed contact
itself via Q14/13-14. At the same time, voltage Q11/22-21 prevents Q14 and K1 closing whilst
is applied to the timing relay K1. The mains the motor is running. In the event of an
contactor Q11 is closed by Q14/44-43 and overload, normally closed contact 95-96 on
maintains itself via Q11/14-13. When the set the overload relay F2 effects de-energization.
time - which corresponds to the starting time
of the motor - has elapsed, the bridging
contactor Q14 is disconnected by K1/16-15.
K1 is likewise disconnected and, exactly as
Q14, can only be energized again after the

8-27
All about Motors
Two directions of rotation, DIUL reversing contactor
Fuseless without overload relay Fuses with overload relay
Short-circuit protection and overload Short-circuit protection1) for contactor and
protection by means of motor-protective overload relay by means of fuses F1.
circuit-breaker PKZM or circuit-breaker NZM. Short-circuit protection1) for contactor by
Fuse size in the supply line in accordance with means of fuses F1.
Moeller Main Catalogue, Industrial Switchgear
or AWA installation instructions.
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 13
-F1 -F1
14
-Q1 I>I>I>
2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q11 -Q12 -Q11 -Q12 -Q11 -Q12
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
97 95
-F2 -F2
2 4 6 98 96
8
U V W PE U V W PE U V W PE
M M M
3 3 3
-M1 -M1 -M1
1) Fuse size in accordance with data on the rating plate of the overload relay F2
For
All about Motors
Reversing after actuation of pushbutton 0 Reversing without actuation of pushbutton 0

L1 L1
(Q11/1) (Q11/1)
-F0 -F0
95 95
13 13
-Q1 -F2 -Q1 -F2
14 96 14 96
21 21
0 0
22 22
21 22 21 22
II I II I
22 21 22 21
-S11 -S11
14 13 14 13
I II I II
13 14 13 14
14 14 14 14
-Q11 -Q12 -Q11 -Q12
13 13 13 13
22
8
22 22 22
-Q12 -Q11 -Q12 -Q11

21 21 21 21
A1 A1 A1 A1
-Q11 -Q12 -Q11 -Q12
A2 A2 A2 A2
N N
Q11: Mains contactor, clockwise

Q12: Mains contactor, anticlockwise
Q11 F2 Q12 Q12 Control circuit Q11 Q11 F2 Q12 Q12

13 96 14 13 device 14 13 96 13 14
I 0 II I 0 II
(three-way
-S11 pushbutton) -S11
21
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
22
I = Clockwise
13
13
14
13
14
14
13
13
14
13
14
14
A B C 0 = Stop A B C
II = Anticlock-
wise

8-29
All about Motors
Method of operation: Actuation of anticlockwise direction). Depending on the
pushbutton I energizes the coil of contactor circuit, direction can be changed from
Q11. It switches on the motor running clockwise to anticlockwise either after
clockwise and maintains itself after button I is pressing pushbutton 0, or by directly pressing
enabled via its own auxiliary contact the pushbutton for the reverse direction. In the
Q11/14-13 and pushbutton 0 (three-wire event of an overload, normally closed contact
control contact). The normally closed contact 95–96 of the overload relay F2 or normally
Q11/22-21 electrically inhibits switch on of open contact 13–14 of the motor-protective
contactor Q12. When pushbutton II is pressed, circuit-breaker or circuit-breaker will switch.
contactor Q12 closes (the motor runs in the
Reversing and two speeds (reversing contactor)
Special circuit (tapped winding) for feed FORWARD: feed or high speed
drives, etc. RETRACT: high speed only
STOP: tapped winding
L1 L2 L3
8 -F1
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q17 -Q22 -Q21
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
97 95 97 95
-F21 -F2
2 4 6 98 96 2 4 6 98 96
PE
1U 2U
1V
M 2V
3
1W 2W
1 3 5 -M1
-Q23
2 4 6
For
All about Motors
L1 0: Stop
(Q17/1) I = Low speed –
-F0 FORWARD (Q17)
95
II = High speed –
-F2/F21 FORWARD (Q21 +
96
21
Q23)
0 III = High speed –
22
FORWARD (Q22 +
22
13
Q23)
III III
21 14
22
-S11 II 21
21
14
I I
13 22
13 14 14
II -Q21 -Q22
14 13 13
13 21 31
-Q17 -Q17 -Q17
14 22 32
31 22 22 32 8
-Q22 -Q22 -K1 -Q21
32 21 21 31
21
13 43
Q17: Feed forward
-Q21 -K1 -K1 Q21: High speed forward
22 14 44
22 13 44 Q23: Star contactor
-Q23 -Q23 -Q23 K1: Contactor relay
21 14 43
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 Q22: Retract high speed
-Q17 -Q21 -Q23 -K1 -Q22
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
N
Method of operation: Forward travel is High speed reverse is initiated by pushbutton

initiated by pressing pushbutton I or II III: Contactor relay K1 picks up and energizes
according to the speed required. Pushbutton I star contactor Q23 via K1/14-13. High-speed
switches on the feed motion via Q17. Q17 contactor Q22 is energized via the normally
maintains itself via its normally open contact open contacts, K1/43-44 and Q23/44-43, and
13-14. If the feed movement is to occur at high are maintained via Q22/14-13. The reverse
speed star contactor Q23 is energized via action can only be stopped via pushbutton 0.
pushbutton II which energizes the high speed Direct changeover/reversal is not possible.
contactor Q21 via its normally open contact
Q23/13-14. Both of the contactors are
maintained via Q21/13-14. A direct switch
over from feed to high-speed during the
process is possible.
8-31
All about Motors
Direct-on-line start with motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZ2
Reversing
L1 L2 L3
-Q1
I> I> I>
T1 T2 T3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 13 21 A1 13 21
-Q11 -Q12
8 A2 14 22 A2 14 11
I>> I>> I>> I>> I>> I>>

T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
U V W
M
3
-M1
Instead of the high-capacity contact modules
S-PKZ2, contact module SE1A…-PKZ2 can
also be used provided a switching capacity of
the circuit-breaker of 30 kA/400 V is sufficient.
For
All about Motors
Q11 Q1 Q12 Q12 Q11 Q11 Q12 Q12

13 1.14 14 13 13 14 14 13
I 0 II I 0 II
L1 -S11 L1 -S11
21
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
22
(Q11/1) (Q11/1)
13
14
13
13
13
14
14
13
13
14
14
14
-F0 A -F0
B C A B C
1.13 1.13
-Q1 -Q1
1.14 1.14
21 21
0 0
22 22
21 22 21 22
-S11 II -S11 II
22 21 22 21
14 13 14 13
I I
13 14 13 14
14 14 14 14
-Q11 -Q12 -Q11 -Q12
13 13 13 13
22 22 22 22 8
-Q12 -Q11 -Q12 -Q11
21 21 21 21
A1 A1 A1 A1
-Q11 -Q12 -Q11 -Q12
A2 A2 A2 A2
N N
a a
a Stop
S11 RMQ-Titan, M22-… 14 14

-Q11 -Q12
Q1 PKZ2/ZM-… 13 13
Q12 S/EZ-PKZ2 a
22 22
Q11 S/EZ-PKZ2
-Q12 -Q11
F0 FAZ 21 21
a remove links with position switches

8-33
All about Motors
Two speeds
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21 L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21

Instead of the
-Q1 -Q2 high-capacity contact
1.14 1.22 1.14 1.22 modules S-PKZ2,
contact module
I> I> I> I> I> I> SE1A…-PKZ2 can
also be used provided
T1 T2 T3
A1 13 21 A1 13 21 a switching capacity
-Q17 -Q21 of the circuit-breaker
A2 14 22 A2 14 22
I>> I>> I>> I>> I>> I>> of 30 kA/400 V is
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
sufficient.
1U 2U
1V M 2V
1W 3 2W
-M1
1U 2U
1W 1V 2W 2V
n< n>
For
All about Motors
Version 1 Version 2
Q17 Q2 Q21 Q21 Q17 Q17 Q2 Q21 Q21
13 1.14 14 13 13 14 1.14 14 13
L1 I 0 II L1 I 0 II
(Q17/1) (Q17/1)
-S11 -S11
21
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
22
-F0 -F0
1.13
13
13
13
14
14
13
1.13
13
14
13
14
14
14
-Q1 -Q1
1.14 A B C 1.14 A B C
1.13 1.13
-Q2 -Q2
1.14 1.14
21 21
0 0
22 22
21 22 21 22
-S11 II -S11 II
22 21 22 21
n> n>
14 13 14 13
I I
13 14 13 14
n< 14 14 n< 14 14
-Q17 13
-Q21 13
-Q17 13
-Q21 13
22 22 22 22
8
-Q21 -Q17 -Q21 21
-Q17 21
21 21
A1 A1 A1 A1
-Q17 -Q21 -Q17 -Q21
A2 A2 A2 A2
N N
Stop n< n> Stop n< n>
S11 RMQ-Titan, M22-… –

Q1, Q2 PKZ2/ZM-…/S –
Q21 S-PKZ2 n>
Q17 S-PKZ2 n<
S11 RMQ-Titan, M22-… –

8-35
All about Motors
Control circuit device for direct-on-line start
Typical example of circuits with contactor DILM…
Three-wire control
F2 Q11 Q11 Q11 F2 Q11 Q11

96 0 14 I 13 A2 96 14 13
0 I 0 I
-S11 -S11
22
22
21
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
13
13
14
14
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
A B A B
X1 X2
Illuminated pushbutton Two two-way pushbuttons

F2 Q11 Q11 Q11 Q11 Q11 F2 Q11 Q11 F2
14 13 96 1 0 I 1
96 A2 14 13 14 13 96
0 I 0
Start Start
22
22
0 1 Start 0 I 1
21
21
1 1
14
13
14
13
2* S11 2* S11
3 3
A B C 4 4
8 Two-way pushbutton with T0-1-15511 spring-return T0-1-15366 spring-return

indicator light switch with automatic return switch with automatic return
to position 1 to position of rest
Two-wire control
Q11 Q11 F2 Q11 F2 F2 Q11
14 13 96 I ON 96 A1
0 A1 96
OFF
0 1 2 1 3 5
1
I4 Q
P> 2 4 6
2* S11
1
3
4 -S12
Changeover switch Pressure switch MCS Float switch SW

T0-1-15521 with fleeting
contact in the intermediate
position
For
All about Motors
Star-delta switching of three-phase motors
Star-delta starters with overload relay
Arrangement in the motor line

The star-delta starter with overload relay,
including a thermally delayed overcurrent
relay are situated in a standard circuit
1 3 5
configuration in the leads leading to the
-Q11 motor terminals U1, V1, W1 or V2, W2, U2.
2 4 6
The overload relay is also operational in the
star connection as it is in series with the motor
97 95
-F2 winding and the relay current flowing through
96
2 4 6 98
it = rated motor current x 0.58.
U1 V1 W1 The complete circuit diagram a section
“Automatic star-delta starters SDAINL”,
page 8-39.
Arrangement in the mains supply line

Instead of the arrangement in the motor line,
-F1 the overload relay can be placed in the mains 8
supply line. The section shown here
97 95 indicates how the circuit differs from that on
-F2 a section “Automatic star-delta starters
2 4 6 98 96
SDAINL”, page 8-39. For drives where the F2
relay trips out when the motor is starting in
-Q11
1 3 5 the star circuit, the F2 relay rated for the
2 4 6 rated motor current can be switched in
U1 V1 W1 the mains line. The tripping delay is thus
increased by approximately four to six times.
In the star circuit the current also flows
through the relay but here the relay does not
offer full protection since its limit current is
increased to 1.73 times the phase current. It
does, however, offer protection against
non-starting.

8-37
All about Motors
Configuration in the delta circuit
Instead of the arrangement in the motor line
or mains supply line, the overload relay can be
1 3 5 1 3 5 placed in the delta circuit. The section shown
-Q15 -Q13
2 4 6 2 4 6 here indicates the modified circuit diagram
97 95 from a section “Automatic star-delta
-F2 starters SDAINL”, page 8-39. When heavy,
2 4 6 98 96
long-starting procedures are involved (e.g. for
centrifuges) the F2 relay, rated for relay
V2 W2 U2
current = rated motor current x 0.58, can
also be connected in the connecting lines
between the delta contactor Q15 and the star
contactor Q13. In the star circuit no current
then flows through the F2 relay. The motor is
therefore not protected when starting. This
circuit is always used when exceptionally
heavy and long starting procedures are
involved and when saturable core current
transformer-operated relays react too quickly.
8
For
All about Motors
Automatic star-delta starters SDAINL
L1 L2 L3
21
1 3 5 13
-Q1
14 22
B -F1
I> I> I>
2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q11 -Q15 -Q13
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
97 95
A -F2
2 4 6 98 96
8
PE
U1 V2
V1 M W2
W1 3 U2
-M1
Arrangement and rating of protective devices
Position A Position B
F2 = 0.58 x Ie Q1 = Ie
with F1 in position B ta F 15 s ta > 15 – 40 s
Motor protection in y and d configuration Only partial motor protection in y
configuration
Rating of switchgear Q13 = 0.33 x Ie

Q11, Q15 = 0.58 x Ie

8-39
All about Motors
Further notes on the configuration of the overload relay a section “Automatic star-delta
starters SDAINL”, page 8-39.
Automatic star-delta starters SDAINL00AM to 4AM250

Pushbutton Two-wire control
L1 L1
(Q11/1) (Q11/1)
-F0 -F0
95
HAND 95
13
-F2 -Q1 -F2
96 14 96 2
4
I
21 -S14 P >
0 2 MCS 1
22
-S14 Q
-S11 1
13 14 SW 14
I -Q11 -Q11
14 13 13
44 14 14 14 14
17 17 44
-Q11 -Q13 -Q15 -Q11 -Q13 -Q15
-K1 -K1
8 43 13 13
18 28 43 13 13
22
22
-Q15 -Q13 F2 Q11 Q11
21 21
96 14 13
0 I
-S11
21
21
22
22
A1 A1 A1 A1
-K1 -Q13 -Q15
13
-Q11
14
13
14
A2 A2 A2 A2 A B
N
Q11: Mains contactor Two-way pushbutton
K1: Timing relay approx. 10 s Control circuit
Q13: Star contactor device
Q15: Delta contactor I = ON
0 = OFF
For connection of further control circuit to star contactor Q13. Q13 closes and applies
devices a section “Control circuit devices for voltage to mains contactor Q11 via normally
star-delta starting”, page 8-49 open contact Q13/14–13.
Method of operation Q11 and Q13 maintain themselves via the
Pushbutton I energizes timing relay K1, the normally open contacts Q11/14–13 and
normally open contact K1/17–18 Q11/44–43. Q11 applies voltage to motor M1
(instantaneous contact) which applies voltage in star connection.
For
All about Motors
devices a section “Control circuit devices
for star-delta starting”, page 8-49
Method of operation Delta contactor Q15 closes and switches
Pushbutton I energizes star contactor Q13, the motor M1 to full mains voltage. At the same
normally open contact Q13/14–13 applies time, normally closed contact Q15/22–21
voltage to mains contactor Q11: Q11 closes interrupts the circuit of Q13, thus interlocking
and applies mains voltage to motor M1 in star against renewed switching on while the motor
connection. Q11 and Q13 maintain is running.
themselves via normally open contact The motor cannot be started up again unless it
Q11/14–13 and Q11 additionally via has previously been disconnected by
Q11/44–43 and pushbutton 0. Timing relay pushbutton 0, or in the event of an overload,
Q11 is energized at the same time as mains by the normally closed contact 95–96 of the
contactor K1. When the set changeover time overload relay F2, or via the normally open
has elapsed, K1 opens the circuit of Q13 via contact 13–14 of the motor-protective
the changeover contact 15–16 and closes the circuit-breaker or circuit-breaker.
circuit of Q15 via 15–18. Star contactor Q13
drops out.
For
All about Motors
Automatic reversing star-delta starter SDAIUL
Reversing
L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 13 21
-Q1
14 22
-F1
I> I> I>
2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q11 -Q12 -Q15 -Q13
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
97 95
-F2
2 4 6 98 96 8
PE
W1 V2
V1 M W2
U1 3 U2
-M1
Rating of switchgear Standard version: relay current = motor rated

Q11, Q12 = Ie current x 0.58
F2, Q15 = 0.58 x Ie For other arrangements of overload relay
Q13 = 0.33 x Ie a section “Star-delta starters with overload
relay”, page 8-37
The maximum motor output is limited by the
upstream reversing contactor, and is lower
than with automatic star-delta starters for only
one direction of operation

8-43
All about Motors
Reversing after actuation of pushbutton 0

L1 Three-way pushbutton
(Q11/1) Control circuit devices
I = Clockwise
-F0 0 = Stop
95
13 II = Anticlockwise
-F2 -Q1
96 14 Q11 F2 Q12 Q12
21 13 96 14 13
0 I 0 II
22
-S11
21
21
21
21 22
22
22
22
II I
22 21
13
14
14
13
13
14
-S11
14 II 13 A B C
I 14 44 44 14
13 -Q11 -Q12 -Q12 14
-Q11 13 43 43 13
17 17
-K1 -K1
18 28
22 22 22 22
-Q12 -Q15 -Q13 -Q11
21 21 21 21
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-Q11 -K1 -Q13 -Q15 -Q12
8 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
For
All about Motors
Reversing without actuation of pushbutton 0

(Q11/1) Control circuit devices
I = Clockwise
-F0 0 = Stop
95
13 II = Anticlockwise
-F2 -Q1
96 14 Q11 Q11 F2 Q12 Q12
21 13 14 96 14 13
0 I 0 II
22
-S11
21
21
21
21 22
22
22
22
II I
22 21
13
14
14
14
13
13
-S11
14 II 13 A B C
I 14 44 44 14 14
13 -Q11 -Q12
-Q11 13 43 43 -Q12 13
17 17
-K1 -K1
18 28
22 22 22 22
-Q12 -Q15 -Q13 -Q11

21 21 21 21
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-Q11 -K1 -Q13 -Q15 -Q12
N
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
8
For connection of further control circuit Delta contactor Q15 energizes and switches
devices a section “Control circuit devices for motor M1 to the delta configuration, i.e. full
star-delta starting”, page 8-49 mains voltage. At the same time, normally
closed contact Q15/22–21 interrupts the
Method of operation
circuit of Q13, thus interlocking against
Pushbutton I energizes contactor Q11 (e.g.
renewed switching on while the motor is
clockwise), pushbutton II energizes contactor
running. Motor direction can be changed,
Q12 (e.g. anticlockwise). The contactor first
either after pressing pushbutton 0, or by direct
energized applies voltage to the motor
actuation of the reverse button, depending
winding and maintains itself via its own
upon the circuit. In the event of an overload,
auxiliary contact 14–13 and pushbutton 0. The
disconnection is effected by the normally
normally open contact 44–43 fitted to each
closed contact 95–96 of the overload relay F2.
mains contactor energizes the star contactor
Q13. Q13 energizes and switches on motor
M1 in the star connection. At the same time,
timing relay K1 starts. When the set
changeover time has elapsed, K1/17–18
opens the circuit of Q13. Q13 drops out.
K1/17–28 closes the circuit of delta contactor
Q15.

8-45
All about Motors
Star-delta starting with motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZ2
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21
-Q1
1.14 1.22
U F 690 V
I> I> I>
L1 L2 L3
A1 13 21
T1 T2 T3 Q13
A2 14 22
I>> I>> I>>
T1 T2 T3
U F 500 V
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
1 3 5
A1 13 21 A1 13 21
-Q11 -Q15 -Q13
8 A2 14 22 A2 14 22 2 4 6
I>> I>> I>> I>> I>> I>>
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
1U 2V
1V M 2W
1W 3 2U
-M1
With Icc > Icn short-circuit proof installation required.
For
All about Motors
L1
(Q11/1)
-F0
1.13
-Q1
1.14
21
0
22
13 14
-S11 I -Q11
14 13
44 14
-Q11 -Q13 -K1
43 13 15
A2
16 18
22 22
-Q15 -Q13
21 21
8
A1 A1 A1 A1
-K1 -Q11 -Q13 -Q15
A2 A2 A2 A2
N
10 s N Y
2 x RMQ-Titan, M22-… with indicator light M22-L…T0-1-8 rotary switch

Q1 Q11 Q11 Q11 Q11 Q11 Q1
1.14 43 A214 44 44 14 1.14
0 I
0 1
S11 1
21 22 21 22 2 S11
3
13 14 13 14 4
A B

8-47
All about Motors
S11 RMQ-Titan, M22-…

Q1 PKZ2/ZM-…
dQ15 S/EZ-PKZ2
yQ13 DIL0M Ue F 500 V AC
yQ13 S/EZ-PKZ2 Ue F 660 V AC
K1 ETR4-11-A t t y (s) 15–40
Q11 S/EZ-PKZ2 N Motor (y) + d
protection
F0 FAZ Setting l
For
All about Motors
Control circuit devices for star-delta starting
Three-phase reversing contactor DIUL
reversing star-delta starter SDAIUL
F2 Q12 Q11 Q11 Q12 F2 Q11 Q12 Q12

96 I II 13 13 13 I A2 21 96 0 21 14 II 13
-S11 -S11
21
21
21
22
22
22
21
21
22
22
14
14
14
13
13
13
14
14
13
13
A B C D E
A B
Two-way pushbutton1)without Three-way pushbutton with indicator light. Reversing

self-maintaining circuit (inching) for after actuation of pushbutton 0
use only with reversing contactors
Q12 F2 Q11 1
0
2
0
1 2
13 96 13
1 0 2
1
2 FS 4011 FS 684
3
4
Spring-return switch 1) Changeover switch1)
8 T0-1-8214, without Switch T0-1-8210 remains
self-maintaining circuit in position 1 or 2
(inching)
Automatic return to 0 only for
reversing contactors
Q12 F2 Q12 Q11 0

1 2
14 96 13 13 START START
START 1 0 2 START
1
2
FS 140660
3
4 Spring-return switch
5
6 T0-2-8177 with automatic
7
8
return to position 1 or 2
Position switch Q11/13 Q12/13

Connected by removing the links Q12/22 Q11/22
between the contactor terminals
Q11/13 and Q12/22 and between
Q12/13 and Q12/22 and interposing
the position switches.
1) Overload relay always with manual reset
For
All about Motors
Pole-changing motors
The speed is determined by the number of be obtained by altering the number of poles.
poles on induction motors. Several speeds can The usual types are:
2 speeds 1:2 1 reversible tapped winding
2 speeds 2 separate windings
3 speeds 1 reversible tapped winding 1:2, 1 separate
winding
4 speeds 2 reversible tapped windings 1:2
2 speeds Tapped winding
The various tapped winding configurations The y/y y is preferred for better matching
give differential output ratios for the two of the motor to machines in which the torque
speeds increases by a quadratic factor (pumps, fans,
rotary compressors). Moeller multi-speed
Type of connection d/y y y/y y
starters can be used for both types of
Output ratio 1/1.5–1.8 0.3/1
connection.
The d/y y configuration comes nearest to 2 speeds – separate windings
satisfying the most usual requirement for In theory, motors with separate windings 8
constant torque. It has the additional allow any combination of speed and any
advantage that, because nine terminals are output ratio. Both windings are arranged in y
available, y/d starting can be used to connection and are completely independent of
provide smooth starting or to reduce the one another.
starting current for the low speed condition Preferred speed combinations are:
(a section “Motor windings”, page 8-54).
Motors with tapped 1500/3000 – 750/1500 500/1000
winding
Motors with separate – 1000/1500 – –
windings
No. of poles 4/2 6/4 8/4 12/6
Code no. low/high 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
The code numbers are prefixed to the main

notations to denote increasing speed.
Example: 1U, 1V, 1W, 2U, 2V, 2W.
Comparable to EN 60034-8.

8-51
All about Motors
Motor circuit
Circuit A Circuit B Circuit C
Selection of low and high Selection of either speed from Selection of either speed from
speed only from zero. No zero. Switching from low to zero. Switching back and
return to low speed, only to high speed possible. Return forward between low and high
zero. only to zero. speed (high braking torque).
Return also to zero.
High speed
Low speed
Off (zero)
Switch-on and further switching
Switch-off
3 speeds above the two tapped winding speeds. The

The 1:2 speeds - tapped windings - are circuit must consider it (a page 8-82).
supplemented by the speed of the separate Preferred speed combinations are:
8 winding. This speed can be below, between or
Speeds 1000/1500/3000 750/1000/1500 750/1500/3000 = separate
winding (in
No. of 6/4/2 8/6/4 8/4/2
the circuit
poles
diagrams)
Circuit X Y Z
For
All about Motors
Motor circuit
Circuit A Circuit B Circuit C
Selection of any speed only from Selection of any speed from Selection of any speed from
zero. Return only to zero. zero and from low speed. zero and from low speed.
Return only to zero. Return to low speed (high
braking torque) or to zero.
3rd speed
2nd speed
1st speed
Off (zero)
Switch-on and Switch-off

further switching
4 speeds
The 1:2 speeds - tapped windings - can follow
in sequence or overlap, as the following 8
examples show:
1st winding 500/1000 2nd winding 1500/3000 = 500/1000/1500/3000
or 1st 500/1000 2nd winding 750/1500 = 500/750/1000/1500
winding
For motors having 3 or 4 speeds the

non-connected winding has to be opened at
certain pole ratios to avoid inductive
circulating currents. This is achieved via
additional motor terminals. A range of rotary
switches is equipped with this connection
(a section “Multi-Speed Switches”,
page 4-7).

8-53
All about Motors
Motor windings
Tapped winding Tapped winding
2 speeds 3 speeds
Motor circuit Tapped winding Motor circuit X Motor circuit Y
2 speeds with yd starting at 2 windings, medium and 2 windings, low an
2 separate windings low speed high speed – tapped wind- speed – tapped win
ing
Low speed d Low speed y Low speed Low speed y 2 2
1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 1U
2W1
2W 3W 3W
2W 2V 2W2 2U2
2U1
1W 2V2 2V1 1V 3V 3V
2U 2V 3U 3U
1W 1V 2W 2V 1W
1W 1V
1W 2U 1V
High speed yy High speed yy High speed Low speed d or 2 or 2

2U 2U 2U 2W2 2U 1U
1U
1W 1V 2U1 2W1
8 1W 1V 3W 3V 3W 3V
1W 2U2
2W 1U 2V
2W
2V2 2V1 1V
1U 2V 2W 2V 2W 3U 2V 1W 3U 1
a page 8-59 a page 8-59 a page 8-63
Low speed Medium speed
Separate winding Separate winding
High speed yy 1 1
2U1 1U 2U
1W 2W2
2U2 1V
1U 2V2 1W 1V 2W
2W1 2V1
a page 8-72 a page 8-81 a page 8-83
For
All about Motors
Motor windings
Tapped winding
3 speeds
Motor circuit Tapped winding Motor circuit X Motor circuit Y Motor circuit Z
2 speeds with yd starting at 2 windings, medium and 2 windings, low and high 2 windings, low and medium
2 separate windings low speed high speed – tapped speed – tapped winding speed – tapped winding
winding
Low speed Low speed y 2 2 2

1U 1U 2U 1U 1U
2W1
3W 3W 2W
2W2 2U2
2U1
1W 2V2 2V1 1V 3V 3V 2V
3U 3U 2U
V 2W 2V 1W 1V 1W 1V
1W 1V
High speed Low speed d or 2 or 2 or 2

2U 2W2 2U 1U 1U
1U
2U1 2W1
3W 3V 3W 3V 2W 2V 8
1W 2U2
2W 2V2 2V1 1V
2V 2W 3U 2V 1W 3U 1V 1W 2U 1V
a page 8-63
Low speed Medium speed High speed
Separate winding Separate winding Separate winding
High speed yy 1 1 1
2U1 1U 2U 3U
1W 2W2
2U2 1V
1U 2V2 1W 1V 2W 2V 3W 3V
2W1 2V1
a page 8-72 a page 8-81 a page 8-83 a page 8-85

8-55
Notes
For
All about Motors
Multi-speed contactor
Certain operating sequences for multi-speed these possibilities. Multi-speed contactor
motors may be necessary, or undesirable, starters can achieve these circuits by
depending on the nature of the drive. If, for interlocking with suitable control circuit
example, the starting temperature rise is to be devices.
reduced or high inertia loads are to be
Fuse protection of the overload relay
accelerated, it is advisable to switch to low
When a common fuse is used in the supply
speed first and then to high speed.
line, it must not be larger than the back-up
It may be necessary to prevent switching from fuses specified on the rating plate of either
high to low speed in order to avoid overload relay, otherwise each relay must be
oversynchronous braking. In other cases, it protected by its own back-up fuse, as shown in
should be possible to switch each speed on the diagram.
and off directly. The operating sequence and
indexing facilities of rotary switches allow for
L1 L2 L3
-F11 -F1
1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q17 -Q21
2 4 6 2 4 6
97 95 97 95
-F21 -F2
2 4 6 98 96 2 4 6 98 96

8-57
All about Motors
Multi-speed contactor
Fuseless arrangement
Multi-speed motors can be protected against advantages of a fuseless circuit. Normally, the
short circuits and overloads by fuse in the supply line protects the switches
motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ or from welding.
circuit-breakers NZM, which provide all the
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13
14 14
-Q1 -Q2
I> I> I> I> I> I>
2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5
8 -Q17 -Q21
2 4 6 2 4 6
For
All about Motors
Multi speed switch for three-phase motors
Tapped winding, non-reversing, 2 speeds
Multi-speed contactors UPIL
Fuseless, without overload relay, with
motor-protective circuit-breaker or
circuit-breaker.
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13
14 14
-Q1 -Q2
I> I> I> I> I> I>
2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q21
2 4 6
-Q17
2 4 6
-Q23
2 4 6
8
PE
2U 1U
2V
M 1V
3
2W 1W
-M1
a section “Motor windings”, page 8-54

Synchronous speeds
One multi-speed winding

8-59
All about Motors
Motor terminals 1U, 1V, 1W 2U, 2V, 2W

No. of poles 12 6
rpm 500 1000
No. of poles 8 4
rpm 750 1500
No. of poles 4 2
rpm 1500 3000
Contactors Q17 Q21, Q23
Rating of switchgear
Q2, Q17 = I1 (low speed)
Q1, Q21 = I2 (high speed)
Q23 = 0.5 x I2
8
For
All about Motors
Circuit A (a page 8-53)
1 three-way pushbutton
L1 Q17 F21 Q21 Q21
(Q11/1) 13 96 14 13
I 0 II
-F0 -S11
21
21
21
22
22
22
13
14
13
13
14
14
13
-Q1 A B C
14
13
-Q2
14 Three-way pushbutton
I: Low speed (Q17)
21
0: Stop
0
-S11
22
II: High speed
21 22
(Q21 + Q23)
II I
22 21 Q17: Mains contactor, low speed
14
I II
13
Q23: Star contactor
13 14 Q21: Mains contactor, high speed
14 14
-Q17
13
-Q21 8
13
21 21
-Q21 -Q17
22 22
22
14
-Q23 -Q23
21 13
A1 A1 A1
-Q17 -Q23 -Q21
A2 A2 A2
For connection of further control circuit Speed can be changed either after pressing
devices a page 8-67, a page 8-68, pushbutton 0 (circuit A) or directly by pressing
a page 8-69 the appropriate pushbutton (circuit C),
depending upon the circuit. The motor can be
Method of operation
switched off either by pressing pushbutton 0,
Pushbutton I energizes mains contactor Q17
or in the event of an overload, by normally
(low speed). Q17 maintains itself via its
open contact 13–14 of the motor-protective
normally open contact 13 – 14. Pushbutton II
circuit-breaker or circuit-breaker.
energizes star contactor Q23 and via its
normally open contact 13–14 mains contactor
Q21. Q21 and Q23 maintain themselves via
normally open contact 13 – 14 of Q21.

8-61
All about Motors
Circuit C (a page 8-53)
(Q11/1) I: Low speed (Q17)
0: Stop
-F0 II: High speed (Q21 + Q23)
13 Q17 Q17 F21 Q21 Q21
-Q1 14 13 96 13 14
14 I 0 II
13 -S11
-Q2 21
21
21
22
22
22
14 13
14
13
13
14
14
21
A B C
0
22
-S11 21 22
II I
22 21
14 13
I II
13 14
14 14
8 -Q17
13
-Q21
13
22 21
-Q21 -Q17
21 22
21
14
-Q23 -Q23
22 13
A1 A1 A1
-Q17 -Q23 -Q21
A2 A2 A2
N
Q17: Mains contactor, low speed
Q23: Star contactor
Q21: Mains contactor, high speed

devices a page 8-70
For
All about Motors
2 separate windings, non-reversing, 2 speeds
Multi-speed contactor UPDIUL, fuseless
without overload relay
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13
14 14
-Q1 -Q2
I> I> I> I> I> I>
2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q17 -Q21
2 4 6 2 4 6
PE
1U 2U
1V M 2V
1W
3 2W
-M1
Q2, Q21 = I2 (high speed)

8-63
All about Motors
Multi-speed contactor UPDIUL, with fuses and
overload relay
L1 L2 L3
F1
F1
1 3 5 1 3 5
Q17 Q21
2 4 6 97 95 2 4 6 97 95
F21 F2
2 4 6 98 96 2 4 6 98 96
1U 2U
1V M 2V
1W 3 2W
M1
Fuse size in accordance with data on the rating

plate of the overload relays F2 and F21. If
overload relays F2 and F21 cannot be
protected by a common fuse, then use circuit
as in a page 8-57. a section “Motor
windings”, page 8-54.
For
All about Motors
Circuit A (a page 8-53) Circuit C (a page 8-53)

1 three-way pushbutton 1 three-way pushbutton
L1 L1
(Q17/1)
FO
-F0
95
13
FL1
Q1 F2 96
13 95
14
13 95 -Q1 -F2 96
14
Q2 F21 13 95
14 96
21
-Q2 -F21
14 96
0 21
22
S11 21 22 0
22
II I -S11 21 22
22 21
14 13 II I
22 21
I II
13 14 14 13
I II
13 14
14 14
Q17 Q21 14 14
13 13
-Q17 -Q21
22 22 13 13
Q21 Q17 22 22 8
21 21 -Q21 -Q17
21 21
A1 A1
Q17 Q21 A1 A1
A2 A2 -Q17 -Q21
N A2 A2
N
Q17: Mains contactor, low speed

Q21: Mains contactor, high speed
Q17 F21 Q21 Q21 Q17 Q17 F21 Q21 Q21
13 96 14 13 14 13 96 13 14
I 0 II I 0 II
-S11
21
21
21
-S11
22
22
22
21
21
21
22
22
22
13
14
13
13
14
14
13
13
14
14
13
14
A B C
A B C
Three-way pushbutton For connection of further control circuit

I: Low speed (Q17) devices, see a page 8-71.
0: Stop
II: High speed (Q21 + Q23)

8-65
All about Motors
Method of operation Speed can be changed either after pressing
Actuation of pushbutton I energizes the coil of pushbutton 0, or directly by pressing the
contactor Q17. Q17 brings in the motor at low appropriate pushbutton, depending upon the
speed, and after pushbutton I is released, circuit. The motor is switched off either by
maintains itself via its auxiliary contact 13–14 pressing pushbutton 0, or in the event of an
and pushbutton 0. overload, by normally closed contact 95–96 of
overload relays F2 and F21.
For
All about Motors
Control circuit devices for multi-speed contactors UPDIUL
Circuit A (a page 8-53)
One three-way pushbutton with indicator
lights
L1
-F0
95
-F2/F21
96
21
0
22
21 22
II I
22 21
13
14 II
I 14
13 14 14
-Q17 -Q21
13 13
22 22
A -Q21 -Q17 B 8
21 21
A1 A1
B -Q17 D -Q21
A2 A2
N
Q17 Q21 F21 Q17 Q21 Q21 Control circuit devices

13 A2 96 21 14 13 I = Low speed (Q17)
I 21 0 II
0 = Stop
-S11 II = High speed (Q21)
21
22
21
21
22
22
13
13
13
14
14
14
A B C D E

8-67
All about Motors
Circuit A (a page 8-53) 2 three-way pushbuttons
L1
-F0
95
-F2/F21
96
21
0a
22
21
0b
22
21 22
IIb Ib
14 13 21
22 Ia IIa 13
13 13 14 IIb
Ib 14
14
22 21
IIa Ia
21 22
14 14
-Q17 -Q21
8 13
22
13
22
A B
-Q21 -Q17
21 21
Q21 F21 Q17 Q21 Control circuit devices

13 96 13 14 I: Low speed (Q17)
Ia 0a IIa Ib 0b IIb
0: Stop
-S11 -S11
21
21
21
21
21
21
II: High speed (Q21)

22
22
22
22
22
22
Remove existing links and rewire

13
14
13
14
13
14
13
14
13
14
13
14
A B C A B C
For
All about Motors
Circuit A (a page 8-53) T0-1-8210 changeover switch

Always set overload relay to manual reset
L1 Q21 F2 Q17
13 96 13
-F0 1 0 2
1
2
95
3
S12
-F2/F21 4
96
1 2 2 4
-S12 -S12
1 3
14 14
-Q17 -Q21
13 13
22 22
A -Q21 -Q17 B
21 21
Circuit B (a page 8-53)

L1
-F0
8
95
-F2/F21
96
21
0 22
21
13
II II
22 14
14 14 14
I -Q17 -Q21
13 13 13
22 22
A -Q21 -Q17 B
21 21
A1 A1
-Q17 -Q21
A2 A2
N

8-69
All about Motors
Circuit B (a page 8-53)
2 three-way pushbuttons
L1
-F0
95
-F2(1) 96
21
0a 22
21
0b 22
21
IIb 22
21
IIa
22
14 14 14 14 13 13
Ib Ia -Q17 IIa IIb
13 13 13 -Q21 13 14 14
22 22
A -Q21 -Q17 B
21 21
Control circuit device for circuit B

Q17 Q17 F21 Q21 Q21
14 13 96 13 14
8 Ia 0a IIa Ib 0b IIb
21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22
13 14 13 14 13 14 S11 13 14 13 14 13 14 S11
A B C A B C
For
All about Motors
Circuit C (a page 8-53)
2 three-way pushbuttons
L1
-F0
95
-F2(1)
96
21
0a 22
21
0b
22
21 22
IIb 22
Ib 21
21 22
IIa Ia
22 21
14 14 14 14 13 13
Ib Ia -Q17 -Q21 IIa IIb
13 13 13 13 14 14
22 22
A -Q21 -Q17 B
21 21
Control circuit device for circuit C
Q17 Q21 F21 Q21 8

14 13 14 96 13
Ia 0a IIa Ib 0b IIb
-S11 -S11
21
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
22
13
13
14
14
13
13
14
13
13
14
14
14
A B C A B C

8-71
All about Motors
Tapped winding, non-reversing, 2 speeds
Multi-speed contactors UPSDAINL Fuseless
Star-delta starting at low speed Without overload relay
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13
14 14
-Q1 -Q2
I> I> I> I> I> I>
2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q17 -Q21
2 4 6 2 4 6
8
1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q23 6
-Q19
2 4 2 4 6
1U 1V 1W PE
2U2 2U1
2V2 3 2V1
2W2 Y 2W1
-M1
Q1, Q17 = I1
(low speed)
Q2, Q21 = I2
(high speed)
Q19, Q23 = 0,5 x I2
For
All about Motors
With fuses and overload relay
L1 L2 L3
-F1
1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q17 -Q21
2 4 6 2 4 6
97 95 97 95
-F2 -F21
2 4 6 96 2 4 6 98 96
98
1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q23 -Q19
2 4 6 2 4 6
1U 1V 1W PE
2U2 2U1
8
2V2 3 2V1
2W2 Y 2W1
-M1
F2, Q17 = I1
(low speed)
F21, Q21 = I2
(high speed)
Q19, Q23 = 0,5 x I2
F1 = I2
Overload relays F2 and F21 are not used on
multi-speed contactors without motor protec-
tion. If F2 and F21 cannot be protected by a
common fuse, then use circuit on
a page 8-57.
a section “Motor windings”, page 8-54.

8-73
All about Motors
L1 Circuit
(Q17/1) Low speed selected
-F0 only from zero, high
speed only via low
95
13 speed without
-Q1
14 96
95 actuation of the Stop
13
-Q2 -F21
14
button.
96
-S11 21 Three-way
0 22 pushbutton
I
13 I: Low speed
14 (Q17, Q19)
13 15 13
0: Stop
43 13
-Q17 -Q17 -Q23 -K3 -Q19 II: High speed
14 44 14 16 14
(Q21, Q19,
21 32 21 13 Q23)
II -Q19 II
22 31
-Q23 22 14
43
-Q21
22 22 14 44
-Q21 -Q19 -Q21 22
8 21 21 13 -Q17
21
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-Q17 -K3 -Q23 -Q19 -Q21
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
N
Q17: Mains contactor, low Q19: Delta contactor
Q17 Q17 F21 Q17 Q21 Q19
speed Q21: Mains contactor, 43 13 96 14 22 44 14
K3: Timing relay high speed I 0 II
Q23: Star contactor
-S11
21
21
21
22
22
22
Method of operation
13
14
13
14
13
14
Actuation of pushbutton I energizes the coil of A B C

star contactor Q23, and its normally open
contact 13–14 energizes the coil of contactor
Q17. The motor runs in star at low speed. The The motor runs in delta at low speed.
contactors are maintained via auxiliary contact Actuation of pushbutton II de-energizes the
Q17/13–14. At the same time, timing relay K3 coil of Q17 and via Q17/22–21 energizes the
cuts in. When the set time has elapsed, coil of Q21. This state is maintained by
K3/15–16 opens the circuit of Q23. Q23 drops Q21/43–44: The coil of star contactor Q23 is
out, the coil of delta contactor Q19 is re-energized by normally open contact
energized and maintains itself via Q19/13–14. Q21/14–13. The motor runs at high speed.
The timing relay is de-energized via normally Pushbutton 0 (= Stop) effects disconnection.
closed contact Q19/32–31.
For
All about Motors
Tapped winding, reversing, 2 speeds
(direction preselected)
Multi-speed contactors UPIUL

Overload relays F2 and L1 L2 L3
F21 are not used on
multi-speed contactors
without motor protection. -F1
1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q11 -Q12
2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q17 -Q21
2 4 6 2 4 6
97 95 97 95
-F2
2 4 6 98 96
-F21
2 4 6 98 96
8
1 3 5
Rating of switchgear -Q23
2 4 6
Q11, Q12 = I2 (low and
high speed)
F2, Q17 = I1 (low speed)
PE
F1, Q21 = I2
Q23 = 0.5 x I2 (high
speed)
1U 2U
M
1V 2V
1W 3 2W
-M1

8-75
All about Motors
L1 Five-way pushbutton
(Q11/1)
Circuit
-F0 Change of direction
95 FORWARD–REVERSE
-F2 96 after actuation of Stop
95
-F21 96
button, optionally
21
followed by
0 22
SLOW–FAST with no
-S11 21
22
return to low speed.
II I 21
22
14 14 44 44 13
I 13 -Q11 -Q11 -Q12 43 -Q12 13
13 43 14 II
14
21 22
IV
22 III
21
14 14 13 14
III -Q17 IV -Q21
13 13 14 13
21
21
-Q21 -Q17
22
22 22
14
8 -Q12 21
22
-Q23
22
21 -Q23
13
-Q11
21
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-Q11 -Q17 -Q23 -Q21 -Q12
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
N
Q11 Q12 Q12 Q17 Q11 Q17 Q17

Control circuit
F21
96 13 13 14 13 43 14 21 device
0 I II III IV 0: Stop
-S11 I: Forward (Q11)
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
II: Back (Q12)

14
13
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
III: Slow (Q17)

14
A B C D E
IV: Fast (Q21 + Q23)
Method of operation energizes high-speed contactors Q23 and

Contactor Q11 is energized by pressing Q21. Auxiliary contact Q21/21–22 makes
pushbutton I. Contactor Q11 selects the low-speed pushbutton III inoperative.
direction, and maintains itself after release of Pushbutton 0 must be pressed before any
pushbutton I via its auxiliary contact 14–13 change in speed or direction.
and pushbutton 0. Speed-selection buttons III
and IV are made operative by Q11/44–43.
Pushbutton III energizes Q17, which maintains
itself via its contact 14–13. Pushbutton IV
For
All about Motors
Tapped winding, reversing, 2 speeds
(Direction and speed selected simultaneously)
Multi-speed contactor UPIUL Fuseless without overload relay
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13
14 14
-Q1 -Q2
I> I> I> I> I> I>
2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q17 -Q18 -Q21 -Q22
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
8
PE
1U 2U
1V M 2V
1W 3 2W
1 3 5 -M1
-Q23
2 4 6
Q1, Q17, Q18 = I1
(low speed)
Q2, Q21, Q22 = I2
Q23 = 0.5 x I2
(high speed)

8-77
All about Motors
Multi-speed contactor UPIUL
With fuses and overload relay
L1 L2 L3
-F1
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q17 -Q18 -Q21 -Q22
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
97 95 97 95
-F2 -F21
2 4 6 2 4 6
98 96 98 96
8 PE
1U 2U
1V M 2V
1W 3 2W
1 3 5
-Q23
2 4 6 -M1
Rating of switchgear Overload relays F2 and F21 are not used on

F2, Q17, Q18 = I1 multi-speed contactors without motor protec-
(low speed) tion
F21, Q21, Q22 = I2
Q23 = 0.5 x I2
(high speed)
For
All about Motors
Circuit
Simultaneous selection of direction and speed
via one pushbutton. Always operate Stop
button before changeover.
L1
(Q17/1)
-F0
95
13
-Q1 -F2
14 96
13 95
-Q2 14
-F21
96
21
0
22
22 14 14 14 14 32
-Q23 -Q17 -Q18 -Q21 -Q22 -Q17

13
21
31
13 13 13 31
31 8
-Q22 -Q18 32
32
22
21 21
-Q21 21 -Q22 -K1
22 22
21 22
21 22
II I IV 22
III
21
22 21
-S11 14 13 14 13
I II III 13
IV 43
13 14 14
-K1 44
22 21 14 32 44
14
-Q18 -Q17 -Q23 -K1 -Q21 -Q23
21 22 13 31 43
13
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-Q17 -Q18 -Q21 -Q23 -K1 -Q22
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
N
Q17: Slow forward
Q18: Slow back
Q21: Fast forward
Q23: Star contactor
K1: Contactor relay
Q22: Fast back

8-79
All about Motors
F21 Q23 Q18 Q21 Q17 Q23 Q18 Q22 Five-way pushbutton
96 22 22 21 21 14 32 32 Control circuit device
0 I II III IV 0: Stop
-S11 I: Slow forward (Q17)
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
II: Slow back (Q18)

13
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
14
A B C D E III: Fast forward (Q21 + Q23)

IV: Fast back (Q22 + Q23)
Method of operation
Desired speed and direction can be selected by
actuation of the appropriate pushbutton.
Contactors Q17, Q18, Q21 and Q23 maintain
themselves by their contact 14–13 and can be
de-energized only by actuation of pushbutton
0. Contactors Q21 and Q22 can maintain
themselves only when Q23 has picked up and
contact Q23/13/13–14 or 44–43 is closed.
For
All about Motors
Tapped winding, medium and high speed,
non reversing, 3 speeds, 2 windings
Multi-speed contactor U3PIL Multi-speed contactor U3PIL with overload
relay a page 8-83
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13
14 14 14
-Q1 -Q2 -Q3

I> I> I> I> I> I> I> I> I>
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q17 -Q11 -Q21
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
8
1U 1V 1W PE
2U 3U
2V M 3V
2W
3 3W
1 3 5 -M1
-Q23
2 4 6
a section “Motor circuit X”, page 8-55 No. of 6 4 2

Synchronous speed poles
Rpm 1000 1500 3000
Winding 1 2 2
Contactors Q11 Q17 Q21,
Motor 1U, 1V, 2U, 2V, 3U, 3V,
Q23
terminals 1W 2W 3W
No. of 12 8 4 Rating of switchgear
poles
Rpm 500 750 1500
Q1, Q17 = I2 (medium speed)
No. of 8 4 2
poles Q3, Q21 = I3 (high speed)
Rpm 750 1500 3000 Q23 = 0.5 x I3

8-81
All about Motors
Circuit of motor winding: X Circuit A

Circuit A Selection of any speed only from zero.
L1 No return to low speed, only to zero.
(Q17/1)
F22 Q11 Q17 Q21 Q21
-F0 96 14 14 14 13
0 I II III
-Q1 13
-Q2
21
21
21
21
-Q3
22
22
22
22
14
21
0
13
14
14
13
13
13
14
14
22
A B C D
22
14
III 21 III
-S11 22 13
14
II II Circuit B
21 13
14
I -Q11
13
-Q17
13
-Q21
13 Selection of any speed from zero or from
14 14 14
13
32
low speed. Return only to zero.
22 22
-Q17 -Q11 21
-Q11 31
21 Q11 Q11 Q17 Q17 Q23 Q21
31 21 31 F22
-Q21 32 -Q21 22
-Q17 96 14 13 14 13 14 13
32
32 22 14
0 I II III
-Q23 -Q23 -Q23
31 21 13 -S11
21
21
21
21
A1 A1 A1
22
22
A1
22
22
-Q11 -Q17
8 A2 A2
-Q23
A2
-Q21
A2
13
14
14
13
13
13
14
14
N
A B C D
Q11: Low speed winding 1 Four-way pushbutton

Q17: Medium speed winding 2 0: Stop
Q23: High speed winding 2 I: Low speed (Q11)
Q21: High speed winding 2 II: Medium speed (Q17)
III: High speed (Q21 + Q23)
Method of operation overload, normally open contact 13–14 of the

Pushbutton I energizes mains contactor Q11 motor-protective circuit-breaker or
(low speed), pushbutton II mains contactor circuit-breaker can also switch off.
Q17 (medium speed), pushbutton III star
contactor Q23 and via its normally open
contact Q23/14–13 mains contactor Q21 (high
speed). All contactors maintain themselves by
their auxiliary contact 13–14. Speed sequence
from low to high is optional. Switching in steps
from high to medium or low speed is not
possible. The motor is always switched off by
pressing pushbutton 0. In the event of an
For
All about Motors
Tapped winding, low and high speed,
non-reversing, 3 speeds, 2 windings
Multi-speed contactor U3PIL Multi-speed contactor U3PIL without
overload relay a page 8-81
L1 L2 L3
F1
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
Q17 Q11 Q21
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 97 95 1 3 5 97 95 1 3 5 97 95
F2 F3 F4
2 4 6 98 96 2 4 6 98 96 2 4 6 98 96
8
2U 2V 2W
1U 3U
1V M 3V
1W
3 3W
1 3 5 M1
Q23
2 4 6
a section “Motor circuit Y”, page 8-55 Rpm 750 1000 1500
Synchronous speed
Contactors Q17 Q11 Q21,
Q23
Winding 2 1 2
Motor ter- 1U, 1V, 2U, 2V, 3U, 3V, Rating of switchgear
minals 1W 2W 3W
F2, Q17 = I1 (low speed)
No. of 12 8 6 F3, Q11 = I2 (medium speed)
poles
F4, Q21 = I3 (high speed)
Rpm 500 750 1000
Q23 = 0.5 x I3
No. of 8 6 4
poles

8-83
All about Motors
Circuit of motor winding: Y Circuit A
Circuit A Selection of any speed only from zero.
L1 No return to low speed, only to zero.
F0 F22 Q17 Q11 Q21 Q21
96 14 14 14 13
0 I II III
F2 95
F3 -S11
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
F4 96
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
S0 21
0 A B C D
22
S3 22 14
III III
21 13 Circuit B
S2 21 14 Selection of any speed from zero or
II II
22 13 from low speed. Return only to zero.
S1 14 13 13 13 Four-way pushbutton
I Q17 Q11 Q21
13 14 14 14 0: Stop
22 22 32 I: Low speed (Q17)
Q11 Q17 Q11
21 21
21
31
31
II: Medium speed (Q11)
31
Q21 Q21 Q17 III: High speed (Q21 + Q22)
32 22 32
32 22
8 Q23
31
Q23
21
Q23
14
13 F22 Q17 Q17 Q11 Q11 Q21 Q21
A1 A1 A1 A1 96 14 I 13 14 13 14 13
Q11 Q23 0 II III
Q17 Q21
A2 A2 A2 A2
-S11
21
21
21
21
N
22
22
22
22
Q17: Low speed winding 1

13
14
13
13
13
14
14
14
Q11: Medium speed winding 1 A B C D

Q23: High speed winding 2
Q21: High speed winding 2
Method of operation Speed sequence from low to high is optional.

Pushbutton I energizes mains contactor Q17 Switching in steps from high to medium or low
(low speed), pushbutton II mains contactor speed is not possible. The motor is always
Q11 (medium speed), pushbutton III star switched off by pressing pushbutton 0. In the
contactor Q23 and via its normally open event of an overload, normally closed contact
contact Q23/14–13 mains contactor Q21 (high 95–96 of overload relays F2, F21 and F22 can
speed). All contactors maintain themselves by also switch off.
their auxiliary contact 13–14.
For
All about Motors
Tapped winding, low and medium speed,
non-reversing, 3 speeds, 2 windings
Multi-speed contactor U3PIL Multi-speed contactor U3PIL without
overload relay a page 8-57
L1 L2 L3
F1
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
Q17 Q11 Q21
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 97 95 1 3 5 97 95 1 3 5 97 95
F2 F3 F4
2 4 6 98 96 2 4 6 98 96 2 4 6 98 96
8
2U 2V 2W
1U 3U
1V M 3V
1W
3 3W
1 3 5 M1
Q23
2 4 6
a section “Motor circuit Z”, page 8-55 Rpm 750 1500 3000
Synchronous speed Contactors Q17 Q21, Q11
Q23
Winding 2 2 1
Motor 1U, 1V, 2U, 2V, 3U, 3V,
terminals 1W 2W 3W F2, Q17 = I1 (low speed)
No. of poles 12 6 4 F4, Q21 = I2 (medium speed)
Rpm 500 1000 1500 F3, Q11 = I3 (high speed)
No. of poles 12 6 2
Q23 = 0.5 x I3
Rpm 500 1000 3000
No. of poles 8 4 2

8-85
All about Motors
Circuit of motor winding: Z Circuit A

Circuit A Selection of any speed from zero. No return
to low speed, only to zero.
L1 F22 Q11 Q17 Q21 Q21
(Q17/1) 96 14 I 14 II 14 III 13
0
-F0 -S11
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
-F2 95
-F21
13
14
13
14
13
13
14
14
-F22 96
A B C D
21
0
22
22
14 Circuit B
III III
-S11
21 13 Selection of any speed from zero or from low
22
14
II II speed. Return only to zero.
21 13
14 13
F22 Q11 Q11 Q17 Q17 Q23 Q23
13 13
I -Q17 -Q21 -Q11 96 14 13 14 13 14 13
0 I II III
13 14 14 14
22 32 22
-S11
21
21
21
21
-Q11 -Q11 -Q17

22
22
22
22
21 31 21
21 31 31
14
14
13
14
13
13
13
14
-Q21 22 -Q17 32 -Q21 32
8 -Q23
22
14
32 A B C D
21 -Q23 13 -Q23 31
A1 A1 A1 A1
-Q17 -Q23 -Q21 -Q11
A2 A2 A2 A2
N
Q17: Low speed winding 1 Four-way pushbutton
Q23: Medium speed winding 2 0: Stop
Q21: Medium speed winding 2 I: Low speed (Q17)
Q11: High speed winding 1 II: Medium speed (Q21 + Q23)
III: High speed (Q11)
Method of operation Speed sequence from low to high is optional.
Pushbutton I energizes mains contactor Q17 Switching in steps from high to medium or low
(low speed), pushbutton II mains contactor speed is not possible. The motor is always
Q23 and via its normally open contact switched off by pressing pushbutton 0. In the
Q23/14–13 mains contactor Q21 (high speed / event of an overload, normally closed contact
medium speed), pushbutton III mains 95–96 of overload relays F2, F21 and F22 can
contactor Q11. All contactors maintain also switch off.
themselves by their auxiliary contact 13–14.
For
All about Motors
Multi speed switch with motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZ2
L1 L2 L3 U F 690 V
L1 L2 L3
A1 13 21
-Q23
A2 14 22
I>> I>> I>>
T1 T2 T3
L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21 L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21
-Q1 -Q2
1.14 1.22 1.14 1.22
I> I> I> I> I> I>
U F500 V
A1 13 21 A1 13 21 1 3 5
-Q21 -Q17 -Q23
A2 14 22 A2 14 22 2 4 6
I>> I>> I>> I>> I>> I>>
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
2U 1U
2V M 1V
2W 3h 1W
-M1
No. of poles 12 6
Rpm 500 1000
No. of poles 8 4
Rpm 750 1500
No. of poles 4 2
Rpm 1500 3000

8-87
All about Motors
Multi speed switch with motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZ2
Q17 Q2 Q21 Q21 Q17 Q17 Q2 Q21 Q21

13 1.14 14 13 13 14 1.14 14 13
L1 I 0 II L1 I 0 II
(Q17/1) (Q17/1)
-S11 -S11
21
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
22
-F0 -F0
1.13 1.13
13
14
13
13
14
14
14
14
13
14
13
13
-Q1 -Q1
1.14 A B C 1.14 A B C
1.13 1.13
-Q2 -Q2
1.14 1.14
21 21
0 0
22 22
21 22 21
22
-S11 II -S11 II
22 21 22 21
n> n>
14 13 14 13
I I 14
n< 13 14 n< 13
14 14 14 14
-Q21 -Q17 -Q21
-Q17 13 13 13 13
22 22 22 22
8 -Q21 -Q17 -Q21 -Q17 21
21 21 21
22 22
14 14
-Q23 -Q23 -Q23 -Q23
21 13 21 13
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-Q17 -Q23 -Q21 -Q17 -Q23 -Q21
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
N N
Stop n< n> Stop n< n>
Circuit Aa page 8-53 Circuit Ca page 8-53
S11 RMQ-Titan, M22-… – – –

Q1, Q21 PKZ2/ZM-…/S n> – –
Q2, Q17 PKZ2/ZM-…/S n< – –
Q23 DIL0M yn > Ue F 500 V – –
Q23 S/EZ-PKZ yn > Ue F 660 V F0 FAZ
For
All about Motors
Three-phase automatic stator starters
Three-phase automatic stator resistance starter DDAINL with mains contactor and
resistors, 2-stage, 3-phase version
L1 L2 L3
1 2 3 13
-F1
14
-Q1 I> I> I>

2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q11 -Q17 -Q16
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
X
-R2 U1 -R1 U2
Y V1 V2
Z W1 W2
97 95
2 4 6
-F2
98 96
8
PE
U V W
M
3
-M1
Use F2 when using F1 instead of Q1.
Rating of switchgear:
Starting voltage = 0.6 x Ue
Starting current = 0.6 x motor full-load current
Starting torque = 0.36 x motor full-load current
Q1, Q11 = Ie
Q16, Q17 = 0.6 x Ie
Starting voltage = 0.6 x Ue

8-89
All about Motors
DDAINL three-phase automatic stator resistance starter with mains contactor and
resistors, 2-stage, 3-phase version
L1
(-Q11)
-F0
95
13 -F2 96
-Q1 14
21
0
22
-S11 13
I
14
22 32
14
-Q11 -Q11 31 -Q11
21 13
14
-Q16 13
14
15 -Q17 13
15
-K1 -K2
8 A1 A1
18
A1 A1 A1
18
-Q16 -K1 -Q17 -K2 -Q11

A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
N
Q16: Step contactor K2: Timing relay

K1: Timing relay Q11: Mains contactor
Q17: Step contactor
Two-wire control L1
Always set overload relay to (Q11/1)
manual reset -F0
13
-Q1 14
-S12
22 32
-Q11 -Q11
21 31
For
All about Motors
Three-wire F2 Q11 Q11 Two-wire F2 Q11 Q11

control 96 32 21 control 96 22 32
Two-way 0 I
pushbutton -S11 -S12
21
21
22
22
I = ON
13
13
14
0 = OFF
14
A B
Method of operation de-energized by normally closed contacts

Pushbutton I energizes step contactor Q16 and Q11/22–21 and Q11/32–31. The motor is
timing relay K1. Q16/14–13 – maintain switched off either after actuation of
themselves via Q11, Q11/32–31 and pushbutton 0, or in the event of an overload,
pushbutton 0. The motor is connected to the by normally closed contact 95–96 of the
supply with rotor resistors R1 + R2. When the overload relay F2 or normally open contact
set starting time has elapsed, normally open 13–14 of the motor-protective circuit-breaker
contact K1/15–18 energizes Q17. Step or circuit-breaker.
contactor Q17 bypasses starting stage R1. At Step contactor Q17, resistor R2 and timing
the same time, normally open contact relay K1 are omitted in single-stage starting
Q17/14–13 energizes K2. When the set circuits. Timing relay K2 is connected directly 8
starting time has elapsed, K2/15–18 energizes to Q16/13 and resistor R2 is connected by
mains contactor Q11, which bypasses the means of its terminals U1, V1 and W1 to
second starting stage R2, and the motor runs Q11/2, 4, 6.
at rated speed. Q11 maintains itself via
Q11/14–13. Q16, Q17, K1 and K2 are

8-91
All about Motors
Three-phase automatic stator resistance starter ATAINL with mains contactor and
starting transformer, 1-stage, 3-phase
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 13
Q1 F1
14
I>I> I>
2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5
Q11 K1
2 4 6 2 4 6
1W1
1U1
1V1
2W1
2V1
2U1
8
97 95
V2
W2
U2
2 4 6
a
98 96
1 3 5
Q13
2 4 6
U V W
M
3
M1
Use F2 when using F1 instead of Q1. Rating of switchgear

Starting voltage = 0.7 x Ue (typical value) Tightening = 0.49 x motor full-load
torque current
Starting current = 0.49 x motor full-load Q1, Q11 = Ie
current
IA/Ie =6 Q16 = 0.6 x Ie
tA = 10 s Q13 = 0.25 x Ie
S/h = 30
For
All about Motors
L1 Two-wire control
Always set overload relay to manual reset
F0
(automatic reset)
13 95 L1
Q1 F2 (Q11/1)
14 96
21 -F0
0
22
S11 95
13 13
I -F2
K1 96
14 14
67
55 -S12
K1 K1
68 56
67 55
22 22
14 -K1 -K1
Q13 Q13 Q11 68 96
13 21 21
A1 A1 A1 A1 Q16: Step contactor
Q16 K1 Q11 Q13 K1: Timing relay
A2 A2 A2 A2
N Q11: Mains contactor
Q13: Star contactor 8
Three-wire control F2 K1 K1 Two-wire F2 K1
I: ON 96 13 14 control 96 55
0 I
0: OFF
-S11
21
21
22
22
-S12
13
13
14
14
A B
Method of operation The motor cannot start up again unless

Actuation of pushbutton I simultaneously previously switched off by actuation of
energizes star contactor Q13, timing relay K1 pushbutton 0, or in the event of an overload,
and, via normally open contact Q13/13–14, by normally closed contact 95–96 of the
step contactor K16, and are maintained via overload relay F2. With two-wire control,
K1/13–14. When K1 has elapsed, normally overload relay F2 must always be set to
closed contact K1/55–56 de-energizes star manual reset. If the motor has been switched
contactor Q13 and – via normally open off by F2, the motor cannot start up again
contact Q13/13–14 – Q16 de-energizes: The unless the manual reset is released.
starting transformer is disconnected, and the
motor runs at rated speed.
8-93
All about Motors
Three-phase automatic rotor starters
2-stage, rotor 2-phase
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 13 -F1
14
-Q1 I> I> I>

2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q11 -Q12 2 4 6
-Q14 2 4 6
2 4 6
97 95
-F2
2 4 6 98 96
U V W PE
K -R2 -R1
M L U2 U1
3 M XY
V2 V1
-M1
Use F2 when using F1 instead of Q1.
Starting current = 0.5–2.5 x Ie

Starting torque = 0.5 to pull-out torque
Q1, Q11 = Ie
Step contactors = 0.35 x Irotor
Final step contactors = 0.58 x Irotor

8-95
All about Motors
With mains contactor, style 3-stage, rotor 3-phase
L1
F0
95
13
Q1 F2
14 96
21
0
22
S11
13 14 44
Q11
I Q11 43
14 13
32 14 15 14
Q13 Q13 U3 Q12
31 13 18 13
15 14 15
K1 Q14 K2
18 13 18
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
Q11 K1 Q14 K2 Q12 Q13 U3
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
8 N
Q11: Mains contactor Q12: Step contactor

K1: Timing relay Q13: Final step contactor
Q14: Step contactor K3: Timing relay
K2: Timing relay
Two-way push- F2 Q11 Q11 For connection of further control circuit

button 96 14 13 devices: a section “Control circuit devices
0 I
I: ON for star-delta starting”, page 8-49
0: OFF -S11
21
21
22
22
13
13
14
14
A B
For
All about Motors
Method of operation The motor is switched off either by pushbutton
Pushbutton I energizes mains contactor Q11: 0, or in the event of an overload, by normally
normally open contact Q11/14–13 transfers closed contact 95–96 of the overload relay F2
the voltage, Q11/44–43 energizes timing relay or normally open contact 13–14 of the
K1. The motor is connected to the supply with motor-protective circuit-breaker or
rotor resistors R1 + R2 + R3 in series. When circuit-breaker.
the set starting time has elapsed, normally Step contactors Q13 and/or Q12 with their
open contact K1/15–18 energizes Q14. Step resistors R3, R2 and timing relays K3, K2 are
contactor Q14 short-circuits starting stage R1 omitted in single-stage or two-stage starting
and via Q14/14–13 energizes timing relay K2. circuits. The rotor is then connected to the
When the set starting time has elapsed, resistance terminals U, V, W2 or U, V, W1. The
K2/15–18 energizes step contactor Q12, references for step contactors and timing
which short-circuits starting stage R2 and via relays in the wiring diagrams are then changed
Q12/14–13 energizes timing relay K3. When from Q13, Q12, to Q12, Q11 or to Q13, Q11 as
the set starting time has elapsed, K3/15–18 appropriate.
energizes final step contactor Q13, which is
When there are more than three stages, the
maintained via Q13/14–13. Step contactors
additional step contactors, timing relays and
Q14 and Q13 as well as timing relays K1, K2
resistors have appropriate increasing
and K3 are de-energized via Q13. Final step
designations.
contactor Q13 short-circuits the rotor slip 8
rings: the motor operates with rated speed.

8-97
All about Motors
Contactors for capacitors DIL
Individual circuit without Individual circuit with quick-discharge resistors

quick-discharge resistors
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
-F1 -F1
1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q11 -Q11
2 4 6 2 4 6
21 31
-Q11 -Q11
22 32
8
-R1 -R1
-R1 -R1
-C1 -C1
-R1
R1 discharge resistors fitted in R1 discharge resistors fitted to contactor

capacitor
For
All about Motors
L1 L1 Q11 Q11
(Q11/1) 0 14 I 13
-F0
21
21
22
22
21
13
13
14
14
0
22
A B
-S11
13 Two-way pushbutton
I For connection of further control circuit
14
devices: a section “Control circuit devices
for star-delta starting”, page 8-49
14
-Q11
13
A1
-Q11
A2
N
Two-wire control Q11 8

In the case of actuation by means of power L1 A1
factor correction relay, check that this has
sufficient power to actuate the contactor coil. -S12
Interpose a contactor relay if necessary.
Method of operation
Pushbutton I energizes contactor Q11. Q11
energizes and maintains itself via its own
auxiliary contact 14–13 and pushbutton 0.
Capacitor C1 is now energized. Discharge
resistors R1 are not operative when contactor
Q11 is energized. Actuation of pushbutton 0
effects de-energization. Normally closed
contacts Q11/21–22 then switch discharge
resistors R1 to capacitor C1.

8-99
All about Motors
Capacitor contactor combination
Capacitor contactor with pilot contactor and with and without discharge resistors and with
series resistors. Individual and parallel circuit series resistors.
L1 L2 L3
-F1
21 13 31 21 31
A1 1 3 5 43 A1 13 1 3 5 43
-Q14 -Q11
A2 22 14 2 4 6 32 44 A2 22 14 2 4 6 32 44
8
-R1 -R1
-R2
-C1
On the version without discharge resistors,

resistors R1 and the connections to the
auxiliary contacts 21–22 and 31–32 are
omitted.
For
All about Motors
L1 L1
(Q11/1) (Q11/1)
-F0 -F0
T0 (3)-1-15431
21
1 0 2
0 1
22 2
3
-S11 4
13 21
I 14 0
14 22
-Q11 -S12
13 -S12
13
I 14
14 14
-Q14 -Q11
13
13
14
A1 A1
-Q11 -Q14 -Q14
13
A2 A2
A1 A1
N -Q11 -Q14
N
A2 A2
8
Q14: Pilot contactor
Actuation by two-way pushbutton S11 Actuation by selector switch S13, two-wire
control S12 (power factor correction relay)
and two-way pushbutton S11
Method of operation Discharge resistors R1 are not operative when

Actuation by two-way pushbutton S11: Q11 and Q14 are energized. Pushbutton 0
Pushbutton I energizes pilot contactor Q14. effects de-energization. Normally closed
Q14 switches capacitor C1 in with bridged contacts Q11/21–22 and 31–32 then switch
series resistors R2. Normally open contact discharge resistors R1 to capacitor C1.
Q14/14–13 energizes mains contactor Q11.
Capacitor C1 is then switched in with bridged
series resistors R2. Q14 is maintained via
Q11/14–13 when Q11 has closed.

8-101
All about Motors
Duplex pump control
Fully automatic control for two pumps
Starting sequence of pumps 1 and 2 can be P1 Auto = Pump 1 constant load,
selected by control switch S12 Pump 2 peak load
P2 Auto = Pump 2 constant load,
Control circuit wiring with two float switches
Pump 1 peak load
for basic and peak loads (operation is also P1 + P2 = Direct operation independent of
possible with two pressure switches)
float switches (or pressure
switches)
L1 L2 L3
a
a
0 -Q1 I>I> I>
b
c
F7: 0
F8 Q -F11 -F21
0
F7 F7: I
F8 F8: 0
d
F8: I -Q11 -Q12
8 F7 Q I
-F12 -F22
e I
U V W
g -M1 M
f U V W
3
f h -M2 M
3
a Cable with float, counterweight, pulleys f Centrifugal or reciprocating pump

and clamps g Pump 1
b Storage tank h Pump 2
c Inlet i Suction pipe with filter
d Pressure pipe j Well
e Outlet
For
Duplex pump control
All about Motors
F11 -S12
F0
P 2 Auto
P 1 Auto
P 1, P 2
0
L
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
95 95 2 14 2 14 14 14
9
-F12 -F22 -F7 Q -S11 -F8 Q -S21 -Q12 -Q11 10
96 96 1 13 1 13 13 13
11
A1 A1 12
EO -Q11 -Q12 13

A2 A2
N
T0(3)-4-15833
Float switch F7 closes before F8 Q11: Pump 1 mains contactor Q12: Pump 2 mains contactor
Method of operation the range of F7 (discharge is greater than In position P1 + P2, both pumps are in operation,
The duplex pump control is designed for operation of intake), F8 starts pump 2 (peak load). When independent of the float switches (Caution! Tank
two pump motors M1 and M2. Control is via float the water level rises again, F8 is deactivated. may possibly overflow).
switches F7 and F8. Pump 2 continues running until F7 stops both On the version of duplex pump control with auto-
Operating mode selector switch S12 in position P1 pumps. matic load sharing (T0(3)-4-15915), S12 has a fur-
auto: The system operates as follows: The operating sequence of pumps 1 and 2 can ther position: the sequence of operations is auto-
When the water level in the storage tank falls or be determined using operating mode selector matically reversed after each cycle.
rises, F7 switches pump 1 on or off (basic load). If the switch S12: Position P1 auto or P2 auto.
water level drops below
8-103

8
All about Motors
Fully automatic pump control
With pressure switch for air tank and domestic With 3-pole pressure switch MCSN (main
water supply without water failure (run dry) circuit)
safety device
L1 F1: Fuses (if required)

L2 Q1: Motor-protective switch, manual
L3
(z. B. PKZ)
-F1 F7: Pressure switch MCSN, 3-pole
M1: Pump motor
a Air or pressure tank
-Q1 I> I> I> b Non-return valve
c Pressure pipe
d Centrifugal (or reciprocating) pump
e Suction pipe with filter
a P f Well
-F7
d U V W
b M
3
c e
-M1
8 f
For
All about Motors
With 3-pole float switch SW (main circuit)
F1: Fuses (if required)
a L1 Q1: Motor-protective switch, manual
L2
L3 (z. B. PKZ)
b F7: Float switch 3-pole (circuit: pump
HW -F1
full)
c
0
M1: Pump motor
NW HW: Highest level
-Q1 I> I> I>
NW: Lowest value
-F7 Q a Cable with float, counterweight,
U V W
pulleys and clamps
d b Storage tank
e M
3
c Pressure pipe
I d Centrifugal (or reciprocating) pump
f -M1 e Outlet
f Suction pipe with filter
g Well
g
8
For
All about Motors
With single-pole float switch SW (control
circuit)
F1: Fuses
a L1
0 Q11: Contactor or automatic
L2
L3 star-delta starter
N
b F2: Overload relay with automatic
HW -F1 -F8 Q
reset
-Q11 1 3 5
F8: Float switch 1-pole (circuit:
NW 95
2 4 6
S1 0 pump full)
c H S1: Changeover switch
A
-F2 96 I
MANUAL-OFF-AUTO
F9: Float switch 1-pole (circuit:
d U V W
e pump full)
M
3 M1: Pump motor
-M1
f a Cable with float, counterweight,
I pulleys and clamps
b Storage tank
g-F9
Q
c Pressure pipe
h 0
d Centrifugal (or reciprocating)
pump 8
e Outlet
f Suction pipe with filter
g Water-failure monitoring by
means of a float switch
h Well

8-107
All about Motors
Off position interlock of the loads
Solution using NZM circuit-breakers
Off position interlock for control switches (S3) and undervoltage release. Cannot be used
(Hamburg circuit) with auxiliary contact VHI with motor operator.
-Q1
-S3
I> I> I>
-R1 -R2
51 52
U<
-Q2 -Q3 -Q4

8 I> I> I> I> I> I> I> I> I>
For
All about Motors
Fully automatic main transfer switch with automatic reset
Off position interlock for control or master (S3), NHI (S1) and undervoltage release.
switches by means of auxiliary contacts VHI Cannot be used with motor operator.
a Emergency-Stop
b Off position interlock
contacts on the control or
master switches
-Q1
-S1 10
V
11
b
-S3
95 I> I> I>
10
11
b
96
a 10
11
b
51
U<
52

8-109
All about Motors
Fully automatic main transfer switch with automatic reset
Changeover device to DIN VDE 0108 – Power systems and safety power supply in
buildings for public gatherings:
Automatic resetting, the phase-monitor is set Pick-up voltage Uon = 0.95 x Un
to: Drop-out voltage Ub = 0.85 x Uon
L1 a b L1.1
L2 L2.1
L3 L3.1
N N
c
-Q1 I>I> I> -Q1.1 I> I> I>
6
6
5
5
4
3
3
2
1
1
-F01 -Q11 -Q12

-F02
21
13
8 -K2 14
11 R S T -K2 22
22 22
11 R
-Q12 -K1 S -Q11 21

21
12 14 T
12 14
A1
-Q12
A2
A1 A1
-Q11 -K2
A2 A2
a Main supply c To load

b Auxiliary supply
Method of operation Q11 energizes and switches the mains supply

Main switch Q1 is closed first, followed by on the loads. Contactor Q12 is also interlocked
main switch Q1.1 (auxiliary supply). against main supply contactor Q11 via
Phase monitor K1 is energized via the main normally closed contact Q11/22–21.
supply and immediately energizes contactor
relay K2. Normally closed contact K2/21–22
blocks the circuit of Contactor Q12 (auxiliary
supply) and normally open contact K2/13–14
closes the circuit of contactor Q11. Contactor
For
Specifications, Formulae, Tables
Page
Marking of electrical
equipment 9-2
Circuit symbols, European – North America 9-14
Circuit diagram example to
North American specifications 9-27
Approval authorities worldwide 9-28
Test authorities and approval stamps 9-32
Protective measures 9-34
Overcurrent protection of cables and
conductors 9-43
Electrical equipment of machines 9-51
Measures for risk reduction 9-56
Measures for risk avoidance 9-57
Degrees of protection for electrical equipment 9-58
North American classifications for
control switches 9-68
9
Utilisation categories for contactors 9-70
Utilisation categories for
switch-disconnectors 9-74
Rated motor currents 9-77
Conductors 9-81
Formulae 9-90
International unit system 9-94

9-1
Marking of electrical equipment
General
Extracts from the DIN Standards with VDE The marking appears in a suitable position as
Classification are quoted with the permission of close as possible to the circuit symbol. The
the DIN (Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V.) and marking forms the link between the equipment in
the VDE (Verband der Elektrotechnik Elektronik the installations and the various circuit documents
Informationstechnik e.V.) It is imperative for the (wiring diagrams, parts lists, circuit diagrams,
use of the standards that the issue with the latest instructions). For simpler maintenance, the
date is used. These are available from complete marking or part of it, can be affixed on
VDE-VERLAG GMBH, Bismarckstr. 33, 10625 or near to the equipment.
Berlin and Beuth Verlag GmbH, Burggrafenstr. 6,
10787 Berlin. Selected equipment with a comparison of the
Moeller used code letters old – new a Table,
Marking to DIN EN 61346-2:2000-12 Page 9-3.
(IEC 61346-2:2000)
Moeller has decided, with a transitional period, to
use the above mentioned standards.
Deviation from the, up to now, normal marking
determines now in the first place the function of
the electrical equipment in the respective circuit of
the code letter. The outcome is that there is a lot
of freedom in the selection of the code letters.
Example for a resistance
• Normal current limiter: R
9 • Heater resistor: E
• Measurement resistor: B
As well as that, Moeller specific decisions have
been made with regard to the interpretation of the
standard that sometimes deviate from the
standard.
• The marking of connection terminals are not
readable from the right.
• A second code letter for the marking of the use
of the equipment is not given,
e. g.: timer relay K1T becomes K1.
• Circuit-breakers with the main function of
protection are still marked with Q.
They are numbered from 1 to 10 from the top
left.
• Contactors are newly marked with Q and
numbered from 11 to nn.
e. g.: K91M becomes Q21.
• Relays remain K and are numbered from 1 to n.

Code letter old Example for electrical equipment Code letter new
B Measuring transducer T
C Capacitors C
D Memory device C
E Electro filter V
F Bimetal release F
F Pressure monitor B
F Fuses (fine, HH, signal fuse ) F
G Frequency inverters T
G Generators G
G Soft starter T
G UPS G
H Lamps E
H Optical and acoustic indicators P
9
H Signal lamps P
K Relays K
K Contactor relays K
K Semiconductor contactor T
K Contactor Q
K Time-delay relay K
L Reactor coil R
N Buffer amplifier, inverting amplifier T
Q Switch disconnector Q
Q Circuit-breaker for protection Q
Q Motor-protective circuit-breaker Q

9-3
Code letter old Example for electrical equipment Code letter new
Q Star-delta switches Q
Q Disconnect switch Q
R Variable resistor R
R Measurement resistor B
R Heating resistor E
S Control circuit devices S
S Push-button S
S Position switch B
T Potential transformer T
T Current transformer T
T Transformers T
U Frequency converter T
V Diodes R
9 V Rectifier T
V Transistors K
Z EMC filter K
Z Suppressors and arc quenching devices F

Component marking in the USA and Canada to NEMA ICS 1-2001, ICS 1.1-1984,
ICS 1.3-1986
In order to differentiate between devices with Example:
similar functions, 3 figures and/or letters can be The relay which introduces the first jog function is
added to the marking. When using two or more of marked with “1 JCR”. That means here:
these markings, the function marking is usually 1 = numerical specification
put first. J = jog function of the equipment
CR = control relay (contactor relay) – type of
equipment

9-5
Component or function code letters to NEMA ICS 1-2001, ICS 1.1-1984, ICS 1.3-1986
Code letter Device or Function
A Accelerating
AM Ammeter
B Braking
C or CAP Capacitor, capacitance
CB Circuit-breaker
CR Control relay
CT Current transformer
DM Demand meter
D Diode
DS or DISC Disconnect switch
DB Dynamic braking
FA Field accelerating
FC Field contactor
FD Field decelerating
9 FL Field-loss
F or FWD Forward
FM Frequency meter
FU Fuse
GP Ground protective
H Hoist
J Jog
LS Limit switch
L Lower
M Main contactor
MCR Master control relay
MS Master switch

Code letter Device or Function
OC Overcurrent
OL Overload
P Plugging, potentiometer
PFM Power factor meter
PB Pushbutton
PS Pressure switch
REC Rectifier
R or RES Resistor, resistance
REV Reverse
RH Rheostat
SS Selector switch
SCR Silicon controlled rectifier
SV Solenoid valve
SC Squirrel cage
S Starting contactor
SU Suppressor
9
TACH Tachometer generator
TB Terminal block, board
TR Time-delay relay
Q Transistor
UV Undervoltage
VM Voltmeter
WHM Watthour meter
WM Wattmeter
X Reactor, reactance

9-7
As an alternative to device designation with code simplify harmonization with international
letter to NEMA ICS 1-2001, ICS 1.1-1984, standards. The code letters used here are, in part,
ICS 1.3-1986 the designation to class designation similar to those of IEC 61346-1 (1996-03).
is permissible. Class designation marking should
Class designation code letter to NEMA ICS 19-2002
Code letter Device or function
A Separate Assembly
B Induction Machine, Squirrel Cage
Induction Motor
Synchro, General
• Control transformer
• Control transmitter
• Control Receiver
• Differential Receiver
• Differential Transmitter
• Receiver
• Torque Receiver
• Torque Transmitter
Synchronous Motor
Wound-Rotor Induction Motor or
9 Induction Frequency Convertor
BT Battery
C Capacitor
• Capacitor, General
• Polarized Capacitor
Shielded Capacitor
CB Circuit-Breaker (all)

D, CR Diode
• Bidirectional Breakdown Diode
• Full Wave Bridge Rectifier
• Metallic Rectifier
• Semiconductor Photosensitive
• Cell
• Semiconductor Rectifier
• Tunnel Diode
• Unidirectional Breakdown Diode
D, VR Zener Diode
DS Annunciator
Light Emitting Diode
Lamp
• Fluorescent Lamp
• Incandescent Lamp
• Indicating Lamp
E Armature (Commutor and Brushes)
Lightning Arrester
Contact 9
• Electrical Contact
• Fixed Contact
• Momentary Contact
Core
• Magnetic Core
Horn Gap
Permanent Magnet
Terminal
Not Connected Conductor

9-9
F Fuse
G Rotary Amplifier (all)
A.C. Generator
Induction Machine, Squirrel Cage
Induction Generator
HR Thermal Element Actuating Device
J Female Disconnecting Device
Female Receptacle
K Contactor, Relay
L Coil
• Blowout Coil
• Brake Coil
• Operating Coil
Field
• Commutating Field
• Compensating Field
• Generator or Motor Field
• Separately Excited Field
9 • Series Field
• Shunt Field
Inductor
Saturable Core Reactor
Winding, General
LS Audible Signal Device
• Bell
• Buzzer
• Horn
M Meter, Instrument
For
P • Male Disconnecting Device

• Male Receptable
Q Thyristor
• NPN Transistor
• PNP Transistor
R Resistor
• Adjustable Resistor
• Heating Resistor
• Tapped Resistor
• Rheostat
Shunt
• Instrumental Shunt
• Relay Shunt
S Contact
• Time Closing Contact
• Time Opening Contact
• Time Sequence Contact
• Transfer Contact
• Basic Contact Assembly
• Flasher
9

9-11
S Switch
• Combination Locking and
Nonlocking Switch
• Disconnect Switch
• Double Throw Switch
• Drum Switch
• Flow-Actuated Switch
• Foot Operated Switch
• Key-Type Switch
• Knife Switch
• Limit Switch
• Liquid-Level Actuated Switch
• Locking Switch
• Master Switch
• Mushroom Head
• Operated Switch
• Pressure or Vacuum
• Operated Switch
• Pushbutton Switch
• Pushbutton Illuminated Switch,
9 Rotary Switch
• Selector Switch
• Single-Throw Switch
• Speed Switch
Stepping Switch
• Temperature-Actuated Switch
• Time Delay Switch
• Toggle Switch
• Transfer Switch
• Wobble Stick Switch
Thermostat
For
T Transformer
• Current Transformer
• Transformer, General
• Polyphase Transformer
• Potential Transformer
TB Terminal Board
TC Thermocouple
U Inseparable Assembly
V Pentode, Equipotential Cathode
Phototube, Single Unit,
Vacuum Type
Triode
Tube, Mercury Pool
W Conductor
• Associated
• Multiconductor
• Shielded
Conductor, General
X Tube Socket
9

9-13
Circuit symbols, European – North America
Circuit symbols to DIN EN, NEMA ICS
The following comparison of circuit symbols is
based upon the following international/national
specifications:
• DIN EN 60617-2 to DIN EN 60617-12
• NEMA ICS 19-2002
Description DIN EN NEMA ICS
Conductors, connectors
Junction of conductors
03-02-04
03-02-05
or or
Connection of conductors (node)
03-02-01
Terminal
03-02-02
Terminal strip/block
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9 03-02-03
Conductor
03-01-01
For
Conductor (for later expansion)

103-01-01
Line of application, general symbol

02-12-01
Line of application, optional,

denoting small interval 02-12-04
Separation between two fields

02-01-06
Line of separation between

functional units
02-01-06
Screen
02-01-07
Earth, general symbol Ground,

general symbol
GRD
02-15-01
Protective earth Protective ground 9

02-15-03
Connector with plug and socket
03-03-05 03-03-06
or
Isolating point, lug, closed
03-03-18

9-15
Passive components
Resistor, general symbol or or RES

04-01-02 04-01-02
Resistor with fixed tappings or

04-01-09
Variable resistor, general symbol
04-01-03
Adjustable resistor RES
Resistor with sliding contact,

potentiometer
04-01-07
Winding, inductance, general or

symbol 04-03-01 04-03-02
Winding with fixed tapping

9
04-03-06
Capacitor, general symbol or or
04-02-01 04-02-02
Variable capacitor
104-02-01
For
Signalling units
Visual indicator, general symbol
*with colour stated

Indicator light, general symbol or or
08-10-01
*with colour stated

Buzzer or
ABU
08-10-10
08-10-11
Horn, claxon
HN
08-10-05
Operating devices
Manual operation, general use

02-13-01
Operated by pushing
9
02-13-05
Operated by pulling
02-13-03
Operated by turning
02-13-04
Operated by key
02-13-13
Operated by rollers, sensors

02-13-15

9-17
Stored energy mechanism, general

symbol
02-13-20
Switch mechanism with mechanical

release
102-05-04
Operated by motor
M MOT
02-13-26
Emergency switch
02-13-08
Operated by electromagnetic
overcurrent protection
02-13-24
Operated by thermal overcurrent OL

protection
02-13-25
Electromagnetic operation
9
02-13-23
Control by fluid level

02-14-01
Electromechanical, electromagnetic operating devices
Electromechanical operating device, or or

general symbol, relay coil, general
symbol 07-15-01 x device code letter
Operating device with special
features, general symbol
For
Electromechanical operating device SO

with On-delay
07-15-08
Electromechanical device with SR

Off-delay
07-15-07
Electromechanical device with On- SA

and Off-delay
07-15-09
Electromechanical device of a
thermal relay
07-15-21
Contacts
Make contact or or
07-02-01 07-02-02
Break contact or
9
07-02-03
Changeover contact with or

interruption
07-02-04
Early-make contact of a contact TC, TDC, EM

assembly
07-04-01
Late-break contact of a contact TO, TDO, LB

assembly
07-04-03
Make contact, delayed when closing or
T.C.
07-05-02 07-05-01
Break contact, delayed when or

reclosing
T.O.
07-05-03 07-05-04

9-19
Control devices
Push-button (not stay-put)

PB
07-07-02
Spring-return switch with break PB

contact, manually operated by
pushing, e.g. push-button
Spring-return switch with make and PB
break contacts, manually operated
by pushing
Spring-return switch with latching PB
position and one make contact,
manually operated by pushing
Spring-return switch with latching
position and one break contact,
manually operated by striking (e.g.
mushroom button)
Position switch (make contact)
9 Limit switch (make contact)
LS
07-08-01
Position switch (break contact) LS

Limit switch (break contact)
07-08-02
Spring-return switch with make LS

contact, mechanically operated,
make contact closed
For
Spring-return switch with break LS

contact, mechanically operated,
break contact open
Proximity switch (break contact),
actuated by the proximity of iron Fe
07-20-04
Proximity switch, inductive, make

contact Fe
Proximity switch, block diagram
07-19-02
Under-pressure relay, make contact or

P< P
07-17-03
Pressure switch, break contact or

P> P
Float switch, make contact 9
Float switch, break contact

9-21
Switchgear
Contactor (make contact)
07-13-02 x code letter

3 pole contactor with bimetal relay
(3 thermal elements)
OL
x code letter
3 pole switch-disconnector DISC
07-13-06
3 pole circuit-breaker CB
07-13-05
3 pole breaker with switch

9 mechanism with three x x x
thermoelectric overcurrent releases,

three electromagnetic overcurrent
releases, motor-protective l> l> l>
circuit-breaker 107-05-01
Fuse, general symbol or FU or
07-21-01
Transformers, current transformers
Transformers with two windings or or
06-09-02 06-09-01
For
Autotransformer or or
06-09-07
06-09-06
Current transformer or
06-09-11
06-09-10
Machines
Generator or
G G GEN
06-04-01
Motor, general symbol or

M M MOT
06-04-01
DC motor, general symbol

M M
06-04-01
AC motor, general symbol

9
M
~
06-04-01
Three-phase asynchronous motor

with squirrel-cage rotor M
3~
06-08-01
Three-phase asynchronous motor

with slip-ring rotor M
3~
06-08-03

9-23
Semiconductor components
Static input
Static output
Static input with negation
12-07-01
Static output with negation
12-07-02
Dynamic input, change of status

from 0 to 1 (L/H)
12-07-07
Dynamic input with negation,

change of status from 1 to 0 (H/L)
12-07-08
9 AND gate, general symbol & A

12-27-02
OR gate, general symbol

1 OR
12-27-01
NOT gate, inverter 1 OR
12-27-11
AND with negated output, NAND 1 &

2 A
13
12-28-01
For
OR with negated output, NOR 3 1

4 OR
5
12-28-02
Exclusive OR gate, general symbol =1 OE
12-27-09
RS flip-flop S
S FF 1
R T
C 0
12-42-01
Monostable gate, cannot be

SS
triggered during the output pulse, 1
general symbol 12-44-02
Delay, variable with indication of TP

delay values Adj.
m/ms
02-08-05
Semiconductor diode, general

symbol (A) (K)
05-03-01
9
Limiting diode Zener diode
05-03-06
Light-emitting diode (LED), general

symbol
05-03-02
Bi-directional diode, diac

(T) (T)
05-03-09
Thyristor, general symbol

(A) (K)
05-04-04

9-25
PNP transistor (A) (K) or (E) (C)

(B)
05-05-01
NPN transistor, in which the (K) (A) or (E) (C)

collector is connected to the
enclosure (B)
05-05-02
For
Circuit diagram example to North American specifications
Direct-on-Line Motor-Starters
Fuseless with circuit-breakers
CB M
L1 L1 T1
L2 T2
L2 MTR
L3 T3
L3
460 V
H1 H3 H2 H4
X1 115 V X2
FU
1 PB 2 PB
START X1 X2
STOP W
11 12 A1 A2
M
13 14
M
13 14

9-27
Approval authorities worldwide
Abbrevi- Full title Country

ation
ABS American Bureau of Shipping USA

AEI Associazione Elettrotechnica ed Elettronica Italiana Italy
Italian electrotechnical industry organisation
AENOR Asociacion Española de Normalización y Certificación Spain
Spanish organisation for standards and certification
ALPHA Gesellschaft zur Prüfung und Zertifizierung Germany
von Niederspannungsgeräten
German test laboratories association
ANSI American National Standards Institute USA
AS Australian Standard Australia
ASA American Standards Association USA
ASTA Association of Short-Circuit Testing Authorities Great Britain
BS British Standard Great Britain
BV Bureau Veritas France
Ship´s classification association
9 CEBEC Comité Electrotechnique Belge Belgium
Belgian electrotechnical product quality mark
CEC Canadian Electrical Code Canada
CEI Comitato Elettrotecnico Italiano Italy
Italian standards organisation
CEI Commission Electrotechnique Internationale Switzerland
International electrotechnical commission
CEMA Canadian Electrical Manufacturer’s Association Canada
CEN Comité Européen de Normalisation Europe
European standards committee
CENELEC Comité Européen de Normalisation Électrotechnique Europe
European committee for electrotechnical standards
For

ation
CSA Canadian Standards Association Canada

DEMKO Danmarks Elektriske Materielkontrol Denmark
Danish material control for electrotechnical products
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung Germany
German institute for standardisation
DNA Deutscher Normenausschuss Germany
German standards committee
DNV Det Norsk Veritas Norway
Ship classification association
EN European standard Europe
ECQAC Electronic Components Quality Assurance Committee Europe
ELOT Hellenic Organization for Standardization Greece
Greek organization for standardization
EOTC European Organization for Testing and Certification Europe
ETCI Electrotechnical Council of Ireland Ireland
GL Germanischer Lloyd Germany 9
HD Harmonization document Europe
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission –
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers USA
IPQ Instituto Portoguês da Qualidade Portugal
Portuguese quality institute
ISO International Organization for Standardization –

9-29

ation
JEM Japanese Electrical Manufacturers Association Japan

Electrical industry association
JIC Joint Industry Conference USA
JIS Japanese Industrial Standard Japan
KEMA Keuring van Elektrotechnische Materialen Netherlands
Testing institute for electrotechnical products
LOVAG Low Voltage Agreement Group –
LRS Lloyd's Register of Shipping Great Britain
MITI Ministry of International Trade and Industry Japan
NBN Norme Belge Belgium
Belgian standard
NEC National Electrical Code USA
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association USA
NEMKO Norges Elektriske Materiellkontroll Norway
Norwegian testing institute for electrotechnical products
9
NEN Nederlandse Norm Netherlands
Dutch standard
NFPA National Fire Protection Association USA
NKK Nippon Kaiji Kyakai Japan
Japanese classification association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration USA
ÖVE Österreichischer Verband für Elektrotechnik Austria
Austrian electrotechnical association
PEHLA Prüfstelle elektrischer Hochleistungsapparate Germany
Electrical high-performance apparatus test laboratory of the
association for electrical high-performance testing
For

ation
PRS Polski Rejestr Statków Poland

PTB Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt Germany
German physical/technical federal agency
RINA Registro Italiano Navale Italy
Italian ship classification association
SAA Standards Association of Australia Australia
SABS South African Bureau of Standards South Africa
SEE Service de l'Energie de l'Etat Luxemburg
Luxemburg authority for standardisation, testing and certi-
fication
SEMKO Svenska Elektriska Materielkontrollanstalten Sweden
Swedish test institute for electrotechnical products
SEV Schweizerischer Elektrotechnischer Verein Switzerland
Swiss electrotechnical association
SFS Suomen Standardisoimisliito r.y. Finland
Finnish standardisation association, Finnish standard 9
STRI The Icelandic Council for Standardization Iceland
SUVA Schweizerische Unfallversicherungs-Anstalt Switzerland
Swiss accident insurance federal agency
TÜV Technischer Überwachungsverein Germany
Technical inspection association
UL Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. USA
UTE Union Technique de l'Electricité France
Electrotechnical federation
VDE Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik, Informationstechnik Germany
(Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker)
Association of electrical, electronics and information tech-
nology
ZVEI Zentralverband Elektrotechnik- und Elektronikindustrie Germany
Central association of the electrical and electronic industry

9-31
Test authorities and approval stamps
Test authorities and approval stamps in Europe and North America
Moeller devices have in their basic design all in the European Union must be marked with the
worldwide necessary approvals including those CE mark.
for the USA. The CE mark shows that the marked device
Some devices, such as circuit-breakers, are in their corresponds with all relevant requirements and
basic design usable worldwide with the exception standards. This marking duty allows unlimited use
of USA and Canada. For export to North America of this device within the European economic area.
devices are available with a special UL and CSA Approval and marking for their own country is no
approval. longer necessary when a device is marked with
In all cases special country specific installation and the CE mark that corresponds to the harmonised
operating specifications, installation ,materials standards. (a Table, Page 9-32).
and types must be taken into account as well as An exception is the instalation material. The
special circumstances such as difficult climatic device group of circuit-breakers and earth-fault
conditions. protection switches are in certain areas still to be
Since January 1997 all devices that conform to the labelled and are therefore marked with the
European low-voltage guidelines and are for sale relevant label.
Country Test authority Stamp included in CE mark
Belgium Comité Electrotechnique Belge yes, except installation

Belgisch Elektrotechnisch Comité material
(CEBEC)
Denmark Danmarks Elektriske Materielkontrol Yes
9 (DEMKO)
Germany Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker yes, except installation

(VDE) v material
Finland FIMKO Yes
France Union Technique de l’Electricité (UTE) yes, except installation

material
For
Test authorities and approval stamps
Country Test authority Stamp included in CE mark
Canada Canadian Standards Association (CSA) no, extra or seperate the

UL an CSA approval
mark
Netherlands Naamloze Vennootschap tot Keuring Yes
van Electrotechnische Materialen
(KEMA)
Norway Norges Elektriske Materiellkontrol Yes
(NEMKO)
Russia Goststandart(GOST-)R No
Sweden Svenska Elektriska Materiel- Yes

kontrollanstalten (SEMKO)
Switzerland Schweizerischer Elektrotechnischer yes, except installation

Verein (SEV) material
Czech – – no, manufacture

Republic declaration is enough
Hungary – – no, manufacture
declaration is enough
USA Underwriters Laboratories no, extra or seperate the
9
Listing Recognition UL an CSA approval
mark

9-33
Protective measures
Protection against electrical shock to IEC 364-4-41
A distinction is drawn here between protection which may arise from contact with live parts of
against direct contact, protection against indirect electrical equipment.
contact and protection against both direct and • Protection against indirect contact
indirect contact. This is the protection of personnel and working
• Protection against direct contact animals from dangers which may arise from
These are all the measures for the protection of accidental contact with components or
personnel and working animals from dangers extraneous conductive parts.
Protective measures
Protection against direct as Protection against direct Protection against indirect

well as indirect contact contact contact
Protection by extra-low Protection by insulation of Protection by automatic

voltage: active parts disconnection of the power
– SELV supply
– PELV
Protection by covering or
9 encapsulating
Protective insulation (Total
insulation) k
Protection by partitioning Protection by

non-conductive spaces
Protection by distancing Protection by non-earthed

local equipotential bonding
Protective isolation
Protection must be ensured by either a) the

equipment itself or b) the use of protective
measures when erecting the installation or c) a
combination of a) and b).
For
Protective measures
Protection against indirect contact by means of disconnection or indication
The conditions for disconnection are determined
by the type of system in use and the protective
device selected.
Systems to IEC 364-3/VDE 0100 Part 310
Earth continuity type systems Meaning of designation
TN system
L1 T: direct earthing of a point (system earth)
L2 N: chassis directly connected to the system earth
L3
N
PE
b
a
TT system
L1 T: direct earthing of a point (system earth)
L2 T: chassis directly earthed, independent of the
L3 earthing of the power supply (system earth)
N
b
9
a PE
IT system
I: All live parts isolated from earth or one point
L1
L2 connected to earth via an impedance.
L3 T: chassis directly earthed, independent of the
earthing of the power supply (system earth)
c b
PE
a System earth
b Chassis
c Impedance

9-35
Protective measures
Protective devices and conditions for disconnection to IEC 364-4-1/VDE 0100 Part 410
Type of TN system
distribution
system
Protection with System circuit Description Condition for

so far disconnection
Overcurrent TN-S system Zs X Ia F U0
protective separated neutral and earth Zs = Impedance of
device conductors throughout the system the fault circuit
L1
Ia = current, which
L2 causes disconnection
L3 in:
N
PE • F5s
• F 0.2 s
in circuits up to 35 A
with sockets and
hand-held
Fuses TN-C system Protective components which
Miniature Neutral conductor and protection multiple can be moved
circuit-breakers functions are combined throughout earthing U0 = rated voltage
Circuit- the system in a single PEN against earthed
conductor
9 breakers conductor.
L1
L2
L3
PEN
For
Protective measures
Type of TN system
distribution
system
Protection with System circuit Description Condition for

so far disconnection
Overcurrent TN-C-S system
protective Neutral conductor and protection
device functions are in a part of the system
combined in a single PEN conductor
L1
L2
L3
N
PE(N)
Residual- L1 Residual- Zs X IDn F U0

current L2 current IDn = rated fault
L3
protective N protective current
PE(N)
device circuit U0 = maximum
permissible touch
voltage*: 9
(F 50 V AC,
F 120 V DC)
Residual
voltage
protection
device (in
special case)
Insulation
monitoring
devices
*a Table, Page 9-41

9-37
Protective measures
Type of TT system
distribution
system
Protection with System circuit Description Conditions for indica-

so far tion/disconnection
Overcurrent L1 RA X Ia F UL
L2
protective L3 RA = Earthing
N
device PE resistance of
conductive parts of the
Fuses Protective chassis
Miniature earth Ia = Current which
circuit-breakers PE PE causes automatic
Circuit-breakers disconnection in F 5 s
UL = Maximum per-
missible touch volt-
age*:
(F 50 V AC,
F 120 V DC)
Residual-current L1 Residual- RA X IΔn F UL
L2
protective device L3 current IΔn = rated fault
N
F1 F1 F1 protective current
9 L1
L2
circuit
L3
N
PE PE PE
Residual-voltage L1 Residual- RA: max. 200 O

protective device L2 voltage
(for special L3 protective
N
cases) FU circuit
PE
*a Table, Page 9-41
For
Protective measures
Type of TT system
distribution
system

up to now tion/disconnection
Insulation –
monitoring
device
Overcurrent L1 Feed back RA X Id F UL (1)
protection L2 to ZS X Ia F Uo (2)
device L3 protective RA = Earthing
PE
multiple resistance of all
earthing conductive parts
connected to an earth
Id = Fault current in
the event of the first
fault with a negligible
impedance between a
phase conductor and
the protective
conductor or element 9
connected to it
UL = Maximum
permissible touch
voltage*:
F 50 V AC,
F 120 V DC
*a Table, Page 9-41

9-39
Protective measures
Type of IT system
distribution
system

so far tion/disconnection
Residual-current L1 Residual- RA X IΔn F UL
protective L2 current IΔn = rated fault
device L3 protective current
F1 F1 circuit
PE PE
Residual Residual- RA: max. 200 O

L1
voltage L2 voltage
protective L3 protective
device (for FU FU circuit
special cases)
PE PE
9
Insulation L1 Protective- R X Ia F UL
monitoring L2 conductor R = Resistance
L3
device PE system between components
and extraneous
Z<
conductive parts
햲
which can be touched
simultaneously
a additional potential
equalisation
*a Table, Page 9-41
For
Protective measures
The protective device must automatically specified in the table below. The internationally
disconnect the faulty part of the installation. At no agreed limit voltage with a maximum disconnect
part of the installation may there be a touch time of 5 s is 50 V AC or 120 V DC.
voltage or an effective duration greater than that
Maximum permissible effective duration dependent on touch voltage to IEC 364-4-41
Anticipated touch voltage Max.

t [s] permissible
5.0 disconnection
time
AC rms DC rms
2.0
[V] [V] [s]
1.0 < 50
50
< 120
120
·
5.0
0.5
75 140 1.0
90 160 0.5
0.2
110 175 0.2
0.1
150 200 0.1
0.05 220 250 0.05 9

280 310 0.03
0.02
50 100 200 300 400
U [V]

9-41
Notes
For
Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors
Cables and conductors must be protected by excessive warming, which may result both from
means of overcurrent protective devices against operational overloading and from short-circuit.
Overload protection
Overload protection means providing protective IB anticipated operating current of the circuit
devices which will interrupt overload currents in IZ current-carrying capacity of the cable or con-
the conductors of a circuit before they can cause ductor
temperature rises which may damage the In rated current of protection device
conductor insulation, the terminals and
connections or the area around the conductors. Note:
For the protection of conductors against overload For adjustable protective devices, In
the following conditions must be fulfilled (source: corresponds to the value set.
DIN VDE 0100-430) I2 The current which causes tripping of the
IB F In F IZ protective device under the conditions
specified in the equipment regulations (high
I2 F 1,45 IZ
test current).
Cu Operational current
ca rre
Re pa nt
of fer cit -ca
co en yI rry
nd ce ing 1.
uc va z 45
to lue
rI s I
z
B
A
9
I
Characteristics of
protective device
ng Iz
tti nt
se u rre
r
d -o in gc
te tI n ipp
Ra rren Tr
cu
Arrangement of protection devices for

overload protection
Protection devices for overload protection must be
fitted at the start of every circuit and at every point
where the current-carrying capacity is reduced
unless an upstream protection device can ensure
protection.

9-43
Note: prove hazardous. The circuits must be laid out in
Reasons for the current-carrying capacity being such a way that no possibility of overload currents
reduced: occurring need be considered.
Reduction of the conductor cross-section, a Examples:
different installation method, different conductor • Energizing circuits for rotating machines
insulation, a different number of conductors. • Feeder circuits of solenoids
Protective devices for overload protection must • Secondary circuits of current transformers
not be fitted if interruption of the circuit could • Circuits for safety purposes
Short-circuit protection
Short-circuit protection means providing Note:
protective devices which will interrupt This condition is met provided that there is a cable
short-circuit currents in the conductors of a circuit protective fuse up to 63 A rated current present
before they can cause a temperature rise which and the smallest cable cross-section to be
may damage the conductor insulation, the protected is at least 1.5 mm2 Cu.
terminals and connections, or the area around the
Arrangement of protective devices for
cables and conductors.
protection in the event of a short-circuit.
In general, the permissible disconnection time t Protective devices for protection in the event of a
for short circuits of up to 5 s duration can be short-circuit must be fitted at the start of every
specified approximately using the following circuit and at every point at which the short-circuit
equation: current-carrying capacity is reduced unless a
2 protective device fitted upstream can ensure the
t = ⎛⎝ kx --⎞⎠ or
S
I2 x t = k2 x S2 necessary protection in the event of a short circuit.
9 T
The meaning of the symbols is as follows:
t: permissible disconnection time in the event of
short-circuit in s
S: conductor cross-section in mm2
I: current in the cast of short-circuit in A
k: constants with the values
– 115 for PVC-insulated copper conductors
– 74 for PVC-insulated aluminium conductors
– 135 for rubber-insulated copper conductors
– 87 for rubber-insulated aluminium conduc-
tors
– 115 for soft-solder connections in copper
conductors
With very short permissible disconnection times

(< 0,1 s) the product from the equation k2 x S2
must be greater than the I2 x t value of the
current-limiting device stated by manufacturer.
For
Note: Short-circuit protection must not be provided
Causes for the reduction in the short-circuit where an interruption of the circuit could prove
current-carrying capacity can be: Reduction of the hazardous.
conductor cross-section, other conductor
insulation.
Protection of the phase conductors and the neutral conductor

Protection of the phase conductors Note:
Overcurrent protection devices must be provided This second condition is met provided that the
in every phase conductor: they must disconnect power transferred is divided as evenly as possible
the conductor in which the overcurrent occurs, but among the phase conductors, for example where
not necessarily also disconnect the other live the total power consumption of the load
conductors. connected between phase and neutral
Note: conductors, lamps and sockets is much less than
Where the disconnection of an individual phase the total power transferred via the circuit. The
conductor could prove hazardous, as for example, cross-section of the neutral conductor must not be
with three-phase motors, suitable precautions less than the values in the table on the next page.
must be taken. Motor-protective circuit-breakers 2. In installations without a directly earthed
and circuit-breakers disconnect in three poles as neutral point (IT system)
standard.
Where it is necessary for the neutral conductor to
Protection of the neutral conductor: be included, an overcurrent monitoring device
1. In installations with directly earthed neutral must be provided in the neutral conductor of each
point (TN or TT systems) circuit, to cause disconnection of all live
Where the cross-section of the neutral conductor conductors in the relevant circuit (including the 9
is less than that of the phase conductors, an neutral conductor).
overcurrent monitoring device appropriate to its
The overcurrent monitoring device may however
cross-section is to be provided in the neutral
be omitted where the neutral conductor in
conductor; this overcurrent monitoring device
must result in the disconnection of the phase question is protected against short circuit by an
conductors but not necessarily that of the neutral upstream protective device, such as in the
conductor. incoming section of the installation.
An overcurrent monitoring device is not necessary Disconnection of the neutral conductor
where: Where disconnection of the neutral conductor is
• the neutral conductor is protected in the event specified, the protective device used must be
of a short circuit by the protective device for the designed in such a way that the neutral conductor
phase conductors cannot under any circumstances be disconnected
• the largest current which can flow through the before the phase conductors and reconnected
neutral conductor is, in normal operation, again after them. 4-pole NZM circuit-breakers
considerably less than the current-carrying always meet these conditions.
capacity of this conductor.

9-45
9
9-46

Current-carrying capacity and protection of cables and conductors with
PVC insulation to DIN VDE 0298-4, at 25 °C ambient temperature
Type of cable or NYM, NYBUY, NHYRUZY, NYIF, NYY, NYCWY, NYKY, NYM,
conductor H07V-U, H07V-R, H07V-K, NYIFY NYMZ, NYMT, NYBUY,
NHYRUZY
Type of A1 B1 B2 C E
installation On or under the wall surface, under plaster
In heat-insulating walls, In electrical conduit or cable channel
in conduit under the
surface Single-core cable Multi-core cable Installed directly in In free air
the wall
햵 햵
0.3 d 0.3 d

Multi-core cable under Single wires in Multi-core cable in Multi-core cable
the surface conduit on the conduit on the wall Spur wiring in the
wall surface surface or on the floor wall or under plaster
Number of cores 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
Current-carrying capacity Iz in A at 25 °C Ib F In F Iz (Ib: operating current of the circuit). Circuit-breakers and
ambient temperature and 70 °C operating switch-disconnectors fulfil this condition. For overcurrent protective devices with
temperature. other tripping currents, the following formula applies:
The selection of overcurrent protective devices
is governed in general by conditions Ib F In F
Iz and I2 F 1.45 Iz. For overcurrent protection 1.45 Iz
In F ---------- ⋅ I n ; =
devices with a tripping current of I2 F In only x In
apply the condition:

(continued)
Type of A1 B1 B2 C E
installation
Number of 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
cores
Cross
section Cu
conductor Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In
in mm2
1.5 16.5 16 14 13 18.5 16 16.5 16 16.5 16 15 13 21 20 18.5 16 21 20 19.5 16
2.5 21 20 19 16 25 25 22 20 22 20 20 20 28 25 25 25 29 25 27 25
4 28 25 25 25 34 32 30 25 30 25 28 25 37 35 35 35 39 35 36 35
6 36 35 33 32 43 40 38 35 39 35 35 35 49 40 43 40 51 50 46 40
10 49 40 45 40 60 50 53 50 53 50 50 50 67 63 63 63 70 63 64 63
16 65 63 59 50 81 80 72 63 72 63 65 63 90 80 81 80 94 80 85 80
25 85 80 77 63 107 100 94 80 95 80 82 80 119 100 102 100 125 125 107 100
35 105 100 94 80 133 125 118 100 117 100 101 100 146 125 126 125 154 125 134 125
50 126 125 114 100 160 160 142 125 – – – – – – – – – – – –
70 160 160 144 125 204 200 181 160 – – – – – – – – – – – –

95 193 160 174 160 246 200 219 200 – – – – – – – – – – – –
120 223 200 199 160 285 250 253 250 – – – – – – – – – – – –
For overcurrent protective devices whose rated current In does not conform to the values given in the table, select the next lower available rated current value.
9-47
9
Minimum cross section for protective conductors to DIN VDE 0100-510 (1987-06, t),
DIN VDE 0100-540 (1991-11)
Protective conductor or PEN Protective conductor 3) laid

conductor 1) seperately
Phase Insulated power 0.6/1-kV cable Protected Unprotected 2)

conductor cables with 4
conductors
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
Cu Al Cu
to 0.5 0.5 – 2.5 4 4
0.75 0.75 – 2.5 4 4
1 1 – 2.5 4 4
1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 4 4
2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4
6 6 6 6 6 6
10 10 10 10 10 10
9 16 16 16 16 16 16
25 16 16 16 16 16
35 16 16 16 16 16
50 25 25 25 25 25
70 35 35 35 35 35
95 50 50 50 50 50
120 70 70 70 70 70
150 70 70 70 70 70
185 95 95 95 95 95
240 – 120 120 120 120
300 – 150 150 150 150
400 – 185 185 185 185
1) PEN conductor f 10 mm2 Cu or 18 mm2 Al.
2) It is not permissible to lay aluminium conductors without protection.
3) With phase conductors of f 95 mm2 or more, it is advisable to use non-insulted conductors
For
Conversion factors
When the ambient temperature is not 30 °C; to be
used for the current-carrying capacity of wiring or
cables in air to VDE 0298 Part 4
Insulation material*) NR/SR PVC EPR
Permissible operational temperature 60 °C 70 °C 80 °C
Ambient temperature °C Conversion factors
10 1.29 1.22 1.18
15 1.22 1.17 1.14
20 1.15 1.12 1.10
25 1.08 1.06 1.05
30 1.00 1.00 1.00
35 0.91 0.94 0.95
40 0.82 0.87 0.89
45 0.71 0.79 0.84
50 0.58 0.71 0.77
55 0.41 0.61 0.71
60 – 0.50 0.63 9
65 – – 0.55
70 – – 0.45
*) Higher ambient temperatures in accordance

with information given by the manufacturer

9-49
Converstion factors to VDE 0298 part 4
Grouping of several circuits
Arrangement Number of circuits

1 2 3 4 6 9 12 15 20
16
1 Embedded or 1.00 0.80 0.70 0.70 0.55 0.50 0.45 0.40 0.40
enclosed 0.65 0.57 0.41 0.38
2 Fixed to walls or 1.00 0.85 0.80 0.75 0.70 0.70 – – –
floors 0.79 0.72
3 Fixed to ceilings 0.95 0.80 0.70 0.70 0.65 0.60 – – –
0.81 0.72 0.68 0.64 0.61
4 Fixed to cable 0.97 0.87 0.77 0.73 0.72
trays arranged 1.00 0.90 0.80 0.75 0.75 0.70 – – –
horizontally or
vertically
5 Fixed to cable 1.00 0.84 0.83 0.81 0.79 0.78 – – –
trays or consoles 0.85 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80
For
Electrically critical equipment of machines
Extract from IEC/EN 60204-1: (VDE 0113 part 1)
This world wide binding standard is used for the must be sufficient to simultaneously disconnect
electrical equipment of machines, provided that the stalled current of the largest motor in the
for the type of machine to be equipped there is no machine and the total current drawn by all the
product standard (Type C). other loads in normal operation.
Safety requirements regarding the protection of Its Off position must be lockable and must not be
personnel, machines and material according to indicated until the specified clearances and
the European Machinery Directive are stressed creepage distances between all contacts have
under the heading “Safety of machines”. The been achieved. It must have only one On and one
degree of possible danger is to estimated by risk Off position with associated stops. Star-delta,
assessment (EN 1050). The Standard also includes reversing and multi-speed switches are not
requirements for equipment, engineering and permissible for use as mains isolating devices.
construction, as well as tests to ensure faultless The tripped position of circuit-breakers is not
function and the effectiveness of protective regarded as a switch position, therefore there is
measures. no restriction on their use as mains isolating
The following paragraphs are an extract from the devices.
Standard. Where there are several incomers, each one must
have a mains isolating device. Mutual interlocking
Mains isolating device (main switches) must be provided where a hazard may result from
only one mains isolating device being switched
Every machine must be equipped with a
off. Only circuit-breakers may be used as
manually-operated main switch, henceforth
remotely-operated switches. They must be
referred to as a mains isolating device. It must be
provided with an additional handle and be
possible to isolate the entire electrical equipment
lockable in the Off position.
of the machine from the mains using the mains 9
isolating device. The breaking capacity
Protection against electric shock

The following measures must be taken to protect interlock has been removed, it must still be
personnel against electric shock: possible to switch off the mains isolating device.
Protection against direct contact Where it is possible for an enclosure to be opened
This is understood as meaning protection by without using a key and without disconnection of
means of an enclosure which can only be opened the mains isolating device, all live parts must at
by qualified personnel using a key or special tool. the very least comply with IP 2X or IP XXB degree
Such personnel is not obliged to disable the mains of protection in accordance with IEC/EN 60529.
isolating device before opening the enclosure, Live Protection against indirect contact
parts must be protected against direct contact in This involves prevention of a dangerous touch
accordance with IEC 50274 or VDE 0660 part 514. voltage resulting from faulty insulation. To meet
Where the mains isolating device is interlocked this requirement, protective measures in
with the door, the restrictions mentioned in the accordance with IEC 60364 or VDE 0100 must be
previous paragraph cease to apply because the used. An additional measure is the use of
door can only be opened when the mains isolating protective insulation (protection class II) to
device is switched off. It is permissible for an IEC/EN 60439-1 or VDE 0660 Part 500.
interlock to be removable by an electrician using a
tool, e.g. in order to search for a fault. Where an

9-51
Protection of equipment
Protection in the event of power failure Overload protection of motors
When the power returns following a failure in the Continously operating motors above 0.5 kW must
supply, machines or parts of machines must not be protected against overload. Overload
start automatically where this would result in a protection is recommended for all other motors.
dangerous situation or damage to property. With Motors which are frequently starting and braking
contactor controls this requirement can easily be are difficult to protect and often require a special
met via self-maintaining circuits. protective device. Built-in thermal sensors are
For circuits with two-wire control, an additional particularly suitable for motors with restricted
contactor relay with three-wire control in the cooling. In addition, the fitting of overload relays
supply to the control circuit can carry out this is always recommended, particularly as protection
function. Mains isolating devices and by stalled rotor.
motor-protective circuit-breakers with
undervoltage releases also reliably prevent
automatic restarting on return of voltage.
Overcurrent protection
No overcurrent protective device is normally
required for the mains supply cable. Overcurrent
protection is provided by the protective device at
the head of the incoming supply. All other circuits
must be protected by means of fuses or
circuit-breakers.
The stipulation for fuses is that replacement must
9 be freely obtainable in the country in which the
fuses are used. This difficulty can be avoided by
using circuit-breakers, with the added benefits of
disconnection in all poles, rapid operational
readiness and prevention of single-phasing.
For
Control functions in the event of a fault
A fault in the electrical equipment must not result Furthermore, the following apply for both
in a dangerous situation or in damage. Suitable Emergency-Stop switch and Emergency control
measures must be taken to prevent danger from circuit device:
arising. The expense of using appropriate • The handle must be red with a yellow
measures can be extremely high if applied background
generally. To permit a better assessment of the • Emergency-Stop devices must be quickly and
magnitude of the risk in conjunction with the easily accessible in the event of danger
respective application, the Standard EN 954-1 has • The Emergency-Stop function must take
been published: precedence over all other functions and
„Safety-related parts of control systems Part 1: operations
General rules for design“. • It must be possible to determine functional
The use of risk assessment to EN 954-1 is dealt capability by means of tests, especially in severe
with in the Moeller manual “Safety Specifications environmental conditions
for Machines and Plant” (Order No. TB 0-009). • Where there is separation into several
Emergency-Stop areas, it must be clearly
Emergency-Stop device
discernible to which area an Emergency-Stop
Every machine which could potentially cause
device applies
danger must be equipped with an
Emergency-Stop device which, in a main circuit Emergency operations
may be an Emergency-Stop switch, and in a The term Emergency-Stop is short and concise,
control circuit an Emergency-Stop control circuit and should continue to be used for general usage.
device. It is not clear however from the term
Actuation of the Emergency-Stop device must Emergency-Stop which functions are carried out
with this. In order to be able to give a more precise
result in all current loads which could directly
definition here, IEC/EN 60204-1 describes under
9
result in danger, being disconnected by
de-energization via another device or circuit, i.e. the generic term “Emergency operations” two
electromechanical devices such as contactors, specific functions:
contactor relays or the undervoltage release of the 1. Emergency-Stop
mains isolating device. This involves the possibility of stopping dangerous
For direct manual operation, Emergency-Stop motions as quickly as possible.
control circuit devices must have a 2. Emergency-Off
mushroom-head push-button and positively Where there is a risk of an electric shock by direct
opening contacts. Once the Emergency-Stop contact, e.g. with live parts in electrical operating
control circuit device has been actuated, it must areas, then an Emergency-Off device shall be
only be possible to restart the machine after local provided.
resetting. Resetting alone must not allow
restarting.

9-53
Colours of push-buttons and their meanings
To IEC/EN 60073, VDE 0199, IEC/EN 60204-1
(VDE 0113 Part 1)
Colour Meaning Typical application
RED Emergency • Emergency-Stop

• Fire fighting
YELLOW Abnormal condition Intervention, to suppress abnormal
conditions or to avoid unwanted
changes
GREEN Safe condition Start from safe conditon
BLUE Enforced action Resetting function
WHITE No specific meaning assigned • Start/ON (preferred)
• Stop/OFF
GREY • Start/ON
• Stop/OFF
BLACK • Start/ON
• Stop/Off (preferred)
9
For
Colours of indicator lights and their meanings
To IEC/EN 60073, VDE 0199, IEC/EN 60204-1
(VDE 0113 Part 1)
Colour Meaning Explanation Typical application

RED Emergency Warning of potential danger or • Failure of pressure in the
a situation which requires lubricating system
immediate action • Temperature outside
specified (safe) limits
• Essential equipment
stopped by action of a
protective device
YELLOW Abnormal Impending critical condition • Temperature (or pressure)
condition different from normal level
• Overload, which is
permissible for a limited
time
• Resetting
GREEN Safe Indication of safe operating • Cooling liquid circulating
condition conditions or authorization to • Automatic tank control
proceed, clear way switched on 9
• Machine ready to be started
BLUE Enforced Operator action essential • Remove obstacle
action • Switch over to Advance
WHITE No specific Every meaning: may be used • Motor running
meaning whenever doubt exists about • Indication of operating
assigned the applicability of the colours modes
(neutral) RED, YELLOW or GREEN; or as
confirmation
Colours of illuminated push-buttons and their meanings

Both tables are valid for illuminated push-buttons,
Table 1 relating to the function of the actuators.

9-55
Measures for risk reduction
Risk reduction in the case of a fault
A fault in the electrical equipment must not result The IEC/EN 60204 -1 specifies a range of
in a dangerous situation or in damage. Suitable measures which can be taken to reduce danger in
measures must be taken to prevent danger from the event of a fault.
arising.
Use of proven circuit engineering and components
L01 L1
L2
⎧ ⎧ 0 햴
⎪ ⎪
⎪ 햳⎨
⎪ ⎪ 햵
⎪ ⎩
햲⎨
⎪
⎪
⎪
⎪ I K1
햶
⎩
K1
9
L02
햷
a All switching functions on the non-earthed Redundancy
side This means the existence of an additional device
b Use of break devices with positively opening or system which takes over the function in the
contacts (not to be confused with interlocked event of a fault.
opposing contacts)
c Shut-down by de-excitation (fail-safe in the
event of wire breakage)
d Circuit engineering measures which make
undesirable operational states in the event of
a fault unlikely (in this instance, simultaneous
interruption via contactor and position switch)
e Switching of all live conductors to the device
to be controlled
f Chassis earth connection of the control circuit
for operational purposes (not used as a
protective measure)
For
Measures for risk avoidance
Diversity
The construction of control circuits according to a
range of function principles or using various types
of device.
c
21
e a
22
13 K1 d
14
K2
b
K1 K2
a Functional diversity by combination of Function tests

normally open and normally break contacts The correct functioning of the equipment can be
b Diversity of devices due to use of various types tested either manually or automatically.
of device (here, various types of contactor
relay)
c Safety barrier open
d Feedback circuit
e Safety barrier closed

9-57
Degrees of protection for electrical equipment
Degrees of protection for electrical equipment by enclosures, covers and similar to IEC/EN
60529 (VDE 0470 part 1)
The designation to indicate degrees of enclosure of protection of persons against contact with live
protection consists of the characteristic letters IP parts and of equipment against ingress of solid
(Ingress Protection) followed by two characteristic foreign bodies and dust, the second numeral the
numerals. The first numeral indicates the degree degree of protection against the ingress of water.
Protection against contact and foreign bodies
First Degree of protection

numeral
Description Explanation
0 Not protected No special protection of persons against accidental contact with
live or moving parts.
No protection of the equipment against ingress of solid foreign
bodies.
1 Protection against Protection against contact with live parts with back of hand.
solid objects The access probe, sphere 50 mm diameter, must have enough
f 50 mm distance from dangerous parts.
The probe, sphere 50 mm diameter, must not fully penetrate.
2 Protection against Protection against contact with live parts with a finger.
solid objects The articulated test finger, 12 mm diameter and 80 mm length,
9 f 12,5 mm must have suffient distance from dangerous parts.
The probe, sphere 12,5 mm diameter, must not fully penetrate.
For
Protection against contact and foreign bodies
First Degree of protection

numeral
3 Protection against Protection against contact with live parts with a tool.
solid objects The entry probe, 2,5 mm diameter, must not penetrate.
f 2.5 mm The probe, 2,5 mm diameter, must not penetrate.
4 Protection against Protection against contact with live parts with a wire.
solid objects The entry probe, 1,0 mm diameter, must not fully penetrate.
f 1 mm The probe, 1,0 mm diameter, must not penetrate.
accumulation of The entry probe, 1,0 mm diameter, must not penetrate.
dust The ingress of dust is not totally prevented, but dust does not
enter in sufficient quantity to interfere with satisfactory opera-
tion of the equipment or with safety.
the ingress of dust The entry probe, 1,0 mm diameter, must not penetrate.
No entry of dust.
Dust-tight
9
Example for stating degree of protection: IP 4 4
Characteristic letter
First numeral
Second numeral

9-59
Protection against water
Second Degree of protection

numeral
0 Not protected No special protection
1 Protected against Dripping water (vertically falling drops) shall have no harmful
vertically dripping effect.
water
2 Protected against Dripping water shall have no harmful effect when the enclosure
dripping water, is tilted at any angle up to 15° from the vertical.
when enclosure
tilted up to 15°
3 Protected against Water falling as a spray at any angle up to 60° from the vertical
sprayed water shall have no harmful effect.
4 Protected against Water splashed against the enclosure from any direction shall
splashing water have no harmful effect.
5 Protected against Water projected by a nozzle against the equipment from any
water jets direction shall have no harmful effect.
6 Protected against Water projected in powerful jets against the enclosure from any
9 powerful water direction shall have no harmful effect.
jets
7 Protected against Ingress of water in harmful quantities shall not be possible when
the effects of the enclosure is immersed in water under defined conditions of
occasional pressure and time.
submersion
For
Second Degree of protection

numeral
8 Protected against Ingress of water in harmful quantities must not be possible when
the effects of the equipment is continuously submerged in water under
submersion conditions which are subject to agreement between
manufacturer and user.
These conditions must be more stringent than those for
characteristic numeral 7.
9K* Protected during Water which is directed against the enclosure under extremely
cleaning using high pressure from any direction must not have any harmful
high-pressure effects.
/steam jets Water pressure of 100 bar
Water temperature of 80 °C
* This characteristic numeral originates from DIN 40050 -9.

9-61
Degree of protection for electrical equipment for USA and Canada to IEC/EN 60529
(VDE 0470 part 1)
The IP ratings quoted in the table represent a not possible since the degree of protection tests
rough comparison only. A precise comparison is and the evaluation criteria differ.
Designation of the enclosure and the degree of Designation of the Comparable IP
protection enclosure and the degree of
degree of protection protection to
to CSA-C22.1, IEC/EN 60529
to NEC NFPA 70 to NEMA ICS 6-1993 CSA-C22.2 NO. DIN 40050
(National Electrical (R2001)1) 0.1-M1985
Code) to UL 50 to to EEMAC E 14-2-19932) (R1999)3)
NEMA 250-1997
Enclosure type 1 Enclosure type 1 Enclosure 1 IP20
General purpose Enclosure for general
purpose
Drip-tight Drip-proof Drip-proof enclosure
Dust-tight, rain-tight Dust-tight, rain-tight, Weather-proof
resistant to sleet and ice enclosure
Enclosure type 3 R Enclosure type 3 R
Rain-proof Rain-proof, resistant to sleet
9 and ice
Enclosure type 3 S Enclosure type 3 S
Dust-tight, rain-tight Dust-tight, rain-tight,
resistant to sleet and ice
Rain-tight, Dust-tight, water-tight Water-tight enclo-
water-tight sure
For
Designation of the enclosure and the degree of Designation of the Comparable IP

protection enclosure and the degree of
degree of protection protection to
to CSA-C22.1, IEC/EN 60529
to NEC NFPA 70 to NEMA ICS 6-1993 CSA-C22.2 NO. DIN 40050
(National Electrical (R2001)1) 0.1-M1985
Code) to UL 50 to to EEMAC E 14-2-19932) (R1999)3)
NEMA 250-1997
Enclosure type 4 X Enclosure type 4 X IP65
Rain-tight, Dust-tight, water-tight,
water-tight, corrosion-resistant
corrosion-resistant
Enclosure type 6 Enclosure type 6
Rain-tight Dust-tight, water-tight,
immersible, resistant to sleet
and ice
Enclosure type 6 P
Rain-tight,
corrosion-resistant
Drip-tight, Drip-tight,
corrosion-resistant corrosion-resistant,
oil-immersed 9
Dust-tight, drip-tight For use in industry, drip-tight, Dust-tight enclosure
dust-tight
Enclosure type 12 K
(As for type 12)
Dust-tight, drip-tight Dust-tight, oil-tight
1) NEMA = National Electrical Manufacturers

Association
2) EEMAC = Electrical and Electronic Manufac-
turers Association of Canada
3) CSA = Canadian Electrical Code, Part I (19th
Edition), Safety Standard for Electrical Instal-
lations

9-63
For
Notes

9-65
Type of Utilisation Typical examples of application Normal Abnorm

current catorgory conditions of
use
I = switch-on current, Ic = switch-off current,

Ie = rated operational current, U = voltage,
Ue = rated operational voltage Make Break Make
Ur = recovery voltage, I U c I U c I
t0.95 = time in ms to reach 95 % of the steady state
curent. Ie Ue Ie Ue Ie
P = Ue x Ie = rated power in Watts
AC AC-12 Control of resistive and solid state loads as in 1 1 0.9 1 1 0.9 –
optocoupler input circuits
AC-13 Control of solid state loads with transformer 2 1 0.65 1 1 0.65 10
isolation
AC-14 Control of small electromagnetic loads 6 1 0.3 1 1 0.3 6
(max. 72 VA)
AC-15 Control of electromagnetic loads (above 72 VA) 10 1 0.3 1 1 0.3 10
I U t0,95 I U t0,95 I
9 Ie Ue Ie Ue Ie
DC DC-12 Control of resistive and solid state loads as in 1 1 1 ms 1 1 1 ms –

optocoupler input circuits
DC-13 Control of electromagnets 1 1 6 x P1) 1 1 6 x P1) 1.1
6 x P1)
DC-14 Control of electromagnetic loads with economy 10 1 15 ms 1 1 15 ms 10
resistors in the circuit
to IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0600 part 200) 1) The value “6 x P” results from an empirical rela
to an upper limit of P = 50 W, i.e. 6 [ms]/[W] = 300
than 50 W are assumed to consist of smaller loads
limit, irrespective of the power consumption.
For
application Normal condi- Abnormal conditions of use

tions of use
nt, Ic = switch-off current,

nal current, U = voltage,
nal voltage Make Break Make Break
ge, I U c I U c c I U c
I U
reach 95 % of the steady state
Ie Ue Ie Ue Ie Ue Ie Ue
d power in Watts
and solid state loads as in 1 1 0.9 1 1 0.9 – – – – – –
ircuits
e loads with transformer isola- 2 1 0.65 1 1 0.65 10 1.1 0.65 1.1 1.1 0.65
ctromagnetic loads (max. 72 6 1 0.3 1 1 0.3 6 1.1 0.7 6 1.1 0.7
agnetic loads (above 72 VA) 10 1 0.3 1 1 0.3 10 1.1 0.3 10 1.1 0.3
I U t0,95 I U t0,95 I U t0,95 I U t0,95
Ie Ue Ie Ue Ie Ue Ie Ue 9
and solid state loads as in 1 1 1 ms 1 1 1 ms – – – – – –
ircuits
agnets 1 1 6 x P1) 1 1 6 x P1) 1.1 1.1 6 x P1) 1.1 1.1
6 x P1)
agnetic loads with economy 10 1 15 ms 1 1 15 ms 10 1.1 15 ms 10 1.1 15 ms
uit
200) 1) The value “6 x P” results from an empirical relationship that represents most DC magnetic loads
to an upper limit of P = 50 W, i.e. 6 [ms]/[W] = 300 [ms]. Loads having a power consumption greater
than 50 W are assumed to consist of smaller loads in parallel. Therefore, 300 ms is to be an upper
limit, irrespective of the power consumption.

9-67
North American classification for control switches
Classification Designation Thermal Switching capacity

At maximum rated voltage of uninterrupted
current
AC 600 V 300 V 150 V A Rated voltage V Make A Break A
Heavy Duty A600 A300 A150 10 120 60 6

A600 A300 – 10 240 30 3
A600 – – 10 480 15 1.5
A600 – – 10 600 12 1.2
Standard Duty B600 B300 B150 5 120 30 3
B600 B300 – 5 240 15 1.5
B600 – – 5 480 7.5 0.75
B600 – – 5 600 6 0.6
C600 C300 C150 2.5 120 15 1.5
C600 C300 – 2.5 240 7.5 0.75
C600 – – 2.5 480 3.75 0.375
C600 – – 2.5 600 3 0.3
– D300 D150 1 120 3.6 0.6
– D300 – 1 240 1.8 0.3
DC
9
Heavy Duty N600 N300 N150 10 125 2.2 2.2
N600 N300 – 10 250 1.1 1.1
N600 – – 10 301 to 600 0.4 0.4
Standard Duty P600 P300 P150 5 125 1.1 1.1
P600 P300 – 5 250 0.55 0.55
P600 – – 5 301 to 600 0.2 0.2
Q600 Q300 Q150 2.5 125 0.55 0.55
Q600 Q300 – 2.5 250 0.27 0.27
Q600 – – 2.5 301 to 600 0.10 0.10
– R300 R150 1.0 125 0.22 0.22
– R300 – 1.0 250 0.11 0.11
– – – – 301 to 600 – –
to UL 508, CSA C 22.2-14 and NEMA ICS 5
For
North American classification for control switches
Thermal unin- Switching capacity

d voltage of terrupted cur-
rent
300 V 150 V A Rated voltage V Make A Break A Make VA Break VA
A300 A150 10 120 60 6 7200 720

A300 – 10 240 30 3 7200 720
– – 10 480 15 1.5 7200 720
– – 10 600 12 1.2 7200 720
B300 B150 5 120 30 3 3600 360
B300 – 5 240 15 1.5 3600 360
– – 5 480 7.5 0.75 3600 360
– – 5 600 6 0.6 3600 360
C300 C150 2.5 120 15 1.5 1800 180
C300 – 2.5 240 7.5 0.75 1800 180
– – 2.5 480 3.75 0.375 1800 180
– – 2.5 600 3 0.3 1800 180
D300 D150 1 120 3.6 0.6 432 72
D300 – 1 240 1.8 0.3 432 72
9
N300 N150 10 125 2.2 2.2 275 275
N300 – 10 250 1.1 1.1 275 275
– – 10 301 to 600 0.4 0.4 275 275
P300 P150 5 125 1.1 1.1 138 138
P300 – 5 250 0.55 0.55 138 138
– – 5 301 to 600 0.2 0.2 138 138
Q300 Q150 2.5 125 0.55 0.55 69 69
Q300 – 2.5 250 0.27 0.27 69 69
– – 2.5 301 to 600 0.10 0.10 69 69
R300 R150 1.0 125 0.22 0.22 28 28
R300 – 1.0 250 0.11 0.11 28 28
– – – 301 to 600 – – – –

9-69
Utilisation categories for contactors
Type of Utilisation Typical examples of application Verification of Verification of s

current category I = switch-on current, electrical lifespan
Ic = switch-off current,
Ie = rated operational current, Make Break Make
U = voltage, c c
Ie I U Ic Ur Ie
Ue = rated operational voltage
Ur = recovery voltage A Ie Ue Ie Ue A I
AC AC-1 Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, All val- 1 1 0.95 1 1 0.95 All val- 1
resistance furnaces ues ues
AC-2 Slip-ring motors: starting, switch-off All val- 2.5 1 0.65 2.5 1 0.65 All val- 4
ues ues
AC-3 Squirrel-cage motors: stating, switch-off, Ie F 17 6 1 0.65 1 0.17 0.65 Ie F 100 8
switch-off during running4) Ie > 17 6 1 0.35 1 0.17 0.35 Ie > 100 8
AC-4 Sqirrel-cage motors: starting, plugging, Ie F 17 6 1 0.65 6 1 0.65 Ie F 100 10
reversing, inching Ie > 17 6 1 0.35 6 1 0.35 Ie > 100 10
AC-5A Switching of electric discharge lamp controls 3
AC-5B Switching of incandescent lamps 1.
)
9 AC-6A3) Switching of transformers

AC-6B3) Switching of capacitor banks
AC-7A Slightly inductive loads in household Data as 1
appliances and similar applications supplied by
the
manufacturer
AC-7B Motor load for household appliances 8
AC-8A Switching of hermetically enclosed 6
refrigerant compressor motors with manual
reset of overload releases5)
AC-8B Switching of hermetically enclosed 6
refrigerant compressor motors with
automatic reset of overload releases5)
AC-53a Switching of squirrel-cage motor with 8
semi-conductor contactors
For
pplication Verification of electri- Verification of switching capacity

cal lifespan
t,
current, Make Break Make Break
Ie I U c Ic Ur c Ie I U c Ic Ur c
al voltage
A Ie Ue Ie Ue A Ie Ue Ie Ue
htly inductive loads, All val- 1 1 0.95 1 1 0.95 All 1.5 1.05 0.8 1.5 1.05 0.8
ues values
ing, switch-off All val- 2.5 1 0.65 2.5 1 0.65 All 4 1.05 0.65 4 1.05 0.8
ues values
stating, switch-off, Ie F 17 6 1 0.65 1 0.17 0.65 Ie F 100 8 1.05 0.45 8 1.05 0.45
ning4) Ie > 17 6 1 0.35 1 0.17 0.35 Ie > 100 8 1.05 0.35 8 1.05 0.35
tarting, plugging, Ie F 17 6 1 0.65 6 1 0.65 Ie F 100 10 1.05 0.45 10 1.05 0.45
Ie > 17 6 1 0.35 6 1 0.35 Ie > 100 10 1.05 0.35 10 1.05 0.35
discharge lamp controls 3.0 1.05 0.45 3.0 1.05 0.45
scent lamps 1.52 1.052) 1.52 1.052)
) )
mers
r banks 9
ds in household appli- Data as sup- 1.5 1.05 0.8 1.5 1.05 0.8
lications plied by the
manufacturer
hold appliances 8.0 1.051) 8.0 1.051)

ally enclosed refriger- 6.0 1.051) 6.0 1.051)
rs with manual reset of
ally enclosed refriger- 6.0 1.051) 6.0 1.051)

rs with automatic reset
cage motor with 8.0 1.05 0.35 8.0 1.05 0.35

ctors

9-71
Type of Utilization Typical examples of application Verification of electrical Verification of sw

current category I = switch-on current, endurance
Ic = switch-off current,
Ie = rated operational current, Make Break Make
U = voltage,
Ue = rated operational voltage, L/R L/R
Ie I U Ic Ur Ie
Ur = recovery voltage ms ms
A Ie Ue Ie Ue A I
DC DC-1 Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, All values 1 1 1 1 1 1 All values 1

resistance furnaces
DC-3 Shunt motors: starting, plugging, All values 2.5 1 2 2.5 1 2 All values 4
reversing, inching, dynamic braking
DC-5 Series motors: starting, plugging, All values 2.5 1 7.5 2.5 1 7.5 All values 4
reversing, inching, dynamic braking 1
DC-6 Switching of incandescent lamps 2)
To IEC/EN 60 947-4-1, VDE 0660 Part 102

1) c = 0.45 for Ie F 100 A; c = 0.35 for Ie > 100 A. 4) Devices for utilization category AC-3 may be use
2) Tests must be carried out with an incandescent lamp load connected. period such as for setting up a machine; during
3) Here, the test data are to be derived from the AC-3 or AC-4 test values in accordance with TableVIIb, must not exceed a total of five per minute or m
9 IEC/EN 60 947-4-1. 5) Hermetically enclosed refrigerant compressor m
motor both of which are housed in the same enc
running in the refrigerant.
For
pplication Verification of electrical Verification of switching capacity

endurance
,
current, Make Break Make Break
l voltage, L/R L/R L/R L/R

Ie I U Ic Ur Ie I U Ic Ur
ms ms ms ms
A Ie Ue Ie Ue A Ie Ue Ie Ue
tly inductive loads, All values 1 1 1 1 1 1 All values 1.5 1.05 1 1.5 1.05 1
, plugging, revers- All values 2.5 1 2 2.5 1 2 All values 4 1.05 2.5 4 1.05 2.5
braking
, plugging, revers- All values 2.5 1 7.5 2.5 1 7.5 All values 4 1.05 15 4 1.05 15
braking 1.5 1.05 1.52) 1.052)
cent lamps 2) 2)
100 A. 4) Devices for utilization category AC-3 may be used for occasional inching or plugging during a limited
mp load connected. period such as for setting up a machine; during this limited time period, the number of operations
or AC-4 test values in accordance with TableVIIb, must not exceed a total of five per minute or more than ten in a ten minute period.
5) Hermetically enclosed refrigerant compressor motor means a combination of a compressor and a 9
motor both of which are housed in the same enclosure with no external shaft or shaft seals, the motor
running in the refrigerant.

9-73
Utilisation categories for switch-disconnectors
Type of Utilisation Typical examples of application Verification of Verification

current category I = switch-on current, electrical
Ic = switch-off current, endurance
Ie = rated operational current,
U = voltage, Make Break Make
Ue = rated operational voltage, Ie I U Ic Ur Ie
Ur = recovery voltage c c
A Ie Ue Ie Ue A
AC AC-20 A(B)2) Making and breaking without load All values 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) All val-
ues
AC-21 A(B)2) Switching resistive loads including low overloads All values 1 1 0.95 1 1 0.95 All val-
ues
AC-22 A(B)2) Switching mixed resistive and inductive loads All values 1 1 0.8 1 1 0.8 All val-
including low overloads ues
AC-23 A(B)2) Switching motors and other highly inductive All values 1 1 0.65 1 1 0.65 Ie F100
loads Ie > 100
Ie I U L/R Ic Ur L/R Ie
ms ms
A Ie Ue Ie Ue A
9 DC DC-20 A(B)2) Making and breaking without load All values 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) All val-
ues
DC-21 A(B)2) Switching resistive loads including low overloads All values 1 1 1 1 1 1 All val-
ues
DC-22 A(B)2) Switching mixed resistive and inductive loads, All values 1 1 2 1 1 2 All val-
including low overloads (e.g. shunt motors) ues
DC-23 A(B)2) Switching highly inductive loads (e.g. series All values 1 1 7.5 1 1 7.5 All val-
motors) ues
For load-break switches, switch-disconnectors and switch-fuse units to IEC/EN 60947-3
(VDE 0660 part 107)
1) If the switching device has a making and/or breaking capacity, the figures for the current and the
power factor (time constants) must be stated by the manufacturer.
2) A: frequent operation, B: occasional operation.
For
Utilisation categories for switch-disconnectors
of application Verification of Verification of switching capacity

ent, electrical
rent, endurance
onal current,
Make Break Make Break
ional voltage, I I U
U Ic Ur Ie Ic Ur
age c c c c
Ie Ue Ie Ue A Ie Ue Ie Ue
king without load All values 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) All 1) 1) 1) 1)
values
e loads including low overloads All values 1 1 0.95 1 1 0.95 All 1.5 1.05 0.95 1.5 1.05 0.95
values
esistive and inductive loads All values 1 1 0.8 1 1 0.8 All 3 1.05 0.65 3 1.05 0.65
rloads values
and other highly inductive All values 1 1 0.65 1 1 0.65 Ie F100 10 1.05 0.45 8 1.05 0.45
Ie > 100 10 1.05 0.35 8 1.05 0.35
I U L/R Ic Ur L/R Ie I U L/R Ic Ur L/R
ms ms ms ms
Ie Ue Ie Ue A Ie Ue Ie Ue
king without load All values 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) All 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 9

values
e loads including low overloads All values 1 1 1 1 1 1 All 1.5 1.05 1 1.5 1.05 1
values
esistive and inductive loads, All values 1 1 2 1 1 2 All 4 1.05 2.5 4 1.05 2.5
rloads (e.g. shunt motors) values
nductive loads (e.g. series All values 1 1 7.5 1 1 7.5 All 4 1.05 15 4 1.05 15
values
s and switch-fuse units to IEC/EN 60947-3 (VDE
aking capacity, the figures for the current and the

y the manufacturer.
n.

9-75
Notes
For
Rated operational currents
Motor operational currents for three-phase motors (standard values for squirrel cage
motors)
Minimum fuse size for short-circuit protec- Rated fuse currents for y/D starting also apply
tion of three-phase motors to three-phase motors with slip-ring rotors.
The maximum size is determined by the For higher rated currents, starting currents and/or
requirements of the switchgear or overload relay. longer starting times, larger fuses will be required.
The rated motor currents are for standard This table applies to “slow” or “gL” fuses (VDE
1500 r.p.m. motors with normal inner and outer 0636).
surface cooling.
In the case of low-voltage h.b.c. fuses (NH
D.O.L. starting: Maximum starting current: type) with aM characteristics, fuses are to
6 x rated current Maximum be selected according to their current
starting time: 5 sec. rating.
y/D starting: Maximum starting current:
2 x rated current Maximum
starting time: 15 sec.
Motor overload relay in
phase current: set to
0.58 x rated current.

9-77
Motor rating 230 V 400 V

Motor Fuse Motor Fuse
operation operation
rated
Direct y/d rated
Direct y/d
starting starting
current current
kW cos v h [%] A A A A A A
0.06 0.7 58 0.37 2 – 0.21 2 –
0.09 0.7 60 0.54 2 – 0.31 2 –
0.12 0.7 60 0.72 4 2 0.41 2 –
0.18 0.7 62 1.04 4 2 0.6 2 –
0.25 0.7 62 1.4 4 2 0.8 4 2
0.37 0.72 66 2 6 4 1.1 4 2
0.55 0.75 69 2.7 10 4 1.5 4 2
0.75 0.79 74 3.2 10 4 1.9 6 4
1.1 0.81 74 4.6 10 6 2.6 6 4
1.5 0.81 74 6.3 16 10 3.6 6 4
2.2 0.81 78 8.7 20 10 5 10 6
3 0.82 80 11.5 25 16 6.6 16 10
4 0.82 83 14.8 32 16 8.5 20 10
5.5 0.82 86 19.6 32 25 11.3 25 16
7.5 0.82 87 26.4 50 32 15.2 32 16
11 0.84 87 38 80 40 21.7 40 25
9
15 0.84 88 51 100 63 29.3 63 32
18.5 0.84 88 63 125 80 36 63 40
22 0.84 92 71 125 80 41 80 50
30 0.85 92 96 200 100 55 100 63
37 0.86 92 117 200 125 68 125 80
45 0.86 93 141 250 160 81 160 100
55 0.86 93 173 250 200 99 200 125
75 0.86 94 233 315 250 134 200 160
90 0.86 94 279 400 315 161 250 200
110 0.86 94 342 500 400 196 315 200
132 0.87 95 401 630 500 231 400 250
160 0.87 95 486 630 630 279 400 315
200 0.87 95 607 800 630 349 500 400
250 0.87 95 – – – 437 630 500
315 0.87 96 – – – 544 800 630
400 0.88 96 – – – 683 1000 800
450 0.88 96 – – – 769 1000 800
500 0.88 97 – – – – – –
560 0.88 97 – – – – – –
630 0.88 97 – – – – – –
For
Motor rating 500 V 690 V

Motor Fuse Motor Fuse
operation operation
rated
Direct y/d rated
Direct y/d
starting starting
current current
kW cos v h [%] A A A A A A
0.06 0.7 58 0.17 2 – 0.12 2 –
0.09 0.7 60 0.25 2 – 0.18 2 –
0.12 0.7 60 0.33 2 – 0.24 2 –
0.18 0.7 62 0.48 2 – 0.35 2 –
0.25 0.7 62 0.7 2 – 0.5 2 –
0.37 0.72 66 0.9 2 2 0.7 2 –
0.55 0.75 69 1.2 4 2 0.9 4 2
0.75 0.79 74 1.5 4 2 1.1 4 2
1.1 0.81 74 2.1 6 4 1.5 4 2
1.5 0.81 74 2.9 6 4 2.1 6 4
2.2 0.81 78 4 10 4 2.9 10 4
3 0.82 80 5.3 16 6 3.8 10 4
4 0.82 83 6.8 16 10 4.9 16 6
5.5 0.82 86 9 20 16 6.5 16 10
7.5 0.82 87 12.1 25 16 8.8 20 10
11 0.84 87 17.4 32 20 12.6 25 16
9
15 0.84 88 23.4 50 25 17 32 20
18.5 0.84 88 28.9 50 32 20.9 32 25
22 0.84 92 33 63 32 23.8 50 25
30 0.85 92 44 80 50 32 63 32
37 0.86 92 54 100 63 39 80 50
45 0.86 93 65 125 80 47 80 63
55 0.86 93 79 160 80 58 100 63
75 0.86 94 107 200 125 78 160 100
90 0.86 94 129 200 160 93 160 100
110 0.86 94 157 250 160 114 200 125
132 0.87 95 184 250 200 134 250 160
160 0.87 95 224 315 250 162 250 200
200 0.87 95 279 400 315 202 315 250
250 0.87 95 349 500 400 253 400 315
315 0.87 96 436 630 500 316 500 400
400 0.88 96 547 800 630 396 630 400
450 0.88 96 615 800 630 446 630 630
500 0.88 97 – – – 491 630 630
560 0.88 97 – – – 550 800 630
630 0.88 97 – – – 618 800 630

9-79
Motor rated currents for North American three-phase motors1)
Motor rating Motor rated operational current in Amperes2)

HP 115 V 230 V3) 460 V 575 V
1/2 4.4 2.2 1.1 0.9
3/4 6.4 3.2 1.6 1.3
1 8.4 4.2 2.1 1.7
11/2 12 6.0 3.0 2.4
2 13.6 6.8 3.4 2.7
3 9.6 4.8 3.9
5 15.2 7.6 6.1
71/2 22 11 9
10 28 14 11
15 42 21 17
20 54 27 22
25 68 34 27
30 80 40 32
40 104 52 41
50 130 65 52
60 154 77 62
75 192 96 77
100 248 124 99
9 125 312 156 125
150 360 180 144
200 480 240 192
250 302 242
300 361 289
350 414 336
400 477 382
450 515 412
500 590 472
1) Source: 1/2–200 HP = NEC Code, Table 430-150
= CSA-C22.1-1986, Table 44
250–500 HP = UL 508, Table 52.2
2) The motor full-load current values given are approximate values. For exact values consult the data
stated by the manufacturer or the motor rating plates.
3) For motor full-load currents of 208 V motors/200 V motors, use the appropriate values for 230 V
motors, increased by 10–15 %.
For
Conductors
Wiring and cable entries with grommets
Cable entry into closed devices is considerably Cable grommets
simplified and improved by using cable grommets. For direct and quick cable entry into an enclosure
and as a plug.
Membrane- Conductor Hole Cable Using cable NYM/NYY, Cable

grommit entry diameter external 4 core grommit
metric diameter part no
mm mm mm2
M16 16.5 1–9 H03VV-F3 x 0.75 KT-M16
NYM 1 x 16/3 x 1.5
M20 20.5 1–13 H03VV-F3 x 0.75 KT-M20
NYM 5 x 1.5/5 x 2.5
M25 25.5 1–18 H03VV-F3 x 0.75 KT-M25
• IP66, with
NYM 4x 10
integrated
push-through M32 32.5 1–25 H03VV-F3 x 0.75 KT-M32
membrane NYM 4 x 16/5 x 10
• PE and ther-
moplastic
elastomer,
halogen
free
9

9-81
Conductors
Wiring and cable entries with cable glands
Cable glands, metric to EN 50262
with 9, 10, 12, 14 or 15 mm long thread.
Cable glands Conductor Hole Cable Using cable NYM/NYY, Cable

entry diameter external 4 core gland
diameter part no
mm mm mm2
M12 12.5 3–7 H03VV-F3 x 0.75 V-M12
NYM 1 x 2.5
M16 16.5 4.5–10 H05VV-F3 x 1.5 V-M16
NYM 1 x 16/3 x 1.5
M20 20.5 6–13 H05VV-F4 x 2.5/3 x 4 V-M20
NYM 5 x 1.5/5 x 2.5
• with locknut
and integrated M25 25.5 9–17 H05VV-F5 x 2.5/5 x 4 V-M25
strain relief NYM 5 x 2.5/5 x 6
• IP68 up to 5
M32 32.5 13–21 NYM 5 x 10 V-M32
bar, polyamid,
halogen free M32 32.5 18–25 NYM 5 x 16 V-M32G1)
M40 40.5 16–28 NYM 5 x 16 V-M40
M50 50.5 21–35 NYM 4 x 35/5 x 25 V-M50
9
M63 63.5 34–48 NYM 4 x 35 V-M63
1) Does not correspond to EN 50262.
For
Conductors
External diameter of conductors and cables
Number of Approximate external diameter (average of various makes)
conductors NYM NYY H05 H07 NYCY
RR-F RN-F NYCWY
Cross-section mm mm mm mm mm
mm2 max. max. max.
2 x 1.5 10 11 9 10 12
2 x 2.5 11 13 13 11 14
3 x 1.5 10 12 10 10 13
3 x 2.5 11 13 11 12 14
3 x 4 13 17 – 14 15
3 x 6 15 18 – 16 16
3 x 10 18 20 – 23 18
3 x 16 20 22 – 25 22
4 x 1.5 11 13 9 11 13
4 x 2.5 12 14 11 13 15
4 x 4 14 16 – 15 16
4 x 6 16 17 – 17 18
4 x 10 18 19 – 23 21
4 x 16 22 23 – 27 24
4 x 25 27 27 – 32 30
4 x 35 30 28 – 36 31
4 x 50 – 30 – 42 34
4 x 70 – 34 – 47 38
4 x 95 – 39 – 53 43 9
4 x 120 – 42 – – 46
4 x 150 – 47 – – 52
4 x 185 – 55 – – 60
4 x 240 – 62 – – 70
5 x 1.5 11 14 12 14 15
5 x 2.5 13 15 14 17 17
5 x 4 15 17 – 19 18
5 x 6 17 19 – 21 20
5 x 10 20 21 – 26 –
5 x 16 25 23 – 30 –
8 x 1.5 – 15 – – –
10 x 1.5 – 18 – – –
16 x 1.5 – 20 – – –
24 x 1.5 – 25 – – –
NYM: sheathed conductor NYCY: cable with concentric conductor and plastic
NYY: plastic-sheathed cable sheath
H05RR-F: light rubber-sheathed flexible cable NYCWY: cable with concentric wave-form
(NLH + NSH) conductor and plastic sheath

9-83
Conductors
Cables and wiring, type abbreviation
Identification of specification
Harmonized specification H
Recognized national type A
Rated voltage UO/U
300/300V 03
300/500 V 05
450/750 V 07
Insulating material
PVC V
Natural- and/or synthetic rubber R
Silicon rubber S
Sheathing material
PVC V
Natural- and/or synthetic rubber R
Polychloroprene rubber N
Fibre-glass braid J
Textile braid T
9 Special construction feature

Flat, separable conductor H
Flat, non-separable conductor H2
Type of cable
Solid -U
Stranded -R
Flexible with cables for fixed installation -K
Flexible with flexible cables -F
Highly flexible with flexible cables -H
Tinsel cord -Y
Number of cores ...
Protective conductor
Without protective conductors X
With protective conductors G
Rated conductor cross-section ...
Examples for complete cable designation Heavy rubber-sheathed cable, 3-core, 2.5 mm2
PVC-sheathed wire, 0.75 mm2flexible, H05V-K without green/yellow protective conductor
0.75 black A07RN-F3 x 2.5
For
Notes

9-85
Conductors
Conversion of North American cable cross sections into mm2
USA/Canada Europe
AWG/circular mills mm2 mm2

(exact) (next standard size)
22 0.326 0.4
21 0.411
20 0.518 0.5
19 0.653
18 0.823 0.75
17 1.04 1
16 1.31 1.5
15 1.65
14 2.08
13 2.62 2.5
12 3.31 4
11 4.17
9 10 5.26 6
9 6.63
8 8.37 10
7 10.50
6 13.30 16
5 16.80
4 21.20 25
3 26.70
2 33.60 35
1 42.40
1/0 53.50 50
2/0 67.40 70
3/0 85
4/0 107 95
For
Conductors
USA/Canada Europe
AWG/circular mills mm2 mm2

(exact) (next standard size)
circular mills
250.000 127 120

300.000 152 150
350.000 177 185
400.000 203
450.000 228
500.000 253 240
550.000 279
600.000 304 300
650.000 329
700.000 355
750.000 380
800.000 405
9
850.000 431
12900.000 456
950.000 481
1.000.000 507 500
1.300.000 659 625
In addition to “circular mills”, cable sizes are often given in “MCM”: 250 000 circular mills =
250 MCM

9-87
Conductors
Rated currents and short-circuit currents for standard transformers
Rated voltage
400/230 V 525 V 690/400
Un
Short-circuit 4% 6% 4% 6%
voltage UK
Rated capacity Rated current Short-circuit Rated current Short-circuit Rated cu
current current
In IK’’ In IK’’ In
kVA A A A A A A A
50 72 1805 – 55 1375 – 42
100 144 3610 2406 110 2750 1833 84
160 230 5776 3850 176 4400 2933 133
200 288 7220 4812 220 5500 3667 168
250 360 9025 6015 275 6875 4580 210
315 455 11375 7583 346 8660 5775 263
9 400 578 14450 9630 440 11000 7333 363
500 722 18050 12030 550 13750 9166 420
630 909 22750 15166 693 17320 11550 526
800 1156 – 19260 880 – 14666 672
1000 1444 – 24060 1100 – 18333 840
1250 1805 – 30080 1375 – 22916 1050
1600 2312 – 38530 1760 – 29333 1330
2000 2888 – 48120 2200 – 36666 1680
For
Conductors
525 V 690/400 V
6% 4% 6% 4% 6%
rcuit Rated current Short-circuit Rated current Short-circuit

current current
In IK’’ In IK’’
A A A A A A A
– 55 1375 – 42 1042 –
2406 110 2750 1833 84 2084 1392
3850 176 4400 2933 133 3325 2230
4812 220 5500 3667 168 4168 2784
6015 275 6875 4580 210 5220 3560
7583 346 8660 5775 263 6650 4380
9630 440 11000 7333 363 8336 5568
9
12030 550 13750 9166 420 10440 7120
15166 693 17320 11550 526 13300 8760
19260 880 – 14666 672 – 11136
24060 1100 – 18333 840 – 13920
30080 1375 – 22916 1050 – 17480
38530 1760 – 29333 1330 – 22300
48120 2200 – 36666 1680 – 27840

9-89
Formulea
Ohm's Law
U = I × R [V ] U U
I = --- [ A ] R = --- [ Ω ]
R I
Resistance of a piece of wire
l Copper: m
R = ------------ [ Ω ] χ = 57 --------------2-
χ×A Ωmm
l = Length of conductor [m] Aluminium: m
χ = 33 --------------2-
Ωmm
z = Conductivity [m/Omm2] Iron: m
χ = 8.3 --------------2-
Ωmm
A = Conductor cross section [mm2] Zinc: m
χ = 15.5 --------------2-
Ωmm
Resistances
Transformer XL = 2 × π × f × L [ Ω ]
Capacitors 1
X C = ----------------------------- [ Ω ]
2×π×f×C
Impedance 2 2 R
9 Z = R + ( XL – XC ) Z = ----------- [ Ω ]
cosϕ
L = Inductance [H] f = Frequency [Hz]
C = Capacitance [F] v = Phase angle
XL = Inductive impedance [O]
XC = Capacitive impedance [O]
Parallel connection of resistances
With 2 parallel resistances: With 3 parallel resistances:
R1 × R2 R1 × R2 × R3
R g = ---------------- [ Ω ] - [Ω]
R g = --------------------------------------------------------------
R1 + R2 R1 × R2 + R2 × R3 + R1 × R3
General calculation of resistances:

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
--- = ----- + ----- + ----- + ... [ 1 ⁄ Ω ] -- = ---- + ---- + ---- + ... [ 1 ⁄ Ω ]
R R1 R2 R3 Z Z1 Z2 Z3
--1- = ----
1- ----
1 1
+ - + ----- + ... [ 1 ⁄ Ω ]
X X1 X2 X3
For
Formulea
Electric power
Power Current consumption

DC P = U × I [W] P
I = --- [ A ]
U
Single-phase AC P = U × I × cosϕ [ W ] P
I = --------------------- [ A ]
U × cosϕ
Three-phase AC P = 3 × U × I × cosϕ [ W ] P
I = ---------------------------------- [ A ]
3 × U × cosϕ
Mechanical force between 2 parallel conductors
2 conductors with currents I1 and I2
0.2 × I 1 × I 2 × s I1
- [N]
F 2 = ----------------------------------
a
I2 a
s = Support spacing clearance
s
[cm]
a = Support spacing clearance
[cm]
9
Mechanical force between 3 parallel conductors
3 conductors with current I

F 3 = 0.808 × F 2 [ N ]
F 3 = 0.865 × F 2 [ N ]
F 3 = 0.865 × F 2 [ N ]

9-91
Formulea
Voltage drop
Known power Known current

DC 2×l×P 2×l×l
ΔU = ---------------------- [ V ] ΔU = ------------------ [ V ]
z×A×U z×A
Single-phase AC 2×l×P 2×l×l

ΔU = ---------------------- [ V ] ΔU = ------------------ × cos ϕ [ V ]
z×A×U z×A
Three-phase AC l×P
ΔU = ---------------------- [ V ] l×l
z×A×U ΔU = 3 × ------------ × cos ϕ [ V ]
z×A
Calculation of cross-section from voltage drop
DC Single-phase AC Three-phase AC
Known power
2×l×P 2 2×l×P 2 l×P 2

A = ---------------------- [ mm ] A = ---------------------- [ mm ] A = ---------------------- [ mm ]
z×u×U z×u×U z×u×U
Known current
2×l×l 2 2×l×l 2 l×l 2

9 A = ------------------ [ mm ] A = ------------------ × cosϕ [ mm ] A = 3 × ------------ × cos ϕ [ mm ]
z×u z×u z×u
Power loss
DC Single-phase AC
2×l×P×P 2×l×P×P
P Verl = -------------------------------- [ W ] P Verl = ------------------------------------------------------------------- [ W ]
z×A×U×U z × A × U × U × cosϕ × cosϕ
Three-phase AC
l×P×P
P Verl = ------------------------------------------------------------------- [ W ]
z × A × U × U × cosϕ × cosϕ
l = Single length of conductor [m];

A = Conductor cross section [mm2];
m
z = Conductivity (copper: z = 57; aluminium: z = 33; iron: z = 8.3 --------------2- )
Ωmm
For
Formulea
Power of electric motors
Output Current consumption

DC P1 = U × l × h [ W ] P1
- [A]
l = ------------
U×h
Single-phase P 1 = U × l × cosϕ × h [ W ] P1
AC - [A]
l = ------------------------------
U × cosϕ × h
Three-phase P 1 = (1.73) × U × l × cosϕ × h [ W ] P1

AC - [A]
l = -------------------------------------------------
(1.73) × U × cosϕ × h
P1 = Rated mechanical power at the motor shaft

P2 = Electrical power consumption
Efficiency P P1
h = -----1 × (100 %) P 2 = ----- [ W ]
P2 h
No. of poles Synchronous speed Full-load speed

2 3000 2800–2950
4 1500 1400–1470
6 1000 900–985
9
8 750 690–735
10 600 550–585
Synchronous speed = approx. no-load speed

9-93
International Unit System
International Unit System (SI)
Basic parameters Symbol SI basic unit Further related SI units

Physical
parameters
Length l m (Metre) km, dm, cm, mm, mm,
nm, pm
Mass m kg (Kilogram) Mg, g, mg, mg
Time t s (Second) ks, ms, ms, ns
Electrical current I A (Ampere) kA, mA, mA, nA, pA
Thermo-dynamic T K (Kelvin) –
temperature
Amount of n mole (Mol) Gmol, Mmol, kmol,
substance mmol, mmol
Luminous intensity Iv cd (Candela) Mcd, kcd, mcd
Factors for conversion of old units into SI units

Conversion factors
Parameter Old unit SI unit exact Approximate

9
Force 1 kp 9.80665 N 10 N
1 dyn 1·10-5 N 1·10-5 N
Momentum of 1 mkp 9.80665 Nm 10 Nm
force
Pressure 1 at 0.980665 bar 1 bar
1 Atm = 760 Torr 1.01325 bar 1.01 bar
1 Torr 1.3332 mbar 1.33 bar
1 mWS 0.0980665 bar 0.1 bar
1 mmWS 0.0980665 mbar 0.1 mbar
1 mmWS 9.80665 Pa 10 Pa
Tension kp N N
1 ----------2 9.80665 ----------2 10 ----------2
mm mm mm
Energy 1 mkp 9.80665 J 10 J
1 kcal 4.1868 kJ 4.2 kJ
1 erg 1·10-7 J 1·10-7 J
For
Conversion factors
Parameter Old unit SI unit exact Approximate
Power kcal kJ kJ
1 -------- 4.1868 ---- 4.2 ----
h h h
kcal 1.163 W 1.16 W

1 --------
h
1 PS 0.73549 kW 0.740 kW
Heat transfer kcal kJ kJ -
coefficient 1 --------------
2
- 4.1868 ------------
2
4.2 -----------
2
m h°C m hK m hK
kcal W W
1 --------------
2
- 1.163 ---------
2
1.16 ---------
2
m h°C m K m K
dynamic viscosity –6 kps –5 Ns- – 5 Ns
1 ⋅ 10 -------2- 0, 980665 ⋅ 10 -----
2
1 ⋅ 10 -----2-
m m m
1 Poise Ns Ns
0.1 -----2- 0.1 -----2-
m m
1 Poise 0.1 Pa ⋅ s
Kinetic viscosity 1 Stokes 2 2
9
–4 m –4 m-
1 ⋅ 10 ------ 1 ⋅ 10 -----
s s
Angle (flat) 1 1- –3
------- pla 2, 78 ⋅ 10 pla
360
1 gon 1 –3
-------- pla 2, 5 ⋅ 10 pla
400
1 π-
------- 17, 5 ⋅ 10 rad
–3
rad
180
1 gon π-
------- 15, 7 ⋅ 10 pla
–3
rad
200
57.296 1 rad
63.662 gon 1 rad

9-95
Conversion of SI units, coherences
Conversion of SI units and coherences
Parameter SI units Symbol Basic unit Conversion of SI units
name
Force Newton N kg ⋅ m
1 ⋅ -------------
2
-
s
Force Newton- Nm 2
kg ⋅ m
momentum metre 1 ⋅ ---------------
2
-
s
Pressure Bar bar 5 kg 5 5 N
10 -------------2 1 bar = 10 Pa = 10 -----2-
m⋅s m
Pascal Pa kg –5
1 ⋅ -------------2 1 Pa = 10 bar
m⋅s
Energy, heat Joule J 2 1 J = 1 Ws = 1 Nm
kg ⋅ m
1 ⋅ ---------------
2
-
s
Power Watt W
kg ⋅ m
2 J N⋅m
1 ⋅ ---------------
- W = 1 - = 1 ------------
3 s s
s
Tension N- 6 kg N 2 N
--------- 10 -------------2 1 ----------2 = 10 -------2-
9 mm
2
m⋅s mm cm
Angle (flat) Grad 1 360° = 1 pla = 2p rad
Gon gon 400 gon = 360°
Radian rad m
1 ----
m
Full circle pla 1 pla = 2p rad = 360°
Voltage Volt V 2 W
kg ⋅ m 1 V = 1 ⋅ ----
1 ⋅ ---------------
3
- A
s ⋅A
Resistor Ohm O 2 V W
kg ⋅ m 1 Ω = 1 ⋅ --- = 1 ⋅ -----2
1 ⋅ ---------------
3 2
- A
s ⋅A A
Conductivity Siemens S 3 2 2
s ⋅A A A
1 ⋅ ----------------2 1 M = 1 ⋅ --- = 1 ⋅ -----
kg ⋅ m V W
Electric Coulomb C 1· A · s
charge
For
Conversion of SI units and coherences

Parameter SI units Symbol Basic unit Conversion of SI units
name
Capacitance Farad F 4 2
s ⋅A C s⋅A
1 ⋅ ----------------2 1 F = 1 ⋅ --- = 1 ⋅ ------------
kg ⋅ m V W
Field strength V kg ⋅ m V W
---- 1 ⋅ -------------
- 1 ---- = 1 ⋅ ------------
m 3
s ⋅A m A⋅m
Flux Weber Wb
kg ⋅ m
2 W⋅s
1 ⋅ ---------------
- 1 W b = 1 ⋅ V ⋅ s = 1 ⋅ -----------
2 A
s ⋅A
Flux density Tesla T kg Wb V⋅s W⋅s
1 ⋅ -----------
2
- 1 T = ------2 = 1 ⋅ --------- = 1 ⋅ ----------
-
s ⋅A m m
2
m A
2
Inductance Henry H 2 Wb V⋅s W⋅s

kg ⋅ m- 1 H = ------ = 1 ⋅ --------- = 1 ⋅ ----------
-
1 ⋅ ---------------
2
s ⋅A
2 A A A
2
Decimal powers (parts and multiples of units)
Power Prefix Symbol Power Prefix Symbol

10–18 Atto a 10–1 Deci d
9
10–15 Femto f 10 Deca da
10–12 Pico p 102 Hecto h
10–9 Nano n 103 Kilo k
10–6 Micro m 106 Mega M
10–3 Milli m 109 Giga G
10–2 Centi c 1012 Tera T

9-97
Physical units
Obsolete units
Mechanical force
SI unit: N (Newton) J/m
(Joule/m)
Previous unit: kp (kilopond)
dyn (Dyn)
1N = 1 J/m = 1 kg m/s2 = 0.102 kp = 105 dyn
1 J/m =1N = 1 kg m/s2 = 0.102 kp = 105 dyn
1 kg m/s2 =1N = 1 J/m = 0.102 kp = 105 dyn
1 kp = 9.81 N = 9.81 J/m = 9.81 kg m/s2 = 0.981 106 dyn
1 dyn = 10–5 N = 10–5 J/m = 10–5 kg m/s2 = 1.02 10–5 kp
Pressure
SI unit: Pa (Pascal) bar (Bar)
Previous at = kp/cm2 = 10 m Ws
unit: Torr = mm Hg
9 atm
1 Pa = 1 N/m2 = 10–5 bar
1 Pa = 10–5 bar = 10.2 · 10–6 at = 9.87 · 10–6 at = 7.5 · 10–3 Torr
1 bar = 105 Pa = 1.02 at = 0.987 at = 750 Torr
1 at = 98.1 · 103 Pa = 0.981 bar = 0.968 at = 736 Torr
1 atm = 101.3 · 103 Pa = 1.013 bar = 1.033 at = 760 Torr
1 Torr = 133.3 Pa = 1.333 · 10–3 bar = 1.359 · 10–3 at = 1.316 · 10–3 atm
For
Work
SI unit: J (Joule)
Nm (Newtonmeter)
SI unit: Ws (Wattsecond)
(as before) kWh (Kilowatthour)
Previous unit: kcal (Kilocalorie) = cal · 10–3
1 Ws =1J = 1 Nm 107 erg
1 Ws = 278 · 10–9 kWh = 1 Nm =1J = 0.102 kpm = 0.239 cal
1 kWh = 3.6 · 106 Ws = 3.6 · 106 Nm = 3.6 · 106 J = 367 · 106 kpm = 860 kcal
1 Nm = 1 Ws = 278 · 10–9 kWh =1J = 0.102 kpm = 0.239 cal
1J = 1 Ws = 278 · 10–9 kWh = 1 Nm = 0.102 kpm = 0.239 cal
1 kpm = 9.81 Ws = 272 · 10–6 kWh = 9.81 Nm = 9.81 J = 2.34 cal
1 kcal = 4.19 · 103 Ws = 1.16 · 10–3 kWh = 4.19 · 103 Nm = 4.19 · 103 J = 427 kpm
Power
SI unit: Nm/s (Newtonmetre/s)
J/s (Joule/s)
SI unit: W (Watt)
(as before) kW (Kilowatt) 9
Previous unit: kcal/s (Kilocalorie/sec.) = cal/s · 103
kcal/h (Kilocalorie/hour.) = cal/h · 106
kpm/s (Kilopondmetre/Sec.)
PS (metric horsepower)
1W = 1 J/s = 1 Nm/s
1W = 10–3 kW = 0.102 kpm/s = 1.36 ·10–3 PS = 860 cal/h = 0.239 cal/s
1 kW = 103 W = 102 kpm/s = 1.36 PS = 860 ·103 cal/h = 239 cal/s
1 kpm/s = 9.81 W = 9.81 · 10–3 kW = 13.3 ·10–3 PS = 8.43 ·103 cal/h = 2.34 cal/s
1 PS = 736 W = 0.736 kW = 75 kpm/s = 632 · 103 cal/h = 176 cal/s
1 kcal/h = 1.16 W = 1.16 · 10–3 kW = 119 · 10–3 kpm/s = 1.58 ·10–3 PS = 277.8 · 10–3 cal/s
1 cal/s = 4.19 W = 4.19 · 10–3 kW = 0.427 kpm/s = 5.69 · 10–3 PS = 3.6 kcal/h

9-99
Magnetic field strength
SI unit: A- Ampere
--- -----------------
m Metre
Previous unit: Oe = (Oerstedt)
A kA
1 ---- = 0, 001 ----- = 0.01256 Oe
m m
kA A
1 ----- = 1000 ---- = 12.56 Oe
m m
A kA
1 Oe = 79, 6 ---- = 0, 0796 -----
m m
Magnetic field strength

SI unit Wb (Weber)
mWb (Microweber)
Previous unit: M = Maxwell
1 Wb = 1 Tm2
1 Wb = 106 mWb = 108 M
9 1 mWb = 10–6 Wb = 100 M

1M = 10–8 Wb = 0.01 mWb
Magnetic flux density

SI unit: T (Tesla)
mT (Millitesla)
Previous unit: G = Gauss
1T = 1 Wb/m2
1T = 103 mT = 104 G
1 mT = 10–3 T = 10 G
1G = 0.1–3 T = 0.1 mT
For
Conversion of Imperial/American units into SI units
Length 1 in 1 ft 1 yd 1 mile 1 mile

Land mile Sea mile
m 25.4 · 10 –3 0.3048 0.9144 1.609 ·103 1.852 · 103
Weight 1 lb 1 ton (UK) 1 cwt (UK) 1 ton (US) 1 ounce 1 grain
long ton long cwt short ton
kg 0.4536 1016 50.80 907.2 28.35 ·10–3 64.80 ·10–6
Area 1 sq.in 1 sq.ft 1 sq.yd 1 acre 1 sq.mile
m2 0.6452 · 10–3 92.90 · 10–3 0.8361 4.047 · 103 2.590 · 103
Volume 1 cu.in 1 cu.ft 1 cu.yd 1 gal (US) 1 gal (UK)
m3 16.39 · 10–6 28.32 · 10–3 0.7646 3.785 · 10–3 4.546 · 10–3
Force 1 lb 1 ton (UK) 1 ton (US) 1 pdl
long ton short ton (poundal)
N 4.448 9.964 ·103 8.897 ·103 0.1383
Speed mile 1 Knot ft ft
1 ---------- 1 --- 1 ---------
h s min
m 0.4470 0.5144 0.3048 5.080 ·10–3

----
s 9
Pressure lb 1 in Hg 1 ft H2O 1 in H2O
1 ----------- 1 psi
sq.in
bar 65.95 · 10-3 33.86 · 10-3 29.89 · 10-3 2.491 · 10-3
Energy, 1 HPh 1 BTU 1 PCU
Work
J 2.684 ·106 1.055 ·103 1.90·103

9-101
Conversion of Imperial/American units into SI units
Length 1 cm 1m 1m 1 km 1 km
0.3937 in 3.2808 ft 1.0936 yd 0.6214 mile 0.5399 mile
Surface mile Nautical mile
Weight 1g 1 kg 1 kg 1t 1t
15.43 grain 35.27 ounce 2.2046 lb. 0.9842 long 1.1023 short
ton ton
Area 1cm2 1 m2 1 m2 1 m2 1 km2
0.1550 sq.in 10.7639 sq.ft 1.1960 sq.yd 0.2471 · 10–3 0.3861
acre sq.mile
Volume 1cm3 1l 1 m3 1 m3 1 m3
0.06102 cu.in 0.03531 cu.ft 1.308 cu.yd 264.2 gal (US) 219.97 gal
(UK)
Force 1N 1N 1N 1N
0.2248 lb 0.1003 · 10–3 long ton 0.1123 · 10–3 short ton 7.2306 pdl
(UK) (US) (poundal)
Speed 1 m/s 1 m/s 1 m/s 1 m/s
9 3.2808 ft/s 196.08 ft/min 1.944 knots 2.237 mph
Pressure 1 bar 1 bar 1 bar 1 bar
14.50 psi 29.53 in Hg 33.45 ft H2O 401.44 in H2O
Energy, 1J 1J 1J
Work
0.3725 · 10–6 HPh 0.9478 · 10–3 BTU 0.5263 · 10–3 PCU
For
Notes

9-103
Notes
For
Alphabetical index
Page
Alphabetical index 10-2
10

10-1
Alphabetical index
Numerics
1-pole, 2-pole circuit .........................................................8-4
A
ACB ...................................................................................7-3
Accessories contactors .....................................................5-60
Actuation, positive ..........................................................3-10
Adjustable roller lever ......................................................3-10
AGM ...............................................................................6-21
Air circuit-breakers ............................................................7-3
All about Motors ...............................................................8-1
AND circuit ......................................................................5-45
Angled roller lever ...........................................................3-10
Approval authorities worldwide .......................................9-28
AS-Interface® data bus ...................................................2-87
Asynchronous motors ........................................................2-2
ATEX accreditation
Motor protection system ZEV ......................................5-68
Overload relay ............................................................5-64
Thermistor machine protection device EMT6 ..............5-74
ATEX approval
EMT6 .........................................................................8-11
PKZM0, PKZM4 ............................................................6-4
Rotary switches ..........................................................4-17
Switch-disconnectors ..................................................4-17
10 Automatic reset .................................................................8-3
Automatic stator starters
Engineering starting resistor .......................................8-13
Engineering starting transformer ................................8-13
Example resistors .......................................................8-89
Example starting transformers ....................................8-92
Properties squirrel cage rotor ......................................8-14
Automation systems ..........................................................1-1
Auxiliary contact
Contact sequence .........................................................7-5
Early-make auxiliary contact HIV ..................................7-6
PKZ2 ..........................................................................6-21
PKZM01, PKZM0, PKZM4 .............................................6-7
Standard auxiliary contact ............................................7-5
Trip-indicating auxiliary contact ....................................7-5
For
Alphabetical index
B
Basic circuit
Changeover circuit ..................................................... 5-46
Hold-on circuit ........................................................... 5-46
Impulse changeover relay .......................................... 5-47
Negation ................................................................... 5-44
Parallel switching ...................................................... 5-45
Permanent contact .................................................... 5-44
Series circuit .............................................................. 5-45
Star/delta starting easy .............................................. 5-48
Basics of drives engineering .............................................. 2-7
Bimetal
Motor protection ....................................................... 8-12
Motor-protective circuit-breaker .................................. 6-4
Overload relay ........................................................... 5-64
Block diagrams
PKZ2 ................................................................. 6-22–6-33
PKZM01, PKZM0, PKZM4 ................................. 6-10–6-15
Braking oversynchronous ................................................ 8-57
Braking resistor ............................................................... 2-82
Bridging during starting
Contactor .................................................................... 8-8
Heavy starting duty ...................................................... 8-9
Overload relays .......................................................... 8-25
Busbar, flexible ............................................................... 2-87
Bus-enabled motor starters 10
a Networkable motor starters ........................................ 1-8
Bypass connection .......................................................... 2-46
C
Cage Clamp .................................................................... 5-61
CAN cable ...................................................................... 1-15
CANopen .......................................................................... 1-6
Capacitor
Group compensation ........................................ 8-15, 8-16
Individual compensation ............................................ 8-15
Use of reactors .......................................................... 8-16
Capacitor group compensation ....................................... 8-16
Capacitor unit ................................................................. 7-15
Cascaded control ............................................................ 2-50
Changeover switch
Voltage meters .......................................................... 4-12

10-3
Alphabetical index
Changeover switches .........................................................4-5

Ammeters ...................................................................4-12
Wattmeters ................................................................4-13
Circuit diagram
Circuit-breaker internal circuit diagrams .......................7-7
General ......................................................................8-17
Circuit diagram auxiliary protection ...................................5-6
Circuit documents
Circuit diagram ...........................................................8-17
General ......................................................................8-17
Wiring diagram ..........................................................8-18
Circuit examples
Bridging during starting ..............................................8-25
Contactors ..................................................................8-24
Circuit-breaker remote switching .......................................7-9
Circuit-breakers
Internal circuit diagrams ...............................................7-7
IZM ..............................................................................7-3
Mesh network circuit-breaker .....................................7-15
NZM .............................................................................7-2
Remote operation .......................................................7-16
Residual-current release .............................................7-18
Switch position ...........................................................7-13
Transformer switch .....................................................7-17
Classification types of soft starters ...................................2-18
10 Coil functions ..................................................................5-41
Combicon connector ........................................................1-15
COM-LINK connection .....................................................5-38
Compact circuit-breakers ...................................................7-2
Compact PLC .....................................................................1-2
compact starter .................................................................6-3
Compensated motor ........................................................8-10
Conductors ......................................................................9-81
Conductors, characteristic impedance ..............................5-34
Connection
RA-MO to AS-Interface® ...........................................2-90
RA-SP to AS-Interface® .............................................2-93
Sensors (RA-MO) ........................................................2-90
Connection examples
DF5, DV5 .......................................................... 2-69–2-75
DF6 .................................................................. 2-77–2-79
DM4 ................................................................. 2-54–2-67
DS4 .................................................................. 2-38–2-53
DV6 .................................................................. 2-80–2-85
For
Alphabetical index
Connection examples, DF5 ..................................... 2-69–2-75

Connection examples, DF6 ..................................... 2-77–2-79
Connection examples, DM4 ................................... 2-54–2-67
Connection examples, DS4 .................................... 2-38–2-53
Connection examples, DV5 .................................... 2-69–2-75
Connection examples, DV6 .................................... 2-80–2-85
Connection type
Delta connection .......................................................... 2-4
Star connection ............................................................ 2-4
Contact module PKZ2 ..................................................... 6-17
Contact module PKZM0 .................................................... 6-4
Contact protection relay ................................................. 5-75
Contact sequence of the auxiliary contacts ....................... 7-5
Contactor DILM .............................................................. 5-58
Contactor for capacitor ................................................. 8-100
Contactor relay modules ................................................... 5-2
Contactor relays ................................................................ 5-2
Characteristic letter ..................................................... 5-3
Circuit diagram ............................................................ 5-6
Contactor, marking ......................................................... 8-23
Contactors ...................................................................... 5-58
DIL ............................................................................. 5-58
DILM ......................................................................... 5-61
DILP ........................................................................... 5-63
Contacts, positively opening ........................................... 3-12
Control circuit devices 10
For direct-on-line start ............................................... 8-36
For star-delta ............................................................. 8-49
RMQ ............................................................................ 3-2
Control circuit devices for multi-speed contactors .. 8-67–8-71
Control circuit supply motor ............................................ 8-22

10-5
Alphabetical index
Control relay
Basic circuits .................................................... 5-44–5-49
Circuit operation ........................................................5-49
Coil functions .............................................................5-41
COM-LINK connection ................................................5-38
Contacts .....................................................................5-40
Display text ................................................................5-55
easy500 and easy700 .................................................5-17
Fast counter, ..............................................................5-24
Field bus connection ...................................................5-39
Frequency generator ...................................................5-24
Function blocks ..........................................................5-40
Incremental encoder ...................................................5-24
Overview ....................................................................5-12
Parameter sets for times .............................................5-42
Power supply ..............................................................5-18
Relay outputs .............................................................5-25
Remote display ...........................................................5-37
Remote display, text display .......................................5-16
Shift register ...............................................................5-53
Stairwell lighting ........................................................5-50
Star/delta starting .......................................................5-48
Transistor outputs ......................................................5-26
Co-ordination type motor protection .................................8-7
Current limiter ......................................................... 6-5, 6-17
10 Current limiter PKZ2 ........................................................6-32
Current monitor ...............................................................5-78
Current transformer-operated relay ZW7 ...........................8-7
D
DC motors .........................................................................8-4
Degrees of protection for electrical equipment .................9-58
Delta circuit .....................................................................2-24
Delta circuit, motor ..........................................................2-74
Delta connection ..................................................... 2-4, 2-62
Device arrangement, XC100/XC200 ................................1-14
DeviceNet ..........................................................................1-6
DF5, DF6 .........................................................................2-26
Diagnosis tripping cause ..................................................5-68
Differential current ..........................................................7-19
DIL ..................................................................................5-59
DIL...K .............................................................................8-16
DILA ..................................................................................5-2
For
Alphabetical index
DILER ................................................................................ 5-2

DILM .............................................................................. 5-61
DILP ................................................................................ 5-63
Diode suppressor .............................................................. 5-4
Direct-on-line starter, motor-protective circuit-breaker ...... 6-3
Display and operator units, HMI ...................................... 1-12
Display PLC
a Embedded HMI-PLC ............................................ 1-13
DIUL ............................................................................... 8-28
DM4 ............................................................................... 2-22
DOL starters with bypass ................................................ 2-21
DOL starting
Features .................................................................... 2-10
General ....................................................................... 2-5
Double break .................................................................... 5-2
Double-frame terminal .................................................... 5-61
Drives ........................................................................ 2-1, 2-7
DS4 ................................................................................ 2-19
DV5, DV6 ....................................................................... 2-26
E
Early-make auxiliary contact HIV ....................................... 7-6
Earth fault current ........................................................... 5-67
Earth-fault monitoring .................................................... 5-70
Earth-leakage circuit-breaker .......................................... 7-19
EEx e motors 10
Overload relay ........................................................... 5-64
PKZM0, PKZM4 ........................................................... 6-4
Electr. motor starters, drives general ................................. 2-2
Electrical connector ........................................................... 6-5
Electronic safety relay ESR .............................................. 5-77
Electronic timing relays ..................................................... 5-8
EM4 ................................................................................ 1-19
Embedded HMI-PLC ........................................................ 1-13
EMC measures ................................................................ 2-32
EMC-compliant connection ............................................. 2-31
Emergency-Stop function ................................................ 7-10
EMR4 ............................................................................. 5-78
EMT6 .............................................................................. 5-74
Encoder .......................................................................... 2-82

10-7
Alphabetical index
Engineering
EM4 and LE4 ..............................................................1-19
Motor ............................................................... 8-13–8-16
PS4 ............................................................................1-16
Switching of capacitors ..............................................8-15
Three-phase automatic starters ..................................8-13
Wiring example, XC100/XC200 ..................................1-14
XC100/XC200 ............................................................1-14
ESR .................................................................................5-77
Evaluation device ZEV .....................................................5-68
Expansion easy , MFD-Titan
Central and decentral .................................................5-30
Network connection ...................................................5-33
Network connection EASY-NET ..................................5-31
Overview ....................................................................5-29
Explosive atmospheres ....................................................4-17
F
Fast counter, ...................................................................5-24
Fault indication, differential .............................................6-12
Field bus connection ........................................................5-39
Flat cable ........................................................................2-87
Flexible busbar ................................................................2-87
Four pole contactor a Contactor DILP ...........................5-63
Frequency generator ........................................................5-24
10 Frequency inverters, design .............................................2-26
Frequency inverters, general ..............................................2-7
FU a Frequency inverters ................................................2-7
Function blocks ...............................................................5-40
Fuseless
Contactor DIL .............................................................8-24
Reversing contactor DIUL ...........................................8-28
Fuses contactor DIL .........................................................8-24
G
Galvanic separation ...........................................................5-2
German Trade Association ...............................................3-10
Graphic operator panel ....................................................1-12
Group compensation .......................................................8-15
Group protection ...............................................................6-6
For
Alphabetical index
H
Hamburg circuit, off position interlock .......................... 8-108
Heater switches .............................................................. 4-14
Heavy starting duty
Bridging during starting ............................................... 8-9
Example .................................................................... 8-26
Motor protection ......................................................... 8-7
HIA example ................................................................... 7-13
HIA, contact sequence ...................................................... 7-5
High-capacity compact starters ....................................... 6-22
HIN example ................................................................... 7-13
HIN, contact sequence ...................................................... 7-5
HIV ................................................................................... 7-6
HMI ................................................................................ 1-12
HMI-PLC
Embedded ................................................................. 1-13
Hold-on circuit ................................................................ 5-46
I
I/O system ......................................................................... 1-6
I/Oassistant ....................................................................... 1-7
I/Oassistant diagnostics software ...................................... 1-7
I/Oassistant engineering software ..................................... 1-7
Impulse changeover relay ............................................... 5-47
Indication of tripping circuit-breaker ............................... 7-13
Individual compensation ................................................. 8-15 10
Infra-red touch panel
Infra-red touch panels
a Touch operator panels ......................................... 1-12
In-line circuit ................................................................... 2-24
Inputs
Analog .............................................................. 5-21–5-23
Digital, AC devices ..................................................... 5-19
Digital, DC devices ..................................................... 5-20
Insulation monitoring relay ............................................. 5-80
Interface assignment, XC100/XC200
CANopen ................................................................... 1-15
Interlock circuits, rotary switches .................................... 4-11
Interlocking ...................................................................... 5-2
IT .................................................................................... 8-20
IZM ................................................................................... 7-3

10-9
Alphabetical index
L
LE4 ..................................................................................1-19
Let-through energy ..........................................................2-89
Level monitoring relay .....................................................5-79
Limiter, current
a Current limiter PKZ2 ............................................6-32
a Current limiter PKZM0, PKZM4 ..............................6-5
Load-shedding contact ......................................................4-4
Local expansion a PS40 Series networking ...................1-10
Logic table ............................................................. 5-44–5-46
LSI ...................................................................................3-17
LSO .................................................................................3-19
LS-Titan ...........................................................................3-12
M
Main switch .....................................................................7-10
Main transfer switch ......................................................8-109
Maintenance switches, rotary switches ..............................4-4
Markings, contactor ........................................................8-23
Master switch, off position interlock ..............................8-109
MCCB ................................................................................7-2
Measurement and monitoring relay EMR4 .......................5-78
Mechanical interlock .......................................................5-61
Mesh network circuit-breaker ..........................................7-15
Mirror contact .................................................................5-62
10 Modular PLC a PS40 Series networking ........................1-10
Modular PLCs ....................................................................1-2
Moeller
Motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZ ............................6-2
Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 .......................6-16
Monitoring relay ..............................................................5-78
For
Alphabetical index
Motor
Circuit documents ...................................................... 8-17
Control circuit device direct-on-line start .................... 8-36
Control circuit supply ................................................. 8-22
Engineering ...................................................... 8-13–8-16
Motor windings ......................................................... 8-54
Multi speed switch PKZ2 ............................................ 8-87
Multi-speed contactor ................................................ 8-57
No. of poles ............................................................... 8-51
Pole changing ................................................... 8-51–8-53
Power supply ............................................................. 8-19
Separate windings ..................................................... 8-51
Star-delta of three-phase motors ...................... 8-37–8-45
Star-delta with PKZ2 ......................................... 8-46–8-48
Starting with PKZ2 ............................................ 8-32–8-35
Switching of capacitors ................................... 8-98–8-101
Switching on three-phase motors ...................... 8-24–8-31
System transfer ........................................................ 8-109
Tapped winding ......................................................... 8-51
Motor connection ........................................................... 2-93
Motor control unit .......................................................... 2-90
Motor full-load current ................................................... 9-77
Motor operator circuit-breaker ........................................ 7-16
Motor overload relay, motor protection .......................... 5-64
Motor overload relays Z, overview .................................. 5-58
Motor power supply ........................................................ 8-19 10
Motor protection ..................................................... 8-3–8-12
Motor protection system ZEV ................................. 5-67–5-73
Motor protection system ZEV, overview .......................... 5-58
Motor rating ................................................................... 5-61
Motor starter combination
a Networkable motor starters ........................................ 1-8
Motor starter combinations ............................................. 6-5
Motor starters, electronic .................................................. 2-1
Motor windings .............................................................. 8-54
Motor-protective circuit-breaker, overview ........................ 6-1
Motor-protective circuit-breakers
Operating principle schematic PKZ2 .................. 6-22–6-33
Operating principle schematics
PKZM01, PKZM0, PKZM4 ................................. 6-10–6-15
Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 ........................... 6-16
Motor-starter combination MSC ........................................ 6-5
Mounting ........................................................................ 5-73
xStart ........................................................................... 1-8
10-11
Alphabetical index
MSC ..................................................................................6-3
Multi Function Display
COM-LINK connection ................................................5-38
Contacts .....................................................................5-40
Fast counter ...............................................................5-24
Field bus connection ...................................................5-39
Frequency generator ...................................................5-24
Function blocks ..........................................................5-40
Incremental encoder ...................................................5-24
MFD-Titan and easy800 .............................................5-17
Overview ....................................................................5-12
Power supply ..............................................................5-18
Relay outputs .............................................................5-25
Remote display ...........................................................5-37
Remote display, text display .......................................5-16
Transistor outputs ......................................................5-26
Visualisation ...............................................................5-56
Multi speed switch for three-phase motors ............ 8-59–8-66
Star-delta ......................................................... 8-72–8-86
Multi speed switch with PKZ2 .........................................8-87
Multi-speed contactor .....................................................8-57
Control circuit devices ...................................... 8-67–8-71
Star-delta ...................................................................8-72
Multi-speed switch
Bridging during starting ................................................8-9
10 Multi-speed switches
Rotary switches ............................................................4-7
Multi-speed switching, marking .......................................8-23
N
NAND circuit ...................................................................5-45
Network connection
Bus terminal resistor ...................................................5-33
Conductors .................................................................5-34
Interface element .......................................................5-36
Network cable ............................................................5-33
Sockets, plugs ............................................................5-33
Networking
Display and operator units ..........................................1-12
Embedded HMI-PLC ...................................................1-13
PS40 Series ................................................................1-10
xSystem ......................................................................1-11
NHI example ....................................................................7-13
For
Alphabetical index
NHI, contact sequence ...................................................... 7-5

NHI, PKZ2 ....................................................................... 6-21
NOR circuit ..................................................................... 5-45
NOT gate ........................................................................ 5-44
NZM ................................................................................. 7-2
NZM-XCM ...................................................................... 7-15
O
Off-delayed undervoltage release ...................................... 7-4
Off-postion interlock
Hamburg circuit ....................................................... 8-108
Load ........................................................................ 8-108
Master switch .......................................................... 8-109
Ohm's Law ..................................................................... 9-90
On-delayed timing relay .................................................. 5-47
Operands ........................................................................ 5-40
Operating frequency ......................................................... 8-3
OR circuit ........................................................................ 5-45
Output easy, MFD analogue ........................................... 5-28
Overload motor .............................................................. 5-67
Overload motor-protective circuit-breaker ......................... 6-2
Overload protection contactor ........................................ 8-24
Overload protection, Rapid Link ...................................... 2-88
Overload relay ................................................................ 2-55
Overload relay a Motor protection overload relay ........ 5-64
Overload relay function ................................................... 6-16 10
Overload relay function PKZ2 .......................................... 6-33
Overload relay time-delayed ............................................. 8-5
Overload relays
In delta circuit ............................................................ 8-38
In motor winding ....................................................... 8-37
In the mains line ........................................................ 8-37
Tripping ....................................................................... 8-3
Oversynchronous braking ................................................ 8-57
Overvoltage .................................................................... 2-55
P
Personnel protection
AT ............................................................................. 3-13
ATR ........................................................................... 3-16
Enhanced .................................................................. 3-14
PFR ................................................................................. 7-19
Phase failure ................................................................... 5-67

10-13
Alphabetical index
Phase imbalance relay .....................................................5-79

Phase monitoring relay ....................................................5-78
Phase sequence relay ......................................................5-79
Phase-failure sensitivity ...................................................5-64
PKM0 ................................................................................6-5
PKZ ...................................................................................6-2
PKZ2 .................................................................................6-2
PKZM0 ..............................................................................6-2
PKZM01 ............................................................................6-2
PKZM0-T ...........................................................................6-5
PKZM4 ..............................................................................6-2
PLC ...................................................................................1-2
Pole-changing motors ............................................ 8-51–8-53
Power bus .......................................................................2-87
Power electronics ..............................................................2-7
Power feed ......................................................................2-88
Power supply
easy ...........................................................................5-18
MFD-Titan ..................................................................5-18
Process protection ...........................................................3-15
PROFIBUS-DP ....................................................................1-6
Programmable contacts ...................................................5-68
Programmable logic controllers, PLCs ................................1-2
Programming software ......................................................1-2
Protective measures ........................................................9-34
10 PS4 ..................................................................................1-16
PS4 compact PLC a PS40 Series networking .................1-10
PS4 wiring examples ............................................. 1-16–1-18
PS40 Series ........................................................................1-2
PTC Thermistor , Thermistor machine protection relay .....5-74
PTC-thermistor, motor protection ....................................8-11
Pump connection .............................................................2-48
Pump control
Liquid-level actuated switch .....................................8-106
Pressure switch ........................................................8-104
Two pumps ..............................................................8-102
Pushbutton control circuit devices ...................................8-67
Push-through sensor ZEV .................................................5-68
Q
Quick-discharge resistor ..................................................8-98
For
Alphabetical index
R
Rapid Link ...................................................................... 2-86
RC suppressor ................................................................... 5-4
Reference letter contactor relays ....................................... 5-3
Reflected-light barrier ..................................................... 3-19
Reflected-light beam ....................................................... 3-19
Relay .............................................................................. 5-74
Remote display ............................................................... 5-37
Remote expansion a PS40 Series networking .............. 1-10
Remote I/O a XI/ON ...................................................... 1-6
Remote operator circuit-breaker ..................................... 7-16
Remote operator PKZ2 .................................................... 6-18
Remote switch off PKZ2 .................................................. 6-29
Remote switch off PKZM01, PKZM0, PKZM4 .................. 6-13
RE-PKZ2 ......................................................................... 6-18
Residual current protection ............................................. 7-18
Residual current release .................................................. 7-18
Residual-current relay ..................................................... 7-19
Residual-current release circuit-breaker .......................... 7-18
Resistive touch panel
a Touch operator panel .......................................... 1-12
Reversing combination a reversing contactor .............. 8-28
Reversing contactor ........................................................ 8-28
Reversing soft starter ...................................................... 2-43
Reversing star-delta 10
Rotary switches ........................................................... 4-6
Reversing start delta
Changing direction or rotation ................................... 8-44
Reversing ................................................................... 8-43
Reversing starter, motor-protective circuit-breaker ............ 6-3
Reversing starters, soft starters ....................................... 2-21
Reversing switches ........................................................... 4-5
RHI example ................................................................... 7-13
RHI, contact sequence ...................................................... 7-5
Risk reduction ................................................................. 9-56
RMQ16 ............................................................................. 3-2
RMQ-Titan® ..................................................................... 3-4
Rogowski principle ......................................................... 5-67
Rogowski sensor ............................................................. 5-73
Roller lever ..................................................................... 3-10
Roller plunger ................................................................. 3-10

10-15
Alphabetical index
Rotary switches
ATEX approval ............................................................4-18
Changeover switches ....................................................4-5
Heater switches ..........................................................4-14
Interlock circuits .........................................................4-11
Main switches ..............................................................4-3
Maintenance switches ..................................................4-3
Meter selector switches ..............................................4-12
Mounting forms ...........................................................4-2
Multi-speed switches ....................................................4-7
ON-OFF switches ..........................................................4-3
Reversing star-delta ......................................................4-6
Reversing switches .......................................................4-5
Speed switching .........................................................8-57
Star-delta .....................................................................4-6
Step switches .............................................................4-15
Use ..............................................................................4-2
Rotor automatic starter
Engineering starting resistor .......................................8-13
Properties slipring rotor ..............................................8-14
Slipring rotor ..............................................................8-94
Rotor-critical ....................................................................8-11
Round cable feeder .........................................................2-87
RS-PKZ2 ..........................................................................6-18
10 S
Safety position switches ..................................................3-12
Safety relay .....................................................................5-77
Screening ........................................................................2-35
Screening measures .........................................................2-33
Sealing power .................................................................5-61
Selectivity a time selectivity ..........................................7-14
Semiconductor contactors .................................................2-7
Sensitive to AC/DC ..........................................................7-18
Sensor belt ZEV ...............................................................5-68
Separate windings
Multi speed switch ........................................... 8-63–8-66
Speeds .......................................................................8-51
Separation galvanic ...........................................................5-2
Series resistor ................................................................8-100
Shift register ....................................................................5-53
Short-circuit .......................................................................6-2
Short-circuit current, maximum ........................................2-89
For
Alphabetical index
Short-circuit monitoring ......................................... 5-72, 5-74

Short-circuit protection ................................................... 8-24
Short-circuit protection, RA-MO ...................................... 2-88
Short-circuit rating ............................................................ 8-6
Short-circuit release .......................................................... 6-4
Shunt release
Operating principle schematic PKZ2 ........................... 6-29
PKZM01, PKZM0, PKZM4 ............................................ 6-9
Remote switch off PKZ2 ............................................. 6-20
Shunt releases
Circuit-breaker remote tripping .................................... 7-3
Circuit-breakers ......................................................... 7-17
Remote switch off ........................................................ 7-9
Signal Towers SL ............................................................... 3-8
Single phase motors ......................................................... 8-4
Single-phasing sensitive .................................................... 6-4
Slipring rotor a Rotor automatic starter ....................... 8-94
Soft starters ...................................................................... 2-7
Classification types .................................................... 2-18
Examples ................................................................... 2-13
Features .................................................................... 2-12
Soft starters DM4 ............................................................ 2-22
Soft starters DS4 ............................................................. 2-19
Soft starting a Soft starters ............................................ 2-7
Special purpose relays ....................................................... 5-8
Speed control unit .......................................................... 2-93 10
Speeds, separate windings .............................................. 8-51
Spring rod actuator ......................................................... 3-10
Spring terminals .............................................................. 5-61
Stairwell lighting ............................................................. 5-50
Standard auxiliary contact ................................................ 7-5
On-Off annunciation .................................................. 7-13
PKZ2 .......................................................................... 6-21
Star connection ................................................................. 2-4
Star connection, motor ................................................... 2-75

10-17
Alphabetical index
Star-delta
Bridging during starting ................................................8-8
General ........................................................................2-5
Marking .....................................................................8-23
Motor start .................................................................2-11
Multi-speed contactor ................................................8-72
Of three-phase motors ...................................... 8-37–8-45
Rotary switches ............................................................4-6
SDAINL ............................................................. 8-39–8-42
With overload relay ....................................................8-37
With PKZ2 ........................................................ 8-46–8-48
Starting with PKZ2 ................................................ 8-32–8-35
Step switches
Changeover switches ..................................................4-16
ON-OFF switches, .......................................................4-16
Stay-put switches .......................................................4-16
Sucosoft ............................................................................1-2
Summation current transformer .......................................5-67
Suppressor
Diodes ..........................................................................5-4
RC ................................................................................5-4
Varistor ........................................................................5-4
Suppressor circuits .............................................................5-4
integrated ..................................................................5-61
Plug-in .......................................................................5-61
10 Swiss accident prevention authority (SUVA) .....................3-10
Switch position indication ..................................................4-4
Switch position indication circuit-breaker ........................7-13
Switch-disconnectors
ATEX approval ............................................................4-18
Mounting forms ...........................................................4-2
Use ..............................................................................4-2
Switching of capacitors ........................................ 8-98–8-101
Switching on three-phase motors .......................... 8-24–8-31
System-protective circuit-breakers .....................................6-2
For
Alphabetical index
T
Tapped winding ................................................................ 8-9
3 speeds .................................................................... 8-52
4 speeds .................................................................... 8-53
Feed drive .................................................................. 8-30
Marking ..................................................................... 8-23
Multi speed switch ............................................ 8-59–8-62
Multi speed switch star-delta ............................ 8-72–8-86
Pole-changing motors ................................................ 8-51
Tapped winding arrangement
Rotary switches .................................................. 4-7–4-10
Temperature compensated ............................................... 6-4
Temperature monitoring ................................................. 8-11
Terminal assignment ....................................................... 7-22
Terminal assignment, XC100/XC200 ............................... 1-14
Test authorities and approval stamps .............................. 9-32
Text display a xSystem networking .............................. 1-11
Text operator panel ........................................................ 1-12
Thermal overload relays .................................................. 5-64
Thermistor ...................................................................... 8-11
Thermistor machine protection device ............................. 5-74
Thermistor monitored ..................................................... 5-70
Thermistor motor protection ........................................... 5-71
Thermistor protection ..................................................... 5-71
Three-phase asynchronous motors .................................... 2-3
Three-phase automatic rotor starters ..................... 8-94–8-97 10
Three-phase automatic starters
Automatic stator starters ........................................... 8-13
Engineering ............................................................... 8-13
Features .................................................................... 8-14
Rotor automatic starter .............................................. 8-13
Three-phase automatic stator starters .................... 8-89–8-93
Three-phase motors .......................................................... 2-3
Three-phase motors star-delta
Three-wire control .......................................................... 7-16
Time selectivity circuit-breaker ........................................ 7-14
Timing relays, functions .................................................... 5-8
Tool-less ........................................................................... 6-5
Touch panel
a Touch operator panel .......................................... 1-12

10-19
Alphabetical index
Transformer switch circuit-breaker ...................................7-17

Transformer-protective circuit-breaker ...............................6-5
Trip-indicating auxiliary contact .........................................7-5
PKZ2 ..........................................................................6-21
PKZM01, PKZM0, PKZM4 .............................................6-8
Trip-indicating auxiliary contact circuit-breaker ..................7-5
Tripping characteristics
Motors protection system ...........................................5-69
Overload relay ............................................................5-65
Tripping CLASS ................................................................5-67
Two-wire control .............................................................7-16
U
U coil .................................................................................6-9
U/f inverters a Frequency inverters .................................2-7
Unbalanced current consumtion ......................................5-67
Undervoltage release
Circuit-breakers ..........................................................7-17
Interlocking of several circuit-breakers ........................7-12
Off-delayed ..................................................................7-4
PKZ2 ..........................................................................6-20
PKZM01, PKZM0, PKZM4 .............................................6-9
Remote switch off ........................................................7-9
Shut off ......................................................................7-11
Starting interlock ........................................................7-11
10 UPIL ................................................................................8-59
Use or reactor capacitor ..................................................8-16
Utilisation categories for contactors .................................9-70
Utilisation categories for switch-disconnectors ...... 9-74, 9-75
V
Varistor suppressor ............................................................5-4
Vector control ..................................................................2-29
Vector frequency inverters .................................................2-7
Version E contactor relays .................................................5-3
VHI ....................................................................................7-6
Visualisation with MFD Titan ...........................................5-56
For
Alphabetical index
Voltage releases
Interlock with undervoltage release ........................... 7-12
Off-delayed undervoltage release ................................ 7-4
PKZ2 .......................................................................... 6-20
PKZM01, PKZM0, PKZM4 ............................................ 6-9
Remote switch-off with shunt release .......................... 7-9
Shunt releases ............................................................. 7-3
Shut off, undervoltage release ................................... 7-11
Starting interlock of the undervoltage release ............ 7-11
Undervoltage release ................................................... 7-4
Undervoltage release with remote switch off ............... 7-9
W
Wiring diagram ............................................................... 8-18
easy ........................................................................... 5-41
Functions easy ........................................................... 5-49
Stairwell lighting ........................................................ 5-50
X
XC modular PLCa Networking
xSystem ..................................................................... 1-11
XC100/XC200 ................................................................. 1-14
XC100/XC200 interface assignment
RS 232 ....................................................................... 1-15
XI/ON ............................................................................... 1-6
XI/ON a I/Oassistant engineering software .................... 1-7 10
XI/ON modular I/O system ................................................ 1-6
XOR circuit ..................................................................... 5-46
XSoft ................................................................................ 1-5
xStart motor starters ......................................................... 1-8
xStart networkable motor starters ..................................... 1-8
xStart-XS1 network motor starters .................................... 1-8
xSystem, system components ............................................ 1-4
Z
ZEV ........................................................................ 5-67–5-73

10-21
Notes
10
For

Wiring Diagram

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Wiring Diagram

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wiring Diagram

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wiring Manual

FB0200-004GB-INT MDS/Doku/ 02/05 97 95

Article No.: 106254 U1 V2

For Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

1st edition 2000, 12/99

© Moeller GmbH, Bonn

All the circuits are designed according to our best expertise

All rights reserved, including those of the translation.

Subject to alterations without notice.

Printed on bleached cellulose, 100 % free from chlorine and

For Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

For Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

For0-2Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

For Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

Moellers' entire PLC range is described in the Main

For1-2Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

For Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

For1-4Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

For Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

a Gateway e End plate

For1-6Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

For Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

For1-8Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

a Incoming terminal for

For Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

PS4-141-MM1 Suconet K + RS 232 64 kByte

PS4-201-MM1 Suconet K + RS 232 64 kByte

EM4-101-... Suconet K/K1

CM4-504-GS1 Suconet K, PROFIBUS-DP

S40 Programming software

For Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

MI4-110-KC1 120 X 32 11 LCD monochrome

Graphic operator panel M14

MI4-150-KI1 320 X 240 56 Monochrome

Touch operator panel M14 (Resistive)

MI4-130-TA1 320 X 240 – Monochrome

MC-HPG-230 320 X 240 Infra-red STN colour

XVH-340-57CAN 320 X 240 Infra-red STN colour

XV-442-57CQB-x-13-1 320 X 240 Infra-red STN colour

XV-440-10TVB-x-13-1 640 X 480 Infra-red TFT

XV-440-12TSB-x-13-1 800 X 600 Infra-red TFT

XV-440-15TXB-x-13-1 1024 X 768 Infra-red TFT

Note: The XVH- ... devices are also available

For Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

Terminal assignment Wiring example of power supply unit

Pin Designation Description

For Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

* Insulation monitoring must be provided ** IEC/EN 60204-1 specifies that a control

* For operation without insulation monitoring,

For Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

Digital Input Digital Input

* For operation without insulation

I> I> I> I> I> I>

K1 Q15 Q16 Q17 K1 Q12

Q18 Q19 Q14 P1

* Insulation monitoring must be provided

For Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

For Immediate Delivery call KMParts.com at (866) 595-9616

Short-circuit, Short-circiuit, Short-circiuit,